Ar Tax

Oracler Receivables Tax Manual
Release 11i
January 2000
Oracler Receivables Tax Manual Release 11i The part number for this book is A8082801. Copyright E 1988, 2000, Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved. Primary Authors: Nigel Smith, Bonnie Ng, Jennifer Webster Major Contributors: Christopher Andrews, Stephen Damiani, Alan Fothergill Contributors: Vikram Ahluwalia, Michael Che, Avery Chin, Toru Kawamura, Tanji Koshio, Peggy Larson, Fiona Purves The Programs (which include both the software and documentation) contain proprietary information of Oracle Corporation; they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright, patent and other intellectual and industrial property law. Reverse engineering, disassembly or decompilation of the Programs is prohibited. Program Documentation is licensed for use solely to support the deployment of the Programs and not for any other purpose. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the documentation, please report them to us in writing. Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error free. Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs, no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation. If the Programs are delivered to the US Government or anyone licensing or using the Programs on behalf of the US Government, the following notice is applicable: RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are commercial computer software and use, duplication and disclosure of the Programs including documentation, shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement. Otherwise, Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are restricted computer software and use, duplication and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 52.22719, Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights (June, 1987). Oracle Corporation, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065. The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear, aviation, mass transit, medical, or other inherently dangerous applications. It shall be licensees responsibility to take all appropriate failsafe, back up, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes, and Oracle disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs. ORACLE, Oracle Alert, Oracle Financials, SQL*Loader, SQL*Plus, and Oracle Reports are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation Oracle Capacity, Oracle Alliance Program (SM), Oracle Application Object Library, CASE*Generator, Oracle7, Oracle Application Display Manager, Oracle Applications, Oracle Applications Window Manager, Oracle Assets, Oracle Bills of Material, Oracle Business Manager, Oracle CASE, Oracle Data Browser, Oracle Data Query, Oracle General Ledger, Oracle Government Financials, Oracle Graphics, Oracle Human Resources, Oracle Imaging, Oracle Inventory, Oracle*Mail, Oracle Manufacturing, Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP, Oracle Order Entry, Oracle Payroll, Oracle Payables, Oracle Personnel, Oracle Projects, Oracle Purchasing, Oracle Receivables, Oracle*Terminal, Oracle Toolkit, Oracle Work in Process, PL/SQL, Pro*C, and SQL*TextRetrieval are trademarks of Oracle Corporation.Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Chapter 1
Tax Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1
Chapter 2
Value Added Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Country Specific Tax Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing Value Added Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Checklist for Value Added Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Steps for Value Added Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying VAT Tax Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customers with Invoices at 0 VAT and no VAT Registration Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 22 26 2 10 2 11 2 29 2 31 2 32 2 34
Chapter 3
Sales Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing US Sales Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Checklist for US Sales Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Steps for US Sales Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Tax Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . US Sales Tax Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . US Sales Tax Reconciliation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31 32 36 37 3 21 3 23 3 23
Contents
US Sales Tax Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 33
Chapter 4
Implementing Canadian Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing Canadian Sales Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Checklist for Canadian Sales Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Steps for Canadian Sales Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Tax Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canadian Tax Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41 42 48 49 4 28 4 30
Chapter 5
Tax Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deferred Tax Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Accounting for Discounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Accounting for Miscellaneous Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Accounting for Adjustments and Finance Charges . . . . Tax Accounting and Receivables Application Rule Sets . . . .
51 52 55 5 13 5 18 5 22 5 28
Chapter 6
Set Up Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Codes and Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Locations and Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations . . . . . . . . Reviewing Sales Tax Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Rate Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61 62 67 6 10 6 12 6 14 6 16 6 20 6 26
Chapter 7
General Tax Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Receivables Tax Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Code Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Group Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Received Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Taxonly: Open Invoices Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales Tax Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Exempt Customer Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Exempt Product Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Exceptions Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Reconciliation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71 72 74 76 77 78 79 7 10 7 11 7 11 7 12
ii
Oracle Receivables Tax Manual
Tax Register Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 20 Financial Tax Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 24
Chapter 8
Open Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Address Validation Data and Sales Tax Rates . . . . . . . Overview of Sales Tax Rate Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing to Load Sales Tax Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Data From Your Feeder System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales Tax Rate Interface Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Sales Tax Rate Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Tax Rate Interface Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Interface Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Termination of the Tax Interface Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales Tax Rate Date Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action Codes of Sales Tax Rate Interface Program . . . . . . . . Sales Tax Rate Interface Program Updates of AR_TAX_INTERFACE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing the Tax Vendor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Parameters for PL/SQL Stored Procedures . . . . . . . . .
81 82 84 85 87 89 8 11 8 13 8 16 8 18 8 19 8 22 8 25 8 29 8 30
Chapter 9
Tax Reporting Ledger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Reporting Ledger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Organization Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Reporting Ledger Column Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Descriptive Flexfields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91 92 9 16 9 24 9 68
Chapter 10
Tax Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Calculating Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Tax: An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tax Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accounting for Inclusive and Exclusive Taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . Compounding Tax Codes in a Tax Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Tax from your Revenue Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure . . Change Assignments for Tax Account and Exempt Level Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure . . . . . . . . .
10 1 10 2 10 5 10 9 10 16 10 26 10 28 10 29 10 33 10 34 10 36 10 38
Contents
iii
Glossary Index
iv
Preface
Welcome to Release 11i of the Oracle Receivables Tax Manual. This manual provides you with all the information you need to manage tax within Oracle Receivables, Oracle Order Management, Oracle Sales, and Oracle Web Customers. It is organized for fast, easy access to detailed information about the following: Implementation procedures Oracle Receivables forms and windows Oracle Receivables functions and features Oracle Receivables reports and listings Open Interfaces This preface explains how the Tax Manual is organized and introduces other sources of information that can help you.
Preface
vii
Audience for This Manual

This manual assumes you have a working knowledge of the following: The principles and customary practices of your business area. Oracle Receivables If you have never used Oracle Receivables, we suggest you attend one or more of the Oracle Receivables training classes available through Oracle University. The Oracle Applications graphical user interface. To learn more about the Oracle Applications graphical user interface, read the Oracle Applications User Guide. See Other Information Sources for more information about Oracle Applications product information.
How To Use This Manual

This manual contains the information you need to understand and use Oracle Receivables. This preface explains how this manual is organized and introduces other sources of information that can help you. This manual contains the following chapters: Chapter 1 provides a brief overview of the three basic types of tax supported by Oracle Receivables. Chapter 2 explains how to implement Value Added Tax for your Oracle Application and provides detailed descriptions of each VAT report and listing. Chapter 3 explains how to implement US Sales Tax for your Oracle Application and provides detailed descriptions of each Sales Tax report and listing. Chapter 4 explains how to implement Canadian Tax for your Oracle Application and provides a detailed information about Canadian tax reporting. Chapter 5 describes how you can set up your application to calculate tax on adjustments, discounts, finance charges, and miscellaneous transactions. It also explains how you can implement deferred tax accounting with your application.
viii
Chapter 6 describes how to set up the various tax features in Oracle Applications, including tax codes, tax accounting, tax exemptions, and Tax Groups. Chapter 7 describes the reports you can use to review tax related information. Chapter 8 describes the Open Interfaces you can use to import sales tax rates from a sales tax vendor and how to integrate external tax calculation programs with Oracle Applications. Chapter 9 contains the Calculating Tax essay, which provides a detailed description of how Oracle Receivables calculates tax.
Finding Out Whats New

From the HTML help window for Oracle Receivables, choose the section that describes new features or whats new from the expandable menu. This section describes: New features in 11i. This information is updated for each new release of Oracle Receivables. Information about any features that were not yet available when this manual was printed. For example, if your system administrator has installed software from a mini pack as an upgrade, this document describes the new features.
Other Information Sources

You can choose from many sources of information, including online documentation, training, and support services, to increase your knowledge and understanding of Oracle Receivables. If this manual refers you to other Oracle Applications documentation, use only the Release 11i versions of those manuals unless we specify otherwise.
Online Documentation
All Oracle Applications documentation is available online (HTML and PDF). The technical reference guides are available in paper format only. Note that the HTML documentation is translated into over twenty languages.
Preface
ix
The HTML version of this manual is optimized for onscreen reading, and you can use it to follow hypertext links for easy access to other HTML manuals in the library. When you have an HTML window open, you can use the features on the left side of the window to navigate freely throughout all Oracle Applications documentation. You can use the Search feature to search by words or phrases. You can use the expandable menu to search for topics in the menu structure we provide. The Library option on the menu expands to show all Oracle Applications HTML documentation. You can view HTML help in the following ways: From an application window, use the help icon or the help menu to open a new Web browser and display help about that window. Use the documentation CD. Use a URL provided by your system administrator. Your HTML help may contain information that was not available when this manual was printed.
Related User Guides

Oracle Receivables shares business and setup information with other Oracle Applications products. Therefore, you may want to refer to other user guides when you set up and use Oracle Receivables. You can read the guides online by choosing Library from the expandable menu on your HTML help window, by reading from the Oracle Applications Document Library CD included in your media pack, or by using a Web browser with a URL that your system administrator provides. If you require printed guides, you can purchase them from the Oracle store at http://oraclestore.oracle.com.
User Guides Related to All Products

Oracle Applications User Guide This guide explains how to navigate the system, enter data, and query information, and introduces other basic features of the GUI available with this release of Oracle Receivables (and any other Oracle Applications product).
You can also access this user guide online by choosing Getting Started and Using Oracle Applications from the Oracle Applications help system. Oracle Alert User Guide Use this guide to define periodic and event alerts that monitor the status of your Oracle Applications data. Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard User Guide If you are implementing more than one Oracle product, you can use the Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard to coordinate your setup activities. This guide describes how to use the wizard. Oracle Applications Developers Guide This guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle Applications development staff. It describes the Oracle Application Object Library components needed to implement the Oracle Applications user interface described in the Oracle Applications User Interface Standards. It also provides information to help you build your custom Oracle Developer forms so that they integrate with Oracle Applications. Oracle Applications User Interface Standards This guide contains the user interface (UI) standards followed by the Oracle Applications development staff. It describes the UI for the Oracle Applications products and how to apply this UI to the design of an application built by using Oracle Forms.
User Guides Related to This Product

Oracle Receivables User Guide This user guide explains how to create and maintain transactions, enter and apply receipts, and enter customer information in Oracle Receivables. It also describes the Oracle Receivables open interfaces, such as AutoLockbox which lets you create and apply receipts and AutoInvoice which you can use to import and validate transactions from other systems.
Preface
xi
Integrating Oracle Receivables with Vertex Quantum This manual explains how to setup and use Vertex Quantum as your tax vendor. When implemented, the Oracle Tax Vendor Extension calls Vertex Quantum to return a tax rate or amount whenever a tax is calculated by the Oracle Receivables Tax Engine. This manual provides setup steps, a tutorial for using Vertex with Receivables, information about daytoday business processes, and a technical reference section. Integrating Oracle Receivables with Taxware Sales/Use Tax System This manual explains how to setup and use Taxware Sales/Use Tax System as your tax vendor. When implemented, the Oracle Tax Vendor Extension calls Taxware to return a tax rate or amount whenever a tax is calculated by the Oracle Receivables Tax Engine. This manual provides setup steps, a tutorial for using Taxware with Receivables, information about daytoday business processes, and a technical reference section. Oracle General Ledger User Guide Use this manual when you plan and define your chart of accounts, accounting period types and accounting calendar, functional currency, and set of books. It also describes how to define journal entry sources and categories so you can create journal entries for your general ledger. If you use multiple currencies, use this manual when you define additional rate types and enter daily rates. Oracle Cash Management User Guide This manual provides information about using Oracle Cash Management to clear your receipts, as well as reconciling bank statements with your outstanding balances, transactions, and receipts. Oracle Purchasing User Guide If you install Oracle Purchasing, refer to this user guide to read about entering and managing the purchase orders to which you match invoices. Oracle Inventory User Guide This manual explains how to define your items, units of measure classes, units of measure, and unit of measure conversions for use in
xii
measuring amounts for your units of production items, as well as other information about setting up and using Oracle Inventory. Oracle HRMS User Guide This manual explains how to enter your employees, so you can enter expense reports for them. It also explains how to set up organizations and site locations. CountrySpecific Manuals Use these manuals to meet statutory requirements and common business practices in your country or region. They also describe additional features added to Oracle Receivables to meet those requirements. Look for a user guide appropriate to your country; for example, see the Oracle Financials for the Czech Republic User Guide for more information about using this software in the Czech Republic. Multiple Reporting Currencies in Oracle Applications If you use the Multiple Reporting Currencies feature to report and maintain accounting records in more than one currency, refer to this manual before implementing Oracle Receivables. The manual details additional steps and setup considerations for implementing Oracle Receivables with this feature. Multiple Organizations in Oracle Applications If you use the Oracle Applications Multiple Organization Support feature to use multiple sets of books for one Oracle Receivables installation, use this guide to learn how to set up and use Oracle Receivables with this feature. Oracle Business Intelligence System Implementation Guide This guide provides information about implementing Oracle Business Intelligence (BIS) in your environment. Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide This guide provides flexfields planning, setup, and reference information for the Oracle Receivables implementation team as well as for users responsible for the ongoing maintenance of Oracle Applications product data. This guide also provides information on creating custom reports on flexfields data.
Preface
xiii
Installation and System Administration Guides

Oracle Applications Concepts This guide provides an introduction to the concepts, features, technology stack, architecture, and terminology for Oracle Applications Release 11i. It provides a useful first book to read before an installation of Oracle Applications. This guide also introduces the concepts behind, and major issues, for Applicationswide features such as Business Intelligence (BIS), languages and character sets, and selfservice applications. Installing Oracle Applications This guide provides instructions for managing the installation of Oracle Applications products. In Release 11i, much of the installation process is handled using Oracle OneHour Install, which minimizes the time it takes to install Oracle Applications and the Oracle 8i Server technology stack by automating many of the required steps. This guide contains instructions for using Oracle OneHour Install and lists the tasks you need to perform to finish your installation. You should use this guide in conjunction with individual product user guides and implementation guides. Upgrading Oracle Applications Refer to this guide if you are upgrading your Oracle Applications Release 10.7 or Release 11.0 products to Release 11i. This guide describes the upgrade process in general and lists database upgrade and productspecific upgrade tasks. You must be at either Release 10.7 (NCA, SmartClient, or character mode) or Release 11.0 to upgrade to Release 11i. You cannot upgrade to Release 11i directly from releases prior to 10.7. Using the AD Utilities Use this guide to help you run the various AD utilities, such as AutoInstall, AutoPatch, AD Administration, AD Controller, Relink, and others. It contains howto steps, screenshots, and other information that you need to run the AD utilities. Oracle Applications Product Update Notes Use this guide as a reference if you are responsible for upgrading an installation of Oracle Applications. It provides a history of the changes
xiv
to individual Oracle Applications products between Release 11.0 and Release 11i. It includes new features and enhancements and changes made to database objects, profile options, and seed data for this interval. Oracle Applications System Administrators Guide This guide provides planning and reference information for the Oracle Applications System Administrator. It contains information on how to define security, customize menus and online help, and manage processing. Oracle Receivables Applications Technical Reference Manual The Oracle Receivables Applications Technical Reference Manual contains database diagrams and a detailed description of Oracle Receivables and related applications database tables, forms, reports, and programs. This information helps you convert data from your existing applications, integrate Oracle Receivables with nonOracle applications, and write custom reports for Oracle Receivables. You can order a technical reference manual for any product you have licensed. Technical reference manuals are available in paper format only. Oracle Workflow Guide This guide explains how to define new workflow business processes as well as customize existing Oracle Applicationsembedded workflow processes. You also use this guide to complete the setup steps necessary for any Oracle Applications product that includes workflowenabled processes.
Training and Support

Training We offer a complete set of training courses to help you and your staff master Oracle Applications. We can help you develop a training plan that provides thorough training for both your project team and your end users. We will work with you to organize courses appropriate to your job or area of responsibility. Training professionals can show you how to plan your training throughout the implementation process so that the right amount of
Preface
xv
information is delivered to key people when they need it the most. You can attend courses at any one of our many Educational Centers, or you can arrange for our trainers to teach at your facility. We also offer Net classes, where training is delivered over the Internet, and many multimediabased courses on CD. In addition, we can tailor standard courses or develop custom courses to meet your needs. Support From onsite support to central support, our team of experienced professionals provides the help and information you need to keep Oracle Receivables working for you. This team includes your Technical Representative, Account Manager, and Oracles large staff of consultants and support specialists with expertise in your business area, managing an Oracle server, and your hardware and software environment.
Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle Applications Data

We STRONGLY RECOMMEND that you never use SQL*Plus, Oracle Data Browser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle Applications tables, unless we tell you to do so in our guides. Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create, store, change, retrieve, and maintain information in an Oracle database. But if you use Oracle tools such as SQL*Plus to modify Oracle Applications data, you risk destroying the integrity of your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data. Because Oracle Applications tables are interrelated, any change you make using an Oracle Applications form can update many tables at once. But when you modify Oracle Applications data using anything other than Oracle Applications forms, you might change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables. If your tables get out of synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneous information and unpredictable results throughout Oracle Applications. When you use Oracle Applications forms to modify your data, Oracle Applications automatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle Applications also keeps track of who changes information. But if you enter information into database tables using database tools, you may store invalid information. You also lose the ability to track who has changed your information because SQL*Plus and other database tools do not keep a record of changes.
xvi
About Oracle
Oracle Corporation develops and markets an integrated line of software products for database management, applications development, decision support and office automation, as well as Oracle Applications. Oracle Applications provides the Ebusiness Suite, a fully integrated suite of more than 70 software modules for financial management, Internet procurement, business intelligence, supply chain management, manufacturing, project systems, human resources and sales and service management. Oracle products are available for mainframes, minicomputers, personal computers, network computers, and personal digital assistants, enabling organizations to integrate different computers, different operating systems, different networks, and even different database management systems, into a single, unified computing and information resource. Oracle is the worlds leading supplier of software for information management, and the worlds second largest software company. Oracle offers its database, tools, and application products, along with related consulting, education and support services, in over 145 countries around the world.
Your Feedback
Thank you for using Oracle Receivables and this manual. We value your comments and feedback. This manual contains a Readers Comment Form you can use to explain what you like or dislike about Oracle Receivables or this manual. Mail your comments to the following address or call us directly at (650) 5067000. Oracle Applications Documentation Manager Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood Shores, CA 94065 U.S.A. Or, send electronic mail to [email protected].
Preface
xvii
xviii
CHAPTER
Tax Overview
his manual explains how to set up, report, and account for different types of tax systems within Oracle Receivables. It includes implementation procedures for Value Added Tax (VAT), US Sales Tax, and Canadian Tax, as well as a comprehensive set of standard and countryspecific reports that let you complete your standard tax returns. In addition, this manual describes the open interfaces that let you integrate your own tax calculation programs with Receivables, as well as load location values and sales tax rates from an external source into Receivables. You can set up Receivables to use one of three basic types of tax: Value Added Tax (VAT), US Sales Tax, or Canadian Sales Tax. VAT Value Added Tax (VAT) is imposed on the supply of goods and services paid for by the consumer, but collected at each stage of the production and distribution chain. The VAT charged on a customer invoice is called Output Tax. Any VAT paid on a vendor invoice is called Input Tax. The amount due each period can be described as follows: Amount Due = Output Tax Input Tax Receivables provides a comprehensive solution for VAT reporting using standard and countryspecific reports.
Tax Overview
11
For a step by step description of how to implement Value Added Tax, see: Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6. Sales Tax Sales tax in Receivables is based on the destination of the supply of goods or services. The calculation of sales rates is automatic, and is based on the state, county, city, and zip code of your customers address and the tax rates assigned to each of these components. You can override any tax rate through customer and product exemptions and you can compile periodic sales tax returns using the US Sales Tax Report. You can import address validation and sales tax rates from your tax vendor and use the Tax Vendor Extension to integrate external tax calculation programs with Receivables and Oracle Order Management. See: Importing Data From Your Feeder System: page 8 7 and Implementing the Tax Vendor Extension: page 8 29. For a step by step description of how to implement sales tax and the setup windows specific to a sales tax system, see: Implementing US Sales Tax: page 3 2. Canadian Sales Tax Canadian sales taxes exist at both the federal and the provincial level. Sales tax at the federal level, which is referred to as Goods and Services Tax (GST), is standard across Canada. Some goods and services are exempt from GST. Provincial Sales Tax (PST) is levied by each Canadian province except Alberta and the Territories. Each province has its own legislation which determines the PST rate and decides which goods and services are exempt from PST. The appropriate Provincial Sales Tax is based upon the destination of the goods or services, not their origin. For a step by step description of how to implement Canadian Tax, see: Implementing Canadian Sales Tax: page 4 2.
12
See Also
Setting Up Tax: An Overview: page 10 9 Calculating Tax: page 10 2 Setting Up a MultiOrganization Enterprise (Multiple Organizations in Oracle Applications Manual)
Tax Overview
13
14
CHAPTER
Value Added Tax

his chapter provides a step by step description of how to implement Value Added Tax for your Oracle Application as well as detailed descriptions of VAT reports and listings.
Value Added Tax
21
Country Specific Tax Reporting

In many countries, the standard tax reports described in this book will cover your tax reporting requirements. However, you may wish to consult the following countryspecific reports. Refer to the Oracle Applications Globalizations Reference Manuals for more information. Belgian Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Belgium Globalizations Reference Manual: VAT Number Validation Monthly VAT Return Dual Language Invoice Registers Quarterly VAT Return Annual VAT Return Chinese Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Chinese Globalizations User Guide: VAT File VAT Invoices Czech Republic Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Czech Republic Globalizations User Guide: Czech Import Tax Report Czech Export Tax Report Czech Tax Return Source Report German Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications German Globalizations Reference Manual: VAT for OnAccount Receipts Report Accounts Payable VAT Reconciliation Report
22
Hungarian Report The following report is part of the Oracle Applications Hungarian Globalizations Reference Manual: Hungarian Sales VAT Register Italian Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Italian Globalizations Reference Manual: Payables/Receivables Monthly VAT Summary Reports Sales VAT Register VAT Register for Self Invoice Deferred VAT Register Korean Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Korean Globalizations User Guide: Aggregate Summary of Tax Invoices Issued Tax Invoice List Summary of Sales Invoices Sales Invoice Sales Invoices Issued Summary of Account Receivable VAT Tax Invoice List AR Details of Document of ZeroRated VAT AR Norwegian Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Norwegian Globalizations Reference Manual: VAT and Investment Tax VAT Journal
Value Added Tax
23
Polish Report The following report is part of the Oracle Applications Polish Globalizations Reference Manual: Polish Sales VAT Register Portuguese Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Portuguese Globalizations Reference Manual: Periodic VAT Report Annual VAT Report Customer VAT Recapitulative Report Customer VAT Recapitulative Extract File Spanish Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Spanish Globalizations Reference Manual: VAT Received Report Receivables VAT Compliance Report Swiss Reports The following report is part of the Oracle Applications Swiss Globalizations Reference Manual: Swiss AR VAT Report Taiwan Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Taiwanese Globalizations User Guide: VAT In VAT Out VAT EDI File ZeroRate Tax Listing
24
Thai Reports The following reports are part of the Oracle Applications Thai Globalizations User Guide: Output Tax Summary Output Tax Summary (noninvoice) Goods and Raw Materials Input Tax Summary Incomplete Tax Invoice
Localized Forms
In addition, the following form is provided as a German Globalization. Refer to the Oracle Applications German Globalizations Reference Manual for more information. German Form VAT for On Account Receipts
See Also
Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6 Calculating Tax: page 10 2
Value Added Tax
25
Implementing Value Added Tax

VAT is imposed on the value added to goods or services at each stage of their supply. The VAT charged on a customer invoice is referred to as Output Tax. Any VAT paid on a vendor invoice is referred to as Input Tax. The amount due each period can be described as follows: Amount Due = Output Tax Input Tax Not all businesses are required to collect and remit Value Added Tax. To determine your legal obligations in the collection and reporting of Value Added Tax, seek the advice of a qualified tax professional.
Attention: If you use the Oracle Applications Multiple Organization Support feature, you need to perform this implementation for each of your operating units. For more information, refer to the Multiple Organizations in Oracle Applications manual. Suggestion: To help you plan and complete your taxspecific setup steps, use this essay with the Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard. You can use the Implementation Wizard as a resource center to read online help for a setup activity and open the appropriate setup window and to see a graphical overview of setup steps. You can also document your implementation by using the Wizard to record comments for each step for future reference and review. For more information, see: Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard User Guide.
Major Features of VAT Receivables lets you control and automatically record VAT charges on your receivable invoices. Using Receivables you can: Control VAT using both the inventory item and destination country (item method). Optionally control VAT from your Revenue Account (account method). Automatically calculate VAT for domestic, import, and intraEU taxed transactions. Automatically calculate and account for multiple VAT regimes, levying additional taxes such as Surcharges, Excise, and Sales Equalization taxes as required. Compile your periodic VAT returns using a comprehensive set of standard and countryspecific VAT reports.
26
Easily integrate your implementation of VAT with Oracle Order Management, Oracle Sales, and your legacy systems. Round VAT amounts at the Transaction Header or Line Level. Round VAT Amounts Up, Down, or Nearest, to a different precision and minimum accountable unit. Calculate inclusive or exclusive VAT Amounts. Print transactions inclusive or exclusive of VAT. Import transactions using AutoInvoice with inclusive or exclusive taxes. Allow VAT to be controlled in Receivables or your feeder system. Control changes in rate for any given tax code over time. Exempt customers and sites from VAT. Ensure that your VAT returns are complete. Manually defer Output Tax liability on unpaid invoices using the Tax Reconciliation Report. Definitions Acquisition Tax: VAT on the acquisition of goods from a VAT Registered supplier in another EU member state will be zerorated. The receiver must account for VAT as both Input and Output amounts at the VAT rate applicable for the same goods in the country that they are received, giving a net VAT liability of zero. Oracle Implements Acquisition tax with Oracle Payables using Offset Taxes. Deferral: France, Italy and Russia allow the liability on Output VAT to be deferred until payment has been collected on certain transactions. This is referred to as Cash accounting for VAT and, if allowed, may be used in an accrual system. Document Rounding: VAT amounts are typically calculated once per tax code within an invoice. Receivables controls tax codes at the document line, but allows VAT amounts to be rounded at the document header or line. Domestic Transaction: Transactions between registered traders in the same EU (European Union) country. Domestic transactions have VAT charged on goods and services with different countries applying different VAT rates to specific goods and services. EU: The European Union is a single European market where customs and tariff barriers between member states have been removed.
Value Added Tax
27
Input VAT: The tax charge on the receipt of taxable goods and services (e.g. tax on supplier invoices or expense items). Input VAT should be reported wherever you account for expenditures. Input VAT is usually deductible. IntraEU, Taxed Transactions: Transactions between nonregistered traders in different EU (European Union) countries. VAT must be charged to customers within the EU if you do not know their VAT registration number. The destination country and inventory item controls which VAT rate to use. IntraEU, ZeroRated Transactions: Transactions between registered traders in different EU (European Union) countries. An IntraEU transaction is zero rated if and only if you know the customers VAT registration number; otherwise, VAT must be charged on the invoice. Japanese Consumption Tax: The Value Added Tax (VAT) paid on any expense (Input VAT) is usually recoverable against the VAT Charged on revenue (Output VAT). This ensures that VAT is not inflationary within a supply chain. Natural Account: The segment of your accounting flexfield that you assign the qualifier Natural Account. This segment indicates whether the Accounting Flexfield is an Asset, Liability, Equity, Revenue, or Expense account. In Receivables, the Natural Account typically identifies the Revenue account. NonDeductible Input VAT: The VAT amount paid on expense items that may not be reclaimed against Output VAT. Usually, all items purchased for a business are deductible. Certain high value purchases, (for example, luxury cars for an executives spouse) may be considered nondeductible. For small companies, service or items of value to both the owner and business may be partially nondeductible. Output VAT: The tax charge on the supply of taxable goods and services (e.g. tax on customer invoices or revenue items). Output VAT should be reported wherever you account for sales. Recargo de Equivalencia: An additional tax levied in Spain on specific types of businesses. The rate of tax is related to the primary rate of VAT for the item sold. Tax Engine: A collection of programs, user defined system parameters, and hierarchical flows used by Receivables to calculate tax. VAT Classification: Each country classifies VAT into a small number of rates. Following are the five basic classes of VAT:
28
Standard: The majority of transactions are classified at a Standard rate. In Europe, the Standard rate of VAT varies between 1225%. Reduced: A lower rate of tax for specific goods or services. For example, within the EU, the reduced rate is applied to consumption of domestic fuel and power. Luxury: A higher than standard rate of tax, normally applied to a very limited set of goods or services. Zero: Zerorated, gross sales are reported separately from exempt rated transactions. Exempt: Exempt from VAT. Gross sales are reported separately from zerorated transactions. VAT Regime: A set of VAT rules and rates applicable to a well defined set or type of transactions. In Europe, the most common VAT regimes are Domestic, Import, and InterEC. However, many countries have additional regimes for special geographical regions or types of businesses.
See Also
Country Specific Tax Reporting: page 2 2 Setup Checklist for Value Added Tax: page 2 10 Invoice Tax Payables Options (Oracle Payables User Guide) Defining Purchasing Options (Oracle Purchasing User Guide) Entering Offset Taxes (Oracle Payables User Guide)
Value Added Tax
29
Setup Checklist for Value Added Tax

Complete the following steps in the order shown to implement Value Added Tax in Receivables:
Step 1: Choose Tax Method for VAT Compliance: page 2 11 Step 2: Define Tax Codes and Rates: page 2 12 Step 3: Set Up Account Method VAT (optional): page 2 15 Step 4: Set Up Tax Groups for Distance Sales (optional): page 2 16 Step 5: Set Up Tax Groups for Additional Taxes: page 2 18 Step 6: Set Up Item Method VAT: page 2 18 Step 7: Choose a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 2 19 Step 8: Define Tax Preferences: page 2 20 Step 9: Set Up Tax Defaults and Rules: page 2 21 Step 10: Save System Options: page 2 23 Step 11: Define Tax Exemptions: page 2 24 Step 12: Define Transaction Types: page 2 24 Step 13: Define AutoAccounting for Tax: page 2 24 Step 14: Enable Calculation of VAT on Freight: page 2 25 Step 15: Define Tax Profile Options: page 2 26 Step 16: Define VAT Reconciliation Report Set: page 2 27
See Also
Setup Steps for Value Added Tax: page 2 11 Verifying VAT Tax Setup: page 2 29
2 10
Setup Steps for Value Added Tax

Step 1 Choose Tax Method for VAT Compliance Receivables provides two methods for deriving the appropriate tax code and rate for your transactions. Item Method Account Method Before implementing Receivables, you need to decide whether you want to derive a transaction lines tax code and rate from the lines item or the lines natural revenue account. Controlling Tax from Item & Destination Item Method Normally, the tax code (and therefore Tax Regime) for a transaction (line) is derived using rules associated with the line item and destination (Point of Supply). The Item Method defaults tax codes based on a search hierarchy that you define in the System Options window. Typically within the Item Method, the system searches for a tax code at the item, customer site, customer, and system option levels (in that order) and ignores any tax codes associated with the Revenue Account of the line item. Item Method, Distance Selling Rules If you have a centralized inventory selling and shipping to multiple countries, you may need to derive the appropriate tax codes and rates by a combination of both the Inventory Item and ShipTo Country. Using the Item Method and defined tax groups, Receivables can automatically select the appropriate tax code and tax rate for your transaction (lines). Item Method, Multiple Additional Taxes Using tax groups, Receivables can automatically calculate multiple, conditional taxes such as Surcharges, Excise, and Sales Equalization taxes. You can create as many additional taxes as you need; each tax can be optionally compounded on prior taxes; each tax can be posted to a different accounting flexfield and each tax can have a different sign (Dr or Cr), which lets you create offsetting accounting entries. Additionally, you can combine the Tax Sign with Tax Inclusive to increase or decrease the Revenue Accounting associated with the transaction line amount.
Value Added Tax
2 11
Item Method and Feeder Systems The Item Method allows a flexible integration with feeder systems (such as Oracle Order Management, Oracle Sales & Marketing, and legacy systems) that create transactions and import them into Receivables using AutoInvoice. Unlike the Account Method, the Item Method does not rely upon a chart of accounts to default and validate the tax code. Therefore, use the Item Method if you require multiple, conditional taxes or if your feeder system controls VAT, but does not provide Receivables with accounting lines during the AutoInvoice process. Controlling Tax from your Revenue Account Account Method In some countries and implementations, your chart of accounts may be constructed around VAT compliance. When using this method, you assign one or more revenue accounts to a tax code. Then, when recording a transaction to one of your revenue accounts, Receivables will record the tax on that transaction to the VAT account assigned to this revenue account. Receivables lets you optionally set up defaults and rules using the GL Tax Options window in Oracle General Ledger. Using this window, you can assign tax codes to Natural Accounts, which lets the Receivables Transactions Workbench and AutoInvoice program automatically default tax codes when you enter or import transactions. You can also choose to validate the tax code against the Natural Account of the Revenue account when you complete transactions in the Transactions Workbench. See: Set Up Account Method VAT: page 2 15. Note: By validating the tax code for your invoice lines against the tax code assigned to your Revenue account, you can ensure that the VAT amounts in your tax returns reconcile to the tax liability accounts and that the taxable amounts in your tax returns reconcile to the Profit and Loss accounts. Suggestion: If you enforce validation on tax codes from the natural account, you should not derive tax codes from customers, customer sites, or inventory items. Step 2 Define Tax Codes and Rates Use the Tax Codes and Rates window to define your tax codes and rates. See: Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2. For example, the following company needs to define tax codes and rates for use in the European Union (EU):
2 12
Home Country Does Business with
UK, one VAT registration number Customers in the UK Customers outside the UK but inside the EU Tax Registration Number Known Tax Registration Number Unknown
Customers outside the EU Product Line Includes Miscellaneous Cash Taxable Items Exempt Items Positive Receipts Negative Receipts This company might set up the following tax codes and rates:
Customer Home Country Tax Codes Tax Rates
United Kingdom
UKSTD UKZERO UKRED
Standard UK Rate 0% Reduced Standard Rate 0% (see Step 4) 0% Miscellaneous Cash Receipts Miscellaneous Cash Payments
EU Transactions
IntraEUZero IntraEU Taxed
Export Transactions United Kingdom United Kingdom

Table 2 1 (Table 1 of 1)
Export Positive Cash Negative Cash
Suggestion: You can use the Tax Reconciliation Report to assist with preparing your VAT return. To simplify your VAT return process, you should assign a different tax liability account to each tax code, enabling the Tax Reconciliation Report to distinctly display the tax and taxable amounts for each tax code.
Value Added Tax
2 13
These tax codes and rates would then be assigned (using the Customers window) to each of the four classes of customer, or customer sites, as follows:
Customer Class Tax Code
IntraEU, Zero Rated IntraEU, Taxed (see note) External Domestic

IntraEUZero IntraEUTaxed Export null
Receivables searches for tax codes according to the tax hierarchy that you define in the System Options window, stopping when one is found. Using the approach outlined above, you will be able to automatically tax your transactions correctly when you create: Domestic invoices for different inventory items, with each item having its own tax rate assigned to it. Export invoices for customers both inside and outside the EU. Invoice for customers in the EU with tax registration numbers. Note: If you assign a tax code with a rate of zero to an invoice, or if the invoice is exempt, it will still have tax lines and account distributions posted to the General Ledger for the zero tax amount. To apply time limits to tax code rates, simply add an end date to the existing tax code, then redefine the code using the same tax code name. This lets you keep an audit of changes to rates, while ensuring that the correct rate will always be used on a transaction. Note: If a customers Tax Registration Number is not known, or if you are required to collect VAT in multiple countries, perform step 4, Set Up Tax Groups for Distance Selling Rules: page 2 16. This will let Receivables automatically apply different VAT rates on domestic and IntraEU taxed transactions. You should also assign a tax code to your miscellaneous cash receipts within the Transactions window. You should use a different tax code for negative cash receipts and positive cash receipts, though they may have the same rate. The Tax Reconciliation Report will use the general ledger account assigned to the tax code for each receipt for reporting
2 14
VAT on miscellaneous transactions. See: Entering Miscellaneous Transactions in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Miscellaneous Cash Receipt Tax Code
Positive Receipt (an investment dividend) Negative Receipt (a bank service charge)
Positive Cash Negative Cash
Additionally, Oracle Cash Management lets you assign a default tax code for positive miscellaneous cash receipts and a tax code for negative miscellaneous cash receipts. AutoReconciliation assigns the appropriate tax code when creating miscellaneous cash receipts. Cash Management also defaults the appropriate tax code when you manually create miscellaneous cash receipts during manual reconciliation. For more information, please refer to the Oracle Cash Management User Guide. Step 3 Set Up Account Method VAT (optional) If you are using the Item Method for VAT compliance, you can skip this step. Navigate to the General Ledger Tax Options window and assign a tax code to the natural account segment of your Revenue account. For each natural account, decide if the system should allow an override of tax codes posted to this account. The Receivables Transactions Workbench will validate tax codes against revenue accounts if the Revenue account has Allow Override set to No and the system option Enforce Tax from Revenue Account is set to Yes. If you set up Receivables to enforce tax from your Revenue account, the Transaction Workbench will not let you complete an invoice if any of its lines have a tax code that is different from the tax code assigned to the Natural account. AutoInvoice will also reject transactions that fail this validation. To set up your system to enforce that a tax code is derived from your Revenue account, perform the following: Navigate to the System Options window and set Enforce Tax from Revenue Account to Yes. Navigate to the Tax Options window and set Allow Tax Code Override option to No for each account that you want to validate. Receivables will only enforce validation for accounts that have this option set to No.
Value Added Tax
2 15
Attention: If you update your Revenue account or any of its attributes such that the tax code for an invoice line is no longer the same as the tax code assigned to your Revenue account, Receivables will display a message when you attempt to complete an invoice. This lets you choose to redefault the tax code for the offending invoice line, and then complete the invoice. If you choose to not update the tax code, Receivables will not let you complete the invoice.
For more information, see: Controlling Tax from your Revenue Account: page 10 33 and Setting Up Automatic Tax Calculation in the Oracle General Ledger User Guide. Step 4 Set Up Tax Groups for Distance Sales (optional) If you are using the Account Method VAT compliance or do not require Receivables to calculate VAT rates using a combination of both inventory item and shipto country, you can skip this step. The implementation outlined in step 2, Define Tax Codes and Rates, assumes that all inventory items have been assigned a Tax Code and that Intra EU and export shipments override the default. The examples in step 2 are most appropriate if your inventory items are local to your home country. If you ship within your home country, you will typically be required to collect taxes only in that country. An alternative implementation is appropriate if you ship to many countries and your legal entity is required to collect tax in multiple countries. Instead of a tax code, you can assign a tax group to each inventory item; this lets Receivables automatically create a schedule of applicable taxes based on a combination of both the inventory item and shipto country. The following table illustrates how tax groups can be used to provide Item Method VAT with Distance Sales.
Tax Group Name: EUSTD Tax Group Description: European Standard Rates Tax Code Tax Rate Ship To Country
UKSTD ITSTD
17.5% 19%
United Kingdom Italy
2 16
Tax Group Name: EUSTD Tax Group Description: European Standard Rates Tax Code Tax Rate Ship To Country
DESTD FRSTD
15% 25%
Germany France
Note: You can define a Condition Set for a tax group to control whether a tax code is used. For example, to use the first record in the tax group in Table 2 4, specify the following condition: if the shipto country is United Kingdom, then use this tax code. See: Tax Groups: page 6 20. Different tax groups are built for each tax classification of inventory items. Assigning the tax group to the inventory item allows Receivables to calculate the correct Tax Rates based on both inventory item and shipto country. Suggestion: As the Standard (or Reduced) rate of VAT changes in each country, use effectivity dates within the group to control when Receivables applies the new tax rate. European Standard rates are the set of tax rates for each member country that are classified as Standard. Typically, but not always, goods classified in one EU country as Standard will share the same classification in another EU country. An example of an exception to this rule is the category of goods called Documentation. In Germany, Documentation may be classified as Reduced, whereas in the UK it may be classified as ZeroRated. If required, you can construct a tax group that automatically assigns the correct tax code and rate for each shipment. For example:
Tax Group Name: EUDOC Tax Group Description: IntraEU Taxed, Documentation Tax Code Tax Rate Ship To Country
UKZERO DERED
Table 2 5 (Page 1 of 1)
0 7.5%
United Kingdom Germany
Value Added Tax
2 17
Caution: You can define a single VAT Registration number at the Organization level in the System Options window. You can override the VAT Registration number when printing your invoices. Your VAT returns must still be compiled using appropriate standard or countryspecific VAT reports. The countryspecific VAT reports may be incompatible with those from your home country, or with each other. Step 5 Set Up Tax Groups for Additional Taxes (optional) If your country or implementation requires multiple, additional taxes, you can set up a schedule of taxes by defining a tax group and specifying a Condition Set for the tax group. Receivables uses this schedule to calculate tax whenever you assign this tax group to your invoices and sales orders. For example, Spain requires a secondary tax called Recargo de Equivalencia (RdE). To implement this tax, define a tax group with a Condition Set that adds a second tax line to the invoice if the Tax Classification of the billto customer site indicates that the customer is subject to the additional tax.
See Also
Tax Groups: page 6 20 Invoice Tax Payables Options (Oracle Payables User Guide) Purchasing Options (Oracle Purchasing User Guide) Step 6 Set Up Item Method VAT You can assign the appropriate tax code to each of your inventory items in the Items window. You can assign a tax code or a tax group to each item that you define. If you defined tax groups for Distance Sales, use these groups for your items (see Note in Step 2, Define Tax Codes and Rates).
2 18
VAT Classification
Domestic Supply
Distance Sales Transactions
Standard Rated Product Reduced Rated Product Documentation ZeroRated Product

UKSTD UKRED UKZER UKZERO
EUSTD EURED EUDOC EUZERO
Suggestion: Using inventory item templates, create different templates for each VAT Classification. Then, when you create an inventory item using that template, Receivables automatically assigns the correct tax code or tax group. Step 7 Choose a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure Use the list of values to select a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure in the System Options window. Receivables uses this structure to determine your tax rates and to control which fields of a customers address are required when you enter domestic addresses. The following structures are predefined: No Validation Country . . . . . (Recommended for VAT) State.County.City . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended for US Sales Tax State.City City Province Province.City You can also create your own structure to meet your specific tax needs. See: Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 34. For a detailed description of each of these structures, see: Calculating Tax: page 10 2.
Attention: Each segment in the structure will become mandatory when entering customer addresses located in your home country. Suggestion: You may want to implement Flexible Address Formats for country specific validation of customer address
Value Added Tax
2 19
information. See: Flexible Addresses in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Note: If you are using the multiple organization support feature (multiorg) and want to share the same sales tax location flexfield structure across organizations, you must use the No Validation Country structure. Step 8 Define Tax Preferences The system options listed below affect your tax within Receivables. For more information about these fields or any settings not described in this table, see: Defining Receivables System Options and Tax Rounding System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Note: Refer to Step 9 for information about the Tax Defaults and Rules tabbed region.
Tax Option Field Name Accounting Tabbed Region Suggested Setting
Tax Account
Tax Tabbed Region
The default tax account for your tax codes. VAT (defined in Step 7) From: ! To: zzzzzzzzzzzzz No Validation No Itemize and Summarize Your companys Tax Registration Number. Null Null Yes, if you use inclusive tax codes; otherwise, No. Header
Tax Method Location Flexfield Structure Postal Code Range * Address Validation Compound Taxes Invoice Printing Tax Registration Number ** Tax Vendor Views Sales Tax Geo Override Inclusive Tax Used
Rounding Options Region
Calculation Level
2 20
Tax Option Field Name
Suggested Setting
Rounding Rule Reporting Currency Precision Minimum Accountable Unit Allow Override
Nearest Your functional currency. Enter a value based on your reporting currency. Enter a value based on your reporting currency. No, unless you need to change Tax Rounding rules by BillTo customer site. Your home country. Prorate All
Miscellaneous Tabbed Region
Default Country Application Rule Set

* These settings cover all possible settings for Postal Code ranges and result in no postal code validation. ** Receivables prints the number that you enter here on your invoices. You can change this number when printing your invoices. Note: The Prorate All Application Rule Set applies a proportionate amount of the payment to each open item. See: Miscellaneous System Options and Receivables Application Rule Sets in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Step 9 Set Up Tax Defaults and Rules The Tax Defaults and Rules tabbed region of the System Options window lets you control how the system automatically taxes your transactions. Using this window, you can control how your Output VAT is calculated. See: Tax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User GuideTax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User GuideTax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Use the Tax Defaults and Rules tabbed region in the Oracle Payables System Options window to control your Input Taxes. See:Invoice Tax Payables Optionsnpayopstax:AAP.Invoice Tax Payables Options in the Oracle Payables User GuideInvoice Tax Payables Options in the Oracle Payable User Guide. . How you set up your system depends on your implementation and the VAT method you selected in Step 1. If you are using the Item Method,
Value Added Tax
2 21
we recommend the following settings for determining a default tax code:

Default Tax Code Options Suggested Setting Hierarchy No.
Enforce Tax from Revenue Account Customer Site Customer Product Revenue Account System Options
No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
(NA) 1 2 3 4
If you are using the Account Method, we recommend the following settings for determining a default tax code:
Default Tax Code Options Suggested Setting Hierarchy No.
Enforce Tax from Revenue Account Customer Site Customer Product Revenue Account System Options
Yes No No No Yes No
(NA)
Note: It is possible to use both Item and Account method VAT. If you do this, we recommend that you set Enforce Tax from Revenue Account to No. We recommend the following settings for your tax exceptions:
2 22
Exception Rate Option
Suggested Setting
Use Item Tax Rate Exceptions Use Customer Exemptions Use Item Exemptions
No * No ** No ***
* Tax exceptions are special tax rates that are assigned to items being shipped to specific addresses. Tax exceptions are only used when you are calculating locationbased tax and therefore do not apply in a VAT system. ** Customer exemptions let you fully or partially exempt specific customers from tax. In a VAT system, customers can be assigned a specific tax code that would exempt them from tax. *** Product exemptions let you fully or partially exempt specific items from tax. In a VAT system, items can be assigned a specific tax code that would exempt them from tax. Suggestion: Switching off aspects of the tax engine that you do not use may improve performance.
Attention: If you use both US Sales Tax and VAT in one set of books, you should set the option Use Tax Code for Product to No. However, this is not an advisable setup. A site usually implements each legal entity in a different set of books and you should consider the many reporting and security implications of merging multiple countries/organizations into one set of books.
Step 10
Save System Options Save your system options. Use the Completed Requests window to check that each of the three concurrent programs submitted by the System Options window has completed successfully. If the concurrent programs fail, choose Request Log in the Completed Requests window for more information about the errors. You can also refer to the If Your Concurrent Programs Fail section of the Calculating Tax Essay for more information. See: Calculating Tax: page 10 2.
Value Added Tax
2 23
Step 11
Define Tax Exemptions When implementing VAT, you would generally assign tax codes to customers and items to exempt them from tax, rather than creating specific exemptions. To do this you must first create a tax code with the new tax rate. Create this tax code in the Tax Codes and Rates window as described in Step 2. Then, for customer exemptions, assign this code to your customer in the Customers window at either the customer or site level, depending on whether you want to exempt the whole customer or only specific sites for that customer. For product exemptions, assign the tax code to your product in the Items window. See: Define Items in the Oracle Inventory User Guide.
Step 12
Define Transaction Types Use the Receivables Transaction Types window to require the calculation of VAT on all transaction types. Enter Yes in the Tax Calculation field for each transaction type that you define to ensure that all complete invoices include VAT. Customers and customer sites that are not subject to VAT should use transaction types that require the calculation of tax, but these customers or sites should be assigned an exempt tax code. This ensures that a zero value tax line is created for reporting purposes. See: Transaction Types in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. If you are implementing Oracle Order Management, use the Define Order Types window to select a Receivables Transaction Type that has the Tax Calculation flag set to Yes. The Sales Orders window will then ensure that all booked orders have a tax code assigned to each order line. Additionally, the Sales Order Acknowledgement Report will display tax rates, tax amounts and tax summaries based on the transaction type you have selected. Please refer to Defining Order Types in the Oracle Order Management User Guide.
Step 13
Define AutoAccounting for Tax Use the Automatic Accounting window to specify how you want Receivables to determine the General Ledger account for VAT. See: AutoAccounting in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Enter Tax in the Type field then query all of the segments of your Tax Account Flexfield. For each segment, assign the value you want to use to derive the account. Choose from the tax accounts stored on the following:
2 24
Salesreps Transaction Types Standard Lines Taxes (The source for this type is the account on the Tax Codes) Suggestion: You should assign the value Taxes to the natural account segment to ensure the VAT Exceptions report can identify any invoices that post nontax items to tax accounts. Constant Value See: Using AutoAccounting in the Oracle Receivables User Guide Step 14 Enable Calculation of VAT on Freight To enable the calculation of VAT on freight, you should create freight amounts as ordinary invoice lines. This can be done through standard invoice entry or through AutoInvoice. Using an inventory item to define freight services enables the AutoAccounting program to distinguish freight lines from ordinary line items. AutoAccounting will then use the accounting rules for the freight account rather than the revenue account to derive the general ledger distribution for the freight service. When an invoice is printed, the freight amounts will be displayed as line items and any VAT calculated on the freight will be displayed as tax. To assist your customers in identifying the freight charges, Receivables provides the Invoice Print option European Tax Format. This option will display the tax rates as the last column of each invoice line, display the freight items last, and provide a summary of tax amounts by tax code at the end of the invoice. You can select the Invoice Print style in the System Options window or assign it to a specific customer profile class. To convert freight amounts to ordinary invoice lines, navigate to the Inventory Item window and use the Freight Item Template to define an inventory item for freight services. You should ensure that your inventory item has a valid tax code, the appropriate Primary Unit of Measure, and a User Item Type of Freight. Using the Tax Exemptions window you can reduce or zerorate sales tax rates or freight services as required. See: Defining Items in the Oracle Inventory User Guide. You can control the VAT rate on freight services through the tax code assigned to the inventory item. Alternatively, you can override the tax code assigned to inventory item by assigning a different tax code to the
Value Added Tax
2 25
customer or customer site, which will allow export freight charges to be taxed differently than domestic freight charges. If you are implementing Oracle Order Management, you should set the user profile option Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue to Yes and Tax: Inventory Item as Freight to the item that you defined for freight services. These profile options are described in more detail in the next step. Step 15 Define Tax Profile Options To set your tax profile options, navigate to the System Profile Values window using the System Administrator responsibility. The following table outlines the options and recommended settings for VAT.
Suggested Setting
Profile Option
Reason
Tax: Allow Manual Tax Lines Tax: Allow Ad hoc Tax Changes Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions Tax: Allow Override of Tax Code Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue *
Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Additional tax lines may be required by a given country. Typically, tax codes have a single active rate for a given date. Prevents unapproved exemptions from being entered. Lets you override the default tax code. Enables freight amounts entered in the Oracle Order Management Ship Confirm window to be passed to Receivables as taxable line items. Set this to the inventory item that you defined for freight services (see Attention symbol below). AutoAccounting will use the Freight accounting rule for transaction lines whose inventory item has a user type of Freight. This ensures the line item description of the freight services will be derived from the inventory item that you defined, rather than the default description Freight. Use the Items window to assign a tax code to the inventory item.
Tax: Inventory Item for Freight
Freight
2 26
* This profile option is used only by Oracle Order Management
Attention: The inventory item you select should be used to control the tax code, rate, and general ledger tax account for the VAT on freight. Be sure to assign a tax code to the inventory item before you define this profile option.
See: Update System Profile Options in the Oracle Applications System Administrators Guide and Overview of Deliverybased Ship Confirm in the Oracle Order Management User Guide. Step 16 Define VAT Reconciliation Report Set To assist you in compiling your VAT return, navigate to the Request Set window and define a VAT Reconciliation Report Set that includes the following reports: Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 Customers with Invoices at 0 VAT and no VAT Registration Number: page 2 32 VAT Exception Report: page 2 34 You should define a report set that provides default values for the following parameters:
Suggested Default
Report Parameter
Display
Modify
Reason
GL Date Low GL Date High Transaction Date Low Transaction Date High VAT Account Low
01XXX 30XXX null
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Date at start of the reporting period Date at end of the reporting period To ensure only transactions for the reporting period are reported. To ensure only transactions for the reporting period are reported. All VAT Accounts used will be reported
null
No
No
null
No
No
Value Added Tax
2 27
Report Parameter
Suggested Default
Display
Modify
Reason
VAT Account High Include Accruals Include Adjustments Include Discounts Include Miscellaneous Cash Receipts Include Payments Posting Status Detail Level
null Yes *Yes *Yes *Yes
No No No No No
No No No No No
All VAT Accounts used will be reported Report on accrual transactions Report on adjustment transactions Report on all discounts Report on all non standard receipts Report on all standard receipts Report on only posted transactions Provide a high level overview while showing the appropriate detail information. To match the reporting period.
*Yes Posted Show Summary and All Detail *GL Date
No Yes Yes
No Yes Yes
Payment Date
No
No
* This depends on the reporting requirements of each country. Please consult a qualified tax professional. Preventing the user from modifying most of the report parameters at report run time ensures that the report is run consistently each reporting period. If your company is required to report on VAT under a mix of accrual basis and cash basis tax calculations, you should define a report set that will run two copies of each report; the first for accrual basis calculations and the second for cash basis calculations. Suggestion: When defining your chart of accounts, group your accrual basis tax accounts together and your cash basis tax accounts together. You can then use the distinct account ranges to define unique report sets for each type of tax basis.
2 28
See Also
Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6 Setup Checklist for Value Added Tax: page 2 10 Verifying VAT Tax Setup: page 2 29 Calculating Tax: page 10 16 Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 Defining Request Sets (Oracle Applications System Administrators Guide)
Verifying VAT Tax Setup

Enter Taxable Invoices Enter an invoice for a taxable customer. Save the invoice and ensure that you can navigate to the Tax window for the invoice lines to view the tax code, tax rate, and amount. You should then navigate to the Revenue Accounts window and confirm that the tax line is posted to the correct General Ledger account. If you are implementing Oracle Order Management, enter an order and confirm that the VAT amounts are displayed in the payment information region. Enter Zero Rated Invoices Assign a Tax Code with zero rate to a customer or customer site. Create an invoice for this customer, including a taxable line item. Save the invoice and verify that the system generated a zero rated tax line. Interface Zero Rated Invoices Use AutoInvoice to import an invoice that includes a zero rated tax code. See: Using AutoInvoice in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Using the Transactions window, verify that the tax amounts on the generated tax lines are zero. See: Entering Transactions in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Value Added Tax
2 29
See Also
Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6 Calculating Tax: page 10 16 Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12
2 30
Tax Reporting
The tax charged on sales (usually referred to as Output VAT) can be reported using standard or countryspecific VAT reports. The standard reports let you report and reconcile applicable taxes for VAT, Consumption Tax, and any alternative tax regimes recorded in your receivables transactions.
See Also
Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 VAT Exception Report: page 2 34 Customers with Invoices at 0 and no VAT Registration Number: page 2 32 Tax Register Report: page 7 20
Value Added Tax
2 31
Customers with Invoices at 0 VAT and no VAT Registration Number

Figure 2 1
Set of Books 2 (Release 10) Posted Status: All Currency Code UKS
Customers with Invoices at 0 VAT and no VAT Registration Number Transaction Date: To GL Date: 01JUN1995 To 30SEP1995
Report Date: Page:
07JUL95 15:30 1
Class Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Total for UKS
Invoice Number 1161 1162 1163 1230vat 1230vat
European Customer Name Number CV CV1 CV CV1 CV CV1 CV CV1 CV CV1
Invoice Date 02JUN95 02JUN95 02JUN95 20JUN95 20JUN95
GL Date Line No Line Amount 02JUN95 8 507.00 02JUN95 3 507.00 02JUN95 3 507.00 07JUL95 1 100.00 07JUL95 3 100.00 1,721.00
Use this report as part of the VAT Reconciliation Report Set to display all customers within the European Community that have not paid VAT, but have not provided you with a VAT Registration Number to exempt them from VAT. You may be required to collect VAT on each transaction listed and will have to manually calculate the impact to your VAT return before completing your VAT reconciliation.
Report Parameters
Within Receivables you can submit the Customers with Invoices at 0 VAT and no VAT Registration Number Report from the Submit Requests window. This report is ordered by Transaction Class, Invoice Number, Customer Name, and GL Date and displays each transaction in its entered currency. GL Date Low/High: The GL date range for the period you wish to review. The default values for these parameters are the start and end dates of the most recent accounting period.
2 32
Transaction Date Low/High: The transaction date range for the period you wish to review. The Tax Reconciliation Report defines the transaction date for each class of transaction as follows: For Invoices, Credit Memos, Debit Memos the report will use the transaction date of the transaction. For Miscellaneous Cash Receipts the report will use the receipt date. For Discounts, Adjustments and Cash Applications the report will use the application date of the applied transaction. Posting Status: You can report on Posted, Unposted, or All transactions.
Column Headings
Class: The class of the transaction. Invoice Number: Either the transaction number or the receipt number, depending on the transaction type. Customer Name: The Customer Name. This column is empty for Miscellaneous Receipt transactions. Customer Number: The Customer Number. This column is empty for Miscellaneous Receipt transactions. Invoice Date: Either the transaction date or the receipt date depending on the transaction type. Line Number: The transaction line number. This column is empty for the following transactions: Adjustments Discounts Miscellaneous Receipts
See Also
Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 VAT Exception Report: page 2 34 Tax Register Report: page 7 20
Value Added Tax
2 33
Tax Code Listing: page 7 4 Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6
VAT Exception Report

Figure 2 2
Set of Books 2 (Release 10) Posting Status: All VAT Exception Report Transaction Date: To GL Date: 01JUN1995 To 30SEP1995 Report Date: Page: 07JUL95 15:30 1
Currency Code:
UKS
Customer Invoice Line Class Invoice Number Name Number Date GL Date No Transaction Amount Status Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice 123vatex1 1230vat 1230vat 1230vat 123 TEST CV CV CV 1231 CV1 CV1 CV1 30JUN95 20JUN95 20JUN95 20JUN95 30JUN95 07JUL95 07JUL95 07JUL95 1 1 2 3 100,000.00 100.00 0.00 100.00 100,200.00 Using Using Using Using Tax Tax Tax Tax Account Account Account Account
Total for Invoice Deposit 10011 Sporting Goods 99991 19JUL95 19JUL95 1
Total for Deposit Guarantee 10012 Sporting Goods 99991 19JUL95 19JUL95 1
1,000.00 No Tax Line 1,000.00 1,000.00 No Tax Line 1,000.00 150.00 1,000.00 (1,100.00) 10.00 60.00 102,260.00 Tax Adjustment Line Adjustment Line Adjustment Freight Adjustment
Total for Guarantee Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment 10005 10005 123st1 123st1 Sporting Goods Sporting Goods Taxable Customer Taxable Customer 99991 99991 1000 1000 18JUL95 18JUL95 01JUL95 01JUL95 18JUL95 18JUL95 01JUL95 01JUL95
Total for Adjustment Total for UKS
Use the VAT Exception Report as part of your VAT reconciliation to review any Receivables subledger transactions which meet one or more of the following VAT exception criteria: The transaction has item lines with no accompanying tax lines. To accommodate most VAT requirements, every miscellaneous cash receipt should have a tax code associated with it and output VAT liability should be manually accounted for using the Tax Reconciliation Report. You can enforce this business rule within Receivables by setting the Tax Calculation flag (in the Transaction Types window) to Yes for every transaction requiring VAT calculation. The transaction has item lines that reference general ledger tax accounts. Only tax transaction lines should be posted to tax accounts in the general ledger.
2 34
The transaction is a Discount that references general ledger tax accounts. Only tax transaction lines should be posted to tax accounts in the general ledger. The transaction is an Adjustment that references general ledger tax accounts. Only tax transaction lines should be posted to tax accounts in the general ledger. The transaction is a Miscellaneous Receipt that references general ledger tax accounts. Only tax transaction lines should be posted to tax accounts in the general ledger. The transaction is a Miscellaneous Receipt which has no tax code. To accommodate most tax reporting requirements, every VAT taxable transaction must include a tax line even if the value of the tax line is zero. The transaction is an Adjustment of type Tax. Tax only Adjustments are not advised in a VAT reporting environment because they are generally not accepted as valid reductions to your VAT liability.
Attention: Chargebacks and Commitments are created without tax lines and will always appear on the VAT Exception Report.
You should correct every transaction on this error report or manually calculate the impact to your return before completing your VAT reconciliation.
Report Parameters
You can submit the VAT Exception Report from the Submit Requests window. The VAT Exception Report is ordered by Transaction Class, Invoice Number, Customer Name and GL Date and displays each transaction in its entered currency. GL Date Low/High: The GL date range for the period you wish to review. The default values for GL Date Low and High parameters are the start and end dates of the most recent accounting period. Transaction Date Low/High: The transaction date range for the period you wish to review. The Tax Reconciliation Report defines the transaction date for each class of transaction as follows:
Value Added Tax
2 35
For Invoices, Credit Memos and Debit Memos the report will use the transaction date of the transaction. For Miscellaneous Cash Receipts the report will use the receipt date. For Discounts, Adjustments and Cash Applications, the report will use the transaction date of the associated invoice. Posting Status: You can report on Posted, Unposted, or All transactions.
Column Headings
Line Number: This column shows the transaction line number, but is empty for the following transactions: Adjustments Discounts Miscellaneous Receipts Transaction Amount: This column shows the amount of the transaction in the entered currency. Status: This column reports the reason the transaction is an exception. This column displays the following standard warning messages : No Tax Line The transaction has item lines with no accompanying tax lines. Using Tax Account The transaction is not a tax transaction, but it references general ledger tax accounts. Tax Adjustment The transaction is an Adjustment of type Tax.
See Also
Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 Customers with Invoices at 0 VAT and no VAT Registration Number: page 2 32
2 36
Tax Register Report: page 7 20 Tax Code Listing: page 7 4
Value Added Tax
2 37
2 38
CHAPTER
Sales Tax
his chapter provides a step by step description of how to implement US Sales Tax for your Oracle Application as well as detailed descriptions of Sales Tax reports and listings. In addition, this chapter contains topical essays that describe how to import sales tax rates from your sales tax vendor and how to use an open interface to integrate external tax calculation programs with Oracle Applications.
Sales Tax
31
Implementing US Sales Tax

Receivables provides a comprehensive solution for US Sales Tax requirements, including the calculation of sales tax based on the state, county, city, and zip code components of your customers addresses. You can override any tax rate through customer and product exemptions and compile periodic sales tax returns using the US Sales Tax Report. Additionally, you can integrate Receivables with external tax software vendors through the Tax Vendor Extension. Suggestion: Not all businesses are required to collect and remit state sales and use taxes. You should seek the advice of a qualified tax professional to determine if your business has a legal requirement to collect these taxes. The suggestions given in this essay provide a logical flow for implementing sales tax in Receivables. You should set up your sales tax when you set up the rest of your Receivables system. For a complete list and description of the steps required to set up Receivables, see: Setup Steps in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Suggestion: To help you plan and complete your taxspecific setup steps, use this essay with the Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard. You can use the Implementation Wizard as a resource center to read online help for a setup activity and open the appropriate setup window and to see a graphical overview of setup steps. You can also document your implementation by using the Wizard to record comments for each step for future reference and review. For more information, see: Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard User Guide.
Attention: If you use the Oracle Applications Multiple Organization Support feature, you need to perform this implementation for each of your operating units. For more information, refer to the Multiple Organizations in Oracle Applications manual.
Definitions Consumers Use Tax: Any company receiving goods within a state must either pay sales tax on receipt or selfaccrue a Use tax, normally to the same value. The selfaccrual scheme ensures that the state receives income independent of the vendors registration. Nexus: Refers to the minimum contact necessary to allow a taxing jurisdiction the authority to impose a registration, tax filing, and/or tax collection responsibility. Within a jurisdiction, nexus standards may
32
vary from one type of tax to another. For example, the nexus standards for sales and use tax may be different from those for income tax. The type of activity required to create nexus is defined by state or local statute, case law, and the due process and Commerce Clause of the US Constitution. Whether a business has established nexus in a taxing jurisdiction requires an assessment of all facts and circumstances of its activity within that jurisdiction. You should seek the advice of a qualified tax professional to determine if your business has established nexus (a registration and filing requirement) before you implement sales tax. Situs: The situs of taxation describes which authority levies the tax. Usually this is the ShipTo state, county, and city. However, some caution should be exercised as the shipto situs may not be controlling for local tax purposes (local taxes are commonly determined based on the shipfrom, not shipto, location). Any tax collected for a given authority must be reported back to that same authority. US Sales and Use Tax: Sales and use tax are a matter of State and Local law, rules, regulations, and court cases. As such, the rules are not uniform. So, what may be exempt in State A may be taxable in State B. However, in general, sales tax is levied on the end consumer with businesses serving as the collection agent for the taxing authority. Various exemptions are available, including, but not limited to: resales, manufacturing, research and development, nonprofit or exempt organizations, and governmental organizations. The availability and type of exemption allowed varies by state. Many taxes may apply to a single transaction, including state, County, City, Transit, and Muni tax. Filing requirements vary by state and local jurisdiction. Also, the reporting of Sales and Use tax may be either on a accrual or cash basis. Filing period (e.g. annual, semiannual, quarterly, etc.) and method of accounting are generally determined by taxing jurisdiction rules and regulations.
Major Features
Following are some of the major tax features within Receivables. Customer Address Validation Receivables provides the State.County.City Sales Tax Location Flexfield for US Address Validation. If used, this structure will ensure that the State, County, and City fields are required on customer addresses within your home country. Given data from your US Tax Vendor,
Sales Tax
33
Customer Address entry can default the State, County and City fields automatically from the entry of the 5 digit ZIP code. If a given zip code is identified in multiple locations, Receivables will list only those applicable, allowing a quick and simple identification of the correct jurisdiction. See: Integrating Receivables Applications Tax Information Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 2. Using the Receivables Customer Address windows, the list of values can complete city names and automatically populate State and County fields for simple, reliable US address entry. You can also implement countryspecific validation of foreign customer addresses using the Flexible Address formats feature. See: Address Validation in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Customer Exemption Certificates Awarded by the state, a Customer Exemption Certificate allows a customer to be fully or partially exempt from paying Sales Tax. Another type of exemption includes exemptions by statute, such as sales to the US Government. Typically, Customer Exemption Certificates are recorded for the billto Customers who are shipping to a specific state. Receivables uses effectivity dates and approval statuses to ensure your tax department has full visibility and control. Receivables provides a Tax Handling field for each transaction line that you can use to record and control how exemption certificates are applied. Receivables lets you fully or partially exempt customers or items from US Sales Tax. Period end reporting includes summaries of tax exempt amounts categorized by exempt reason within each state. See: Item and Customer Exemptions: page 10 23. Integration with Oracle Order Management During the Order process, applicable exemption certificates will be automatically applied to the order. These controls are also available in AutoInvoice and the Receivables Transaction workbench. If the profile option Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions is set to Yes, you can optionally override the default tax handling to require tax on a transaction that is normally exempt or to exempt a customer who normally would be charged tax. When AutoInvoice creates the transaction in Receivables, an exempt order will automatically create an unapproved exemption certificate, if one is not found. If AutoInvoice creates unapproved exemptions, you can account for the sale prior to obtaining the paper certificate. Your Tax Department will then manage all unapproved exemptions. You can update the status of
34
an exemption certificate from Unapproved to Primary in the Tax Exemptions window. A certificate that is marked as Primary will be automatically applied to all future transactions for this billto customer, when shipping to the state for which you created this exemption. See: Tax Exemptions: page 6 16. Automatic US Sales Tax Calculations Using data provided by your Tax Vendor, Receivables automatically calculates tax rates and amounts based on the transactions shipto address and creates any applicable Exemptions or Exceptions. Reconciliation of Sales Tax Liability Accounts Receivables AutoAccounting lets you record the sales tax liability for each state in a different accounting flexfield. Using the Receivables US Sales Tax Report, you can compile your US Tax Returns and reconcile the periodend figures to individual Sales Tax Liability Accounts. See: US Sales Tax Reconciliation: page 3 23. US Sales Tax Reporting The US Sales Tax report includes all transactions and Adjustments categorized by shipto State, County, and City and lists taxable, exempt, and tax amounts. This report is used as the basis of the periodic sales tax returns. Using Reports Exchange, you can download this report into third party tax preparation packages for automated returns processing. For more information, see: US Sales Tax Report: page 3 33 and the Reports Exchange User Guide.
Integration with Tax Vendors

The Receivables tax engine calculates tax from the shipto address only. This is sufficient for many of the states in the US. However, some individual states may have additional requirements for tax calculation. These states may require the ShipFrom Address, Point of Title Passage, or the Point of Title Transfer to be taken into account when calculating a tax rate. When implementing sites that require this type of additional calculation, you should consider using the Receivables Tax Vendor Extension to implement a third party Tax Vendor. Using Receivables with one of these vendors will produce more accurate tax rates. However, you must still compile your Sales Tax Returns from all of the
Sales Tax
35
transactions using the Receivables US Sales Tax Report. See: Implementing the Tax Vendor Extension: page 8 29.
See Also
Setup Checklist for US Sales Tax: page 3 6 US Sales Tax Reconciliation: page 3 23 US Sales Tax Report: page 3 33 Integrating Receivables Applications Tax Information Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 2
Setup Checklist for US Sales Tax

Complete the following steps to implement sales tax in Receivables:
Step 1: Choose Your Tax Method: page 3 7 Step 2: Choose a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 3 7 Step 3: Define Tax Preferences: page 3 9 Step 4: Set Up Tax Engine Controls: page 3 10 Step 5: Save System Options: page 3 12 Step 6: Define Location Tax Code: page 3 12 Step 7: Define Tax Lookups: page 3 13 Step 8: Determine States In Which You Are Not Required to
Collect Tax: page 3 14
Step 9: Define Sales Tax Locations and Rates: page 3 14 Step 10: Assign Tax Accounts: page 3 15 Step 11: Define AutoAccounting for Tax: page 3 16 Step 12: Define Tax Exemptions: page 3 16 Step 13: Define Item Tax Rate Exceptions: page 3 17
36
Step 14: Enable Calculation of Sales Tax on Freight: page 3 17 Step 15: Define Tax Profile Options: page 3 18 Step 16: Create International Customers and Sites: page 3 19
Setup Steps for US Sales Tax

Step 1 Choose Your Tax Method Navigate to the Tax tabbed region in the System Options window and enter Sales Tax in the Tax Method field. See: Defining Receivables System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Step 2 Choose a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure Use the list of values to select a Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure in the Location Flexfield Structure field of the System Options window. Receivables uses this structure to determine your sales tax rates and to validate your customer addresses. The following Sales Tax Location Flexfield structures have been predefined. These structures are named according to the location segments they contain: State.County.City . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended for US Sales Tax This structure provides the most accurate US Sales Tax calculation. No Validation Country . . . . . Recommended for VAT The Country field of an address is always required and defaulted from either the home country defined in the system options window or the Default Country profile option. This structure is most useful for VAT systems, where locations do not need to be validated for the purposes of calculating tax. State.City This structure can be used for US Sales Tax calculation, but may result in inaccurate taxes, as County tax rates would need to be rolled into either State or City rates. City This structure can be used if you wish to validate just the City component of an address.
Sales Tax
37
Province This structure can be used if you wish to validate just the Province component of an address. Province.City This structure can be used in Canadian implementations for tax calculation and in some European countries for address validation. Each segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure is dependent upon its immediate parent, except for the most senior segment. For example, if you are using the seeded structure State.County.City, State is the most senior segment and the parent of County, and County is the parent of City. For a detailed description of each of these structures, see: Calculating Tax: page 10 16. You can use any of the structures listed above or create your own structure to implement sales tax. However, we recommend the State.County.City structure because it is specifically designed for a US sales tax system. Caution: If you select State.City or any structure other than State.County.City as your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, be aware that this could result in inaccurate calculation of tax rates. Sales tax calculation in the US is based on the customer address with State, County, and City being the minimum requirement. You can also define your own structure using any combination of state, county, city, province, postal code, and address. Refer to the Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure section of the Calculating Tax Essay. See: Calculating Tax: page 10 2. Warning: You should not update the Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure once you have entered customer addresses or transactions. Note: It is a recommended accounting practice to ensure that the sales tax liability owed to each state is uniquely identifiable within the General Ledger. To set up a different tax account for each state you will need to assign the tax account qualifier to the state segment, which is the default for both the State.County.City and State.City structures.
38
Step 3
Define Tax Preferences The system options listed below affect your tax within Receivables. For a description of each of these options, see: Tax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Suggested Setting
Reason
Tax Account
Sales Tax Liability Account
The Sales Tax Liability Account will be used as the default but will be overridden by the account assigned at the state level in the Tax Locations and Rates window. Use these entries to cover all valid US Postal Codes, including zip+4 codes. This prevents you from creating addresses that cannot be taxed. Required by Receivables to recalculate tax amounts if line amounts are updated. This option will have all tax information of an invoice displayed under the tax recap heading when printing your invoices. This number is printed on your invoices.
Postal Code Range Address Validation Compound Taxes Invoice Printing
From: 00000 To: 999999999 Error
Yes
Summarize by Tax Code
Tax Registration Number Tax Vendor Views
Enter your Companys Federal Tax Registration Number Oracle, Taxware, or Vertex
Receivables uses the Oracle tax views by default. If your tax vendor is Vertex or Taxware, choose Vertex or Taxware as appropriate. Used only if your tax vendor is Taxware Sales/Use Tax System (see Note below)
Sales Tax Geo Override
Null
Sales Tax
39
Suggested Setting
Reason
Inclusive Tax Used Default Country Application Rule Set
No
US sales taxes are calculated in addition to the Price List amount. Sales tax should only be calculated for addresses in this country. This rule set applies a proportionate amount of the payment to each open item. See: Miscellaneous System Options and Receivables Application Rule Sets in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
United States
Prorate All
Note: If you are using Taxware Sales/Use Tax System, Receivables uses the value you enter here to determine the point of order acceptance when calculating tax if no code is defined at the customer site level. For more information, see Implementing Oracle Receivables with Taxware Sales/Use Tax System Release 11i. Note: The Default Country and Application Rule Set fields are located in the Miscellaneous tabbed region. Step 4 Set Up Tax Engine Controls The fields listed in the table below are used to finetune the tax calculation process. These fields control which aspects of the tax engine are switched on or off when calculating a tax rate. For Sales Tax systems, we recommend the following settings for selecting a default tax code:
3 10
Default Tax Code Option
Suggested Setting
Reason
Hierarchy No.
Customer Site Yes
Enabling this option lets you use any tax rates you have defined for your customers business purpose. Disabling this option prevents you from using any tax rates you have defined for your customer. Disabling this option prevents you from using tax codes and rates that you have defined for specific items. These productspecific tax rates may contradict tax rates associated with the location of the customer to whom the item has been sold. Disabling this option prevents you from using the tax code assigned to the Account segment of your Revenue account as the default when entering or importing transactions. This option is not recommended for Sales Taxbased systems. Disabling this option prevents you from including the tax code defined in the System Options window in your tax defaulting hierarchy. In a Sales Taxbased system, you should derive tax from the customer address.
Customer
No
(null)
Product
No
(null)
Revenue Account
No
(null)
System Options
No
(null)
We recommend the following settings for your tax exceptions:
Sales Tax
3 11
Exception Rate Option
Suggested Setting
Reason
Use Customer Yes Exemptions Use Item Exemptions Use Item Tax Rate Exceptions Yes Yes
This option lets you exempt eligible customers from sales tax. This option lets you exempt eligible products from sales tax. This option lets you exempt specific items from sales tax calculations in accordance with state regulations.
Suggestion: By enabling the Use Tax Code for Customers Site option, you can manually assign tax codes to international sites. Step 5 Save System Options Save your system options. Use the Completed Requests window to check that each of the three concurrent programs submitted by the System Options window has completed successfully. If the concurrent programs fail, choose Request Log for more information about the errors. You can also refer to the If Your Concurrent Programs Fail section of the Calculating Tax Essay. See: Calculating Tax: page 10 2. Step 6 Define Location Tax Code This tax code will appear on every invoice that is printed to identify the calculated tax amount. Therefore, we suggest that you name the code appropriately, for example, Sales Tax. You also use this tax code to create sales tax exemptions for your customers or products. Use the Tax Codes and Rates window to define your Sales Tax tax code as follows:
3 12
Field
Value
Tax Code From To Tax Type Tax Rate% Sign Allow Exempt Ad hoc Inclusive Tax Allow Inclusive Override Tax (Accounting Flexfield) VAT Transaction Type
Sales Tax 01JAN91 Null Location Based Tax Skipped Cr Yes No No No As Required (see Note) Null
Note: The default tax account is the account you assigned in the Accounting tabbed region of the System Options window. Receivables uses this as the default tax account if no tax account is assigned to a location when you create transactions. Step 7 Define Tax Lookups When you assign special rates to items in the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window, you must provide a reason for the exception. You must also provide a reason when you assign exemptions to either customers or items in the Tax Exemptions window. You can predefine these reasons in the Receivables Lookups window. Once defined, you will be able to use the list of values in the Reason field of these windows to select one of these predefined reasons. The US Sales Tax Report will summarize exempt amounts by exemption reason for each state.
Sales Tax
3 13
Enter your reasons for the following Lookup types:

Lookup Type Example Reason Example Code
Tax Rate Exception Reason Tax Rate Exemption Reason

Unprepared Food Government Agency Exempt Organization
UnPrpFood GovAgency ExemptOrg
Suggestion: The US Sales Tax report only prints the first 9 characters of the Tax Rate Exemption or Exception Reasons you define. You may want to keep your reasons short to avoid confusion. Step 8 Determine States in Which You Are Not Required to Collect Tax Not all companies are required to collect and remit sales tax for every state. You should seek the advice of a qualified tax professional to determine in which states you have a legal requirement to collect tax. You should prepare a list of these before performing the next step. This will help ensure that you are not charging tax unnecessarily. Step 9 Define Sales Tax Locations and Rates You can either enter sales tax data manually, or import it using the Receivables Sales Tax Rate Interface program. To enter tax data manually, use the Tax Locations and Rates window to define all of your taxing locations and rates. See: Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7. Alternatively, you can use the Sales Tax Rate Interface to upload the 60,000+ sales tax rates and locations from a tax vendor. For details on running the interface, see: Integrating Receivables Applications Tax Information Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 2. After loading the data into your interface, you should manually set to zero all sales tax rates for each state in which you are not legally required to collect sales tax. You can use the following script to perform this task. Where indicated in the script, enter the list of states you compiled in the previous step. You must use the correct state code here, as defined by your Tax Vendor.
$sqlplus <ar_username>/<ar_password> sql>update ar_tax_interface
3 14
set tax_rate = 0 override_rate1 = null, override_rate2 = null, override_rate3 = null, override_rate4 = null, override_rate5 = null, override_rate6 = null, override_rate7 = null, override_rate8 = null, override_rate9 = null, override_rate10 = null where substr(location_id,1,2) in ( state_code1, state_code2,..., state_codeN );
Attention: This step should be repeated each time you load data from your Tax Vendor and before running the Sales Tax Rate interface.
Once loaded into the interface table, run the Sales Tax Rate interface program to move those records into Receivables. Suggestion: To calculate sales tax, Receivables requires that each component of your customers address is a valid taxing location, with an associated tax rate. Set your address validation to Error so that you can only enter addresses supported by your Tax Vendor. You can view this data in the Tax Locations and Rates window. Step 10 Assign Tax Accounts When entering or importing tax locations, the tax account defaults from the account assigned to the Sales Tax tax code you defined in Step 6. You control which segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure the account will be defaulted to by assigning the Tax Account qualifier to that segment (see Step 2). You should define a unique general ledger account for the sales tax liability of each state. To post sales tax to different General Ledger accounts, navigate to the Tax Locations and Rates window and assign a different General Ledger account to the segments of your structure for which you enabled the Tax Account flexfield qualifier. Note: You only need to update the segments of your tax account that you will use to set up AutoAccounting in the next step.
Sales Tax
3 15
The US Sales Tax report highlights any transactions that post tax to a General Ledger account outside the range you entered so that you can easily reconcile your sales tax returns with your General Ledger balance. See: Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7. Step 11 Define AutoAccounting for Tax Use the Automatic Accounting window to specify how you want Receivables to determine the General Ledger account for sales tax lines. Enter Tax in the Type field and query to display all of the segments of your Tax Account Flexfield in the segment column. For each segment, assign the value that you want used as the account source for the segment. Choose from the following values: Salesreps Transaction Types Standard Lines Taxes Constant Value Note: The Taxes value uses the shipto address and the accounts that you assigned in the Tax Location and Rates window in the previous step as its source. Step 12 Define Tax Exemptions For items and customers that are exempt from sales tax, use the Tax Exemptions window to enter tax exemptions, using the Sales Tax code you defined in Step 6. Receivables gives you the option of exempting a customer entirely or only specific sites of that customer. Below is an example of how you might define a sales tax exemption for a Bill To customer for shipping anywhere in California.
Field Name Setting
Exemption Type Customer Site Location

Customer Customer Name <Blank> * California
3 16
Field Name
Setting
Tax Code Percent Exempt Exemption Number Reason Start Date End Date Status
Sales Tax (with a type of Location) 100% Enter the Customers Tax Exemption Certificate Number if available. Select a reason for this exemption from the reasons you defined in step 7 01JAN91 <Blank> Primary **
* Leave the Site field blank to exempt all of the customers sites or if you want to create a regional exemption using the location flexfield. ** Entering Primary lets the exemption be used automatically by Receivables when calculating tax. Step 13 Define Item Tax Rate Exceptions Specific tax rates may apply to items that you ship to specific states. You can use the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window to assign these exception rates to these locations. Step 14 Enable Calculation of Sales Tax on Freight To enable the calculation of sales tax on freight, you should create freight amounts as ordinary invoice lines. This can be done through standard invoice entry or through AutoInvoice. Using an inventory item to define freight services, you enable the AutoAccounting program to distinguish freight lines from ordinary line items. AutoAccounting will then use the accounting rules for the freight account rather than the revenue account to derive the general ledger distribution for the freight service. When an invoice is printed, the freight amounts will be displayed as line items and any sales tax calculated on the freight will be displayed as tax. To convert freight amounts to ordinary invoice lines navigate to the Define Inventory Item window and use the Freight Item Template to define an inventory item for freight services. You should ensure your
Sales Tax
3 17
inventory item has a valid Primary Unit of Measure and a User Item Type of Freight. If you are implementing Oracle Order Management, you should set the user profile option Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue to Yes and define the profile option Tax: Inventory Item for Freight. These are described in more detail in the next step. Step 15 Define Tax Profile Options To set your tax profile options, navigate to the Update System Profile Values window using the System Administrator responsibility. The following table outlines the options and the recommended settings for US Sales Tax.
Suggested Setting
Profile Option
Reason
Tax: Allow Manual Tax Lines Tax: Allow Ad Hoc Tax Changes Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions Tax: Allow Override of Tax Code
No No No No
Unless user is allowed to create taxonly invoices. Unless user is allowed to create taxonly invoices. Prevents unapproved exemptions from being entered. Prevents you from modifying the tax code at invoice entry.
3 18
Profile Option
Suggested Setting
Reason
Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue *
Yes
Enables freight amounts entered in the Oracle Order Management Ship Confirm window to be passed to Receivables as taxable line items. This profile option lets Oracle Order Management identify an inventory item on a transaction line that you import into Receivables via the Receivables Interface program. The inventory item that you identify when defining this profile option must be created with a user type of Freight. After you identify an inventory item for freight, you can use tax codes assigned to this inventory item or item exceptions to control the applicable tax rates and accounting for freight service (see Suggestion below). Use the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window to manage freight tax rates by state.
Freight
* This profile option is used only by Oracle Order Management Suggestion: The inventory item that you select can be used with the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window to reduce or zerorate sales tax on freight service, depending on specific state tax law. Step 16 Create International Customers and Sites You will not be able to import invoices through AutoInvoice if Calculate Tax for this items transaction type is set to Yes and Receivables cannot find a rate for this location. You can avoid this problem during manual invoice entry by entering the tax line manually. However, you must have your profile Tax: Allow Manual Lines set to Yes to do this.
Sales Tax
3 19
A more complete solution is to assign an international, zerorated tax code to every customer or site that has an address outside the United States. In this way AutoInvoice and the Transaction window can use your tax code to generate a tax line for a zero amount. The name you give to this tax code (for example, International) will be printed on your invoice rather than Sales Tax. Use the suggestions in the table below to set up your international tax code in the Tax Codes and Rates window.
Field Value
Tax Code Tax Type Tax Rate% Ad Hoc Start Date End Date Accounting Flexfield
International VAT 0% No 01JAN00 null As Required
You can assign the tax code at either the customer or customer site level. If you only assign a tax code at the customer level, ensure that every site for that customer is an international site. Otherwise, assign the code to only those sites that are outside of the US.
See Also
Implementing US Sales Tax: page 3 2 Verify Tax Setup: page 3 21 US Sales Tax Reconciliation: page 3 23 Calculating Tax: page 10 16
3 20
Verify Tax Setup

Enter Taxable Invoices Enter an invoice in the Transactions window. Be sure to assign a transaction type that has the Calculate Tax field set to Yes. Save the invoice. Navigate to the Tax window for each line and ensure that the correct tax authority and rate is displayed as well as the tax amount. Enter Exempt Invoices Define a customer exemption. Create an invoice for this customer, including a taxable line item. Save the invoice. Navigate to the Tax window and check that a zero tax line was created. If the tax amount is not zero, check the following fields in the Tax Exemptions window:
Field Name Setting
Tax Code Percent Exempt Start Date End Date Certificate Number Reason Status
Sales Tax 100% Before the transaction date of the invoice After the transaction date of the invoice Optional Reason for exemption Primary
Interface Exempt Invoices Use AutoInvoice to import an invoice that includes an unapproved customer exemption. Using the Transaction window, verify that the tax rates on the generated tax lines are zero. Using the Tax Exemptions window, verify that an Unapproved customer exemption has been created at the BillTo Customer level.
Sales Tax
3 21
Enter International Invoice Enter an invoice for a customer with an international shipto address. Save the invoice. Navigate to the Tax window for each line and check that your International tax code is displayed and verify that the tax amount calculated is zero. Run the US Sales Tax Report Run the US Sales Tax report for the unposted period and verify that the taxable exempt and tax amounts are printed for this Invoice, State, County, and City.
See Also
US Sales Tax Reconciliation: page 3 23
3 22
US Sales Tax Reporting

You can reconcile and report on state and local taxes that you record on your receivables transactions using the US Sales Tax Report.
US Sales Tax Reconciliation

Receivables provides the US Sales Tax Report to assist you in preparing State Sales Tax Returns and in reconciling these returns to your general ledger. Within the US, most states, as well as some local governments, collect a sales or use tax for items sold within the state. To ensure collection of sales taxes, each state requires periodic Sales Tax Returns detailing the gross, taxable, exempt and tax amounts for each state, county and city. These returns must be supported by reports which include all transactions for which sales tax should have been charged. Suggestion: Not all businesses are required to collect and remit state sales and use taxes. You should seek the advice of a qualified tax professional to determine if your business has a legal requirement to collect these taxes. Additionally, good accounting technique requires the sales tax liability owed to each state be uniquely identifiable within the general ledger. The activity of each of these sales tax liability accounts must equal the amount of sales tax owed to each respective state. To accommodate each states sales tax reporting requirements, you should be able to: Report sales tax for all taxable transactions. Identify gross, taxable, exempt and tax amounts for each state, county and city. Calculate and review your tax liability to various tax authorities within the US. Prepare periodic Sales Tax Returns, as required by each state, from your receivables subledger transactions. Ensure the sales tax liability for each state is posted to a separate general ledger account or subaccount. Control whether receivable tax adjustments should be included in your state Sales Tax Returns or charged against revenue as a bad debt expense.
Sales Tax
3 23
Ensure all authorized sales tax transactions have been posted to the appropriate sales tax liability account and reported in the correct state Sales Tax Return. Reconcile your Sales Tax Returns to the tax liability accounts in your general ledger. Before Reconciling US Sales Tax Before attempting to use the US Sales Tax Report to prepare your Sales Tax Returns, you must perform the following: Define the Tax System Options Define Sales Tax Locations and Rates Define AutoAccounting for Tax Define Tax Exemptions and Exceptions Define Tax Profile Options Create International Customers and Sites Receivables calculates sales tax on invoices, debit memos, credit memos and adjustments. Sales tax is not calculated on guarantees, deposits, finance charges or cash receipts. To calculate sales tax on freight, you must set up the freight inventory item. Note: Because Receivables does not calculate sales tax on cash receipts, you cannot use the US Sales Tax Report for tax reporting on cash basis systems.
See Also
Implementing US Sales Tax: page 3 2 Overview of Tax Reconciliation: page 3 25
3 24
Overview of Tax Reconciliation

Identifying Sales Tax Related Transactions The US Sales Tax Report lists the gross, taxable, exempt and tax amounts for a given period to enable you to identify and review your sales tax liability to the various tax authorities around the US. Preparing Sales Tax Returns The US Sales Tax Report includes all Invoice, Debit Memo, Credit Memo and Adjustment transactions broken down by state, county and city to provide a basis for preparing the Sales Tax Returns for each state. Posting Sales Tax Transactions to the General Ledger Receivables lets you assign a unique general ledger account or subaccount for each states sales tax liability using the Locations and Rates window. See: Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7. Using the qualifier, Tax Accounting at this Level, you control which tax account is assigned to which segment of the sales tax location flexfield. As shipped, Receivables sets this qualifier to the state segment of the default flexfield structure, State.County.City. This setup allows you to create a unique general ledger account for each state and minimizes your setup effort. Controlling Tax Adjustments The US Sales Tax Report provides the parameter Sales Tax Liability Account Range to let you control which tax adjustments are included in your Sales Tax return. Reconciling Sales Tax Returns to the General Ledger The US Sales Tax Report provides you with all of the transaction detail from the Receivables subledger to enable you to reconcile your Sales Tax Returns to the general ledger. The US Sales Tax Report enables you to identify any tax transactions not posted to the appropriate sales tax liability account.
Sales Tax
3 25
Tax Adjustments An adjustment is a Receivables feature that lets you increase or decrease the amount due of your invoice or debit memo. Any adjustments that have been applied to the tax lines of an invoice and cannot be claimed from the state should not be posted to a sales tax liability account (for example, bad debt writeoffs of sales tax amounts). A user procedure should be implemented to ensure that the tax department authorizes all adjustments posted to the sales tax liability accounts. If you apply an adjustment to the tax lines of an invoice within Receivables, the US Sales Tax Report will prorate the tax adjustment across each of the individual tax lines of the adjusted invoice. Therefore, in the case of an invoice with multiple tax lines, each tax line will be partially adjusted. District Taxes The SQL*Loader control files that Receivables provides for uploading sales tax rate data from tax vendors combine the City, District and Municipal sales tax rates into one composite City sales tax rate. The US Sales Tax Report displays the combined City and District taxes in the city totals. Secondary taxes levied by the shipto city will be included in the total tax for the shipto city. Secondary tax levied by the shipfrom city will not be included in the US Sales Tax report. For more information, see: Importing Address Validation Data and Sales Tax Rates: page 8 2. Sales Tax Returns The US Sales Tax Report can be used to prepare a manual sales tax return by running the report to include all authorized sales tax transactions posted during the prior period. Alternatively, third party vendors can download the output from this report and create signatureready sales tax returns.
3 26
Reconciling Your Sales Tax Returns to the General Ledger

You should run the following reports during each accounting period to verify that your Sales Tax Returns for each state balance to the sales tax liability accounts in your general ledger: US Sales Tax Report Sales Journal by General Ledger Account Adjustments Register General Ledger Account Analysis Report Note: The General Ledger Account Analysis Report will not be part of the reconciliation process if you do not have General Ledger installed. US Sales Tax Report Within Receivables, users with an appropriate responsibility can submit the US Sales Tax Report from the Submit Requests window. The parameters for the US Sales Tax Report should be set to include all tax transactions posted to your sales tax liability accounts for the accounting period you plan to review.
US SALES TAX REPORT
PARAMETER Transaction Date Range General Ledger Date Range State Range Currency Code Exemption Status Sales Tax Liability Account Range
SUGGESTED VALUE NULL Period being reviewed Desired State(s) USD NULL Sales Tax Accounts mapped to the States requested in the State Range Parameter Show Summary, LinesBrief
Detail Level Table 3 10 (Table 1 of 2)
Sales Tax
3 27
US SALES TAX REPORT
PARAMETER Order By Posting Status Table 3 10 (Table 2 of 2)
SUGGESTED VALUE Customer Name Posted
The Transaction Date Range should be set to NULL. Otherwise, if the transaction date and GL date for a given transaction fall in different periods, your report will not balance to the general ledger for the requested GL Date Range. The Sales Tax Liability Account Range restricts adjustments only. The report will exclude any adjustments which fall outside the selected account range. All Invoice, Debit Memo and Credit Memo transactions with a line type of tax, will be included regardless of the account range selected. However, any Invoice, Debit Memo, or Credit Memo transactions that post tax to accounts outside the selected account range will be tagged with an asterisk (*) in the footnote column of the report. The default value for the Detail Level parameter (Show Summary, LinesBrief) enables you to review taxing authority totals while providing you with an adequate level of detail to efficiently research discrepancies. Suggestion: To expedite the reconciliation process for state sales tax returns, you should first run the US Sales Tax Report using the Totals for State option of the Detail Level report parameter. This option will provide a single state total on each printed page of the report and can be used to quickly identify variant state balances. You can then run the report using the Show Summary, LinesBrief option for only these variant states. If an adjustment has been applied to nontax invoice lines and has been erroneously posted to an account within the selected account range, it can be identified by nonzero amounts in the Gross and Taxable columns for the state, county and city summaries. See: US Sales Tax Report: page 3 33.
3 28
Sales Journal by General Ledger Account Report Within Receivables, users with an appropriate responsibility can submit the Sales Journal by General Ledger Account Report from the Submit Requests window. Use the Sales Journal by General Ledger Account Report to verify that only authorized sales tax activity has been posted to valid sales tax liability accounts only.
SALES JOURNAL BY GL ACCOUNT REPORT
PARAMETER Order By General Ledger Date Range Currency Code Account Range GL Account Type Posting Status Table 3 11 (Table 1 of 1)
SUGGESTED VALUE Customer Period being reviewed USD NULL TAX Posted
By setting the GL Account Type to TAX, the Sales Journal by GL Account Report will only print tax transactions. If this report does not balance by account to your sales tax liability accounts in the general ledger, you will have to run additional copies of this report to identify the nontax transactions posted to your liability accounts. To verify that only authorized sales tax activity has been posted to your sales tax liability accounts, you can run the Sales Journal by GL Account Report with the following parameters:
PARAMETER Order By General Ledger Date Range Currency Code Table 3 12 (Table 1 of 2)
SUGGESTED VALUE Customer Period being reviewed USD
Sales Tax
3 29
PARAMETER Account Range GL Account Type Posting Status Table 3 12 (Table 2 of 2)
SUGGESTED VALUE Sales Tax Liability Accounts Receivable, Revenue, Freight Posted
The GL Account Type parameter accepts only one value per report submission. You will have to run the report once for each of the three values. See: Sales Journal by GL Account Report in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Adjustments Register Within Receivables, users with an appropriate responsibility can submit the Adjustment Register from the Submit Requests window. Submit the Adjustments Register with the following parameters to verify that only tax adjustments have been posted to sales tax liability accounts.
ADJUSTMENTS REGISTER
PARAMETER Order By GL Date Range Transaction Date Range Due Date Range Invoice Type Range Adjustment Type Range Currency Code Range Table 3 13 (Table 1 of 2)
SUGGESTED VALUE Customer Period being reviewed Null Null Null Null USD
3 30
PARAMETER Receivables Company Range Adjustment Account Range
SUGGESTED VALUE Balancing Segment being reconciled Sales tax accounts mapped to the states requested in the State Range Parameter of the US Sales Tax Report
Every adjustment posted to your sales tax liability accounts should be reviewed by your companys Tax Manager to verify the adjustment should be included in your Sales Tax Return for the period. Additionally, run the Adjustments Register with the following parameters to verify that tax adjustments have been posted to the sales tax liability accounts only.
PARAMETER Order By GL Date Range Transaction Date Range Due Date Range Invoice Type Range Adjustment Type Range Currency Code Range Receivables Company Range Adjustment Account Range Table 3 14 (Table 1 of 1)
SUGGESTED VALUE Customer Period being reviewed Null Null Null Tax Adjustments USD Balancing Segment being reconciled Null
You should ensure that any sales tax adjustments not posted to sales tax liability accounts are receivables writeoffs, which cannot be
Sales Tax
3 31
1included in your Sales Tax Returns. See: Adjustment Register in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. General Ledger Account Analysis Report Within General Ledger, users with an appropriate responsibility can submit the Account Analysis Report from the Submit Requests window. Use the General Ledger Account Analysis Report to confirm that only Receivables transactions have been posted to the sales tax liability accounts.
GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT ANALYSIS REPORT
PARAMETER Type Currency Balance Type Budget or Encumbrance Name Accounting Period Range Flexfield Range Order By Table 3 15 (Table 1 of 1)
SUGGESTED VALUE Source Item USD A N/A Period being reviewed Sales Tax Liability Accounts Source
Finally, use the Transactions window to review the account distribution for each tax line of the transactions marked with an asterisk (*) in the US Sales Tax Report. Make any corrections as needed. See: Entering Transactions in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
See Also
Implementing US Sales Tax: page 3 2
3 32
US Sales Tax Report

Figure 3 1
Sporting Goods U.S. Sales Tax Report Currency: USD GL Date: From 01JUN1995 To 30JUN1995 Order By: Customer Name Transaction Date: From 30APR1900 To 25FEB1999 Posted Status: Posted Adjustments From: 00.000.2223.000.000.0513 To: 99.999.2223.999.999.0513 State: IN County: VIGO City: Customer Number 216010 8212 8212 8212 8212 State: TERRE HAUTE Report Date: 10JUL95 10:17 Page: 14
Invoice Number 584562 579526 579527 E617661 E626271
Adjustment Invoice or Type Number Adj Date Customer Name Invo 29JUN95 FREMONT WINES Invo 06JUN95 SIMPLY SPORTS Invo 06JUN95 SIMPLY SPORTS Invo 22JUN95 SIMPLY SPORTS Invo 26JUN95 SIMPLY SPORTS TERRE HAUTE County: VIGO
Invoice Lines Footnote Exempt Reason Amount Tax Amount | DIRECT PAY PE 300.00 0.00 RESALE 9,400.00 0.00 RESALE 3,572.00 0.00 RESALE 4,000.00 0.00 RESALE 13,375.00 0.00 IN Tax Amount by Tax Authority 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Tax Amount by Tax Authority 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Tax Amount by Tax Authority 0.00 0.00 5,054.59 0.00 5,054.59
Totals for City:
Invoices Credit Memos Adjustments Nets
Lines Amount Exempt Amount Taxable Amount Tax Amount 30,647.00 30,647.00 0.00 0.00 City: TERRE HAUTE 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 County: VIGO 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 State: IN Other: 30,647.00 30,647.00 0.00 0.00 Tax Total: VIGO State: IN
Totals for County:
Invoices Credit Memos Adjustments Nets Totals for State:
Lines Amount Exempt Amount Taxable Amount Tax Amount 30,647.00 30,647.00 0.00 0.00 City: All 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 County: VIGO 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 State: IN Other: 30,647.00 30,647.00 0.00 0.00 Tax Total: IN Lines Amount Exempt Amount Taxable Amount Tax Amount 183,291.51 73,734.01 109,557.50 5,477.90 City: All 412,305.45 0.00 412,305.45 327.52 County: All 0.00 0.00 0.00 95.79 State: IN Other: 595,596.96 73,734.01 521,862.95 5,054.59 Tax Total:
Total Exempt Amount By Reason DIRECT PAY PERMIT EDUCATION FEDERAL GOVERNMENT MANUFACTURER NONPROFIT ORGANIZATION RESALE RUNTIME ROYALTY STATE/LOCAL GOVERNMENT Exempt Total:
Exempt Amount 27,752.72 4,625.75 3,917.00 1,050.00 588.00 32,084.50 315.74 3,400.30 73,734.01
Use this report to review your tax liability to the various tax authorities around the US. The US Sales Tax report includes all Invoices, Credit Memos, and Adjustments broken down by Ship To State, County, and
Sales Tax
3 33
City and lists taxable, exempt, and tax amounts. This report is used as the basis for the periodic Sales Tax Returns required by each state. This report provides all of the transaction detail from your Receivables subledger to let you to reconcile these returns against your General Ledger balances. In addition, a summary is provided of the total amount exempt for each reason. The US Sales Tax report supports only accrual basis reporting and is only used for United States sales tax. See: US Sales Tax Reconciliation: page 3 23 and Implementing US Sales Tax: page 3 2. You submit this report from the Submit Requests window.
Report Parameters
Transaction Date Range: Select and print sales tax information for the transaction date range you specify. This field is optional. If you specify a transaction date range but no GL date range, your report will not balance to the General Ledger if the transaction and GL dates for a transaction fall in different periods. Note: For adjustment transactions, the transaction date refers to the transaction date of the invoice to which the adjustment applies. GL Date Range: Select and print sales tax information for the GL date range you specify. The default is the first and last date of the prior accounting period. Use a GL date range to enable you to balance your US Sales Tax report against your General Ledger. Warning: If you specify both a GL date range and a transaction date range, transactions with transaction and GL dates in different periods will not be printed in the report. State Range: Select and print sales tax information for the State range you specify. The state information is generally derived from the shiptoaddress of the transaction. If the shiptoaddress is blank, Receivables derives the state information from the transactions billto address. Currency Range: Select and print sales tax information for the Currency range you specify. Exemption Status: Enter an exemption status if you want the report to only list transactions which reference exemptions with that status. You can find all transactions using rejected exemptions by entering Rejected here.
3 34
Sales Tax Liability Account Range: This parameter only restricts Receivables Adjustment transactions. An Adjustment transaction is a Receivables feature that lets you increase or decrease the amount due of your invoice, debit memo, chargeback, deposit or guarantee. The report will exclude any Adjustment transactions posted to accounts outside the selected range. Invoice, Debit Memo and Credit Memo transactions that post to a general ledger account outside the selected account range are included in the report, but are tagged with an asterisk (*) in the footnote column. If no range is selected, all Adjustments will be displayed and no transactions will be tagged. Detail Level: Select the level of detail to use for your report: RX Line Level: This option lets you use the Report eXchange (RX) client to include transaction line level information in this report. If you choose this option, this report generates one line per transaction line and populates each line attribute for the RX client. RX Header Level: This option lets you use the Report eXchange (RX) client to include transaction header level amounts in this report. If you choose this option, this report generates one line per transaction with only the Total Lines Amount and Total Tax Amount fields showing transaction level totals. Show Summary: To see a summary of the total tax for transactions within each state, county and city. No transaction detail is printed. Show Summary and Invoices: To see the information generated by the Show Summary option plus a summary of each transaction within a tax authority. Show Summary, Invoices, and Lines: To see the information generated by the Show Summary and Invoices option, plus a breakdown of each transaction line. Show Summary, LinesBrief: To see a condensed version of your transaction line information and tax totals on one printed line of the report. Totals for State: To see a single state total on each printed page of the report. Order By: Select the option to use to sort your information. The report will first sort by tax authority and then by one of the following sort options that you select: Customer Name
Sales Tax
3 35
Customer Number Invoice Date Invoice Number Posting Status: Select one of the following posting statuses to include on your report: All NoPost: Choose this status to include only transactions that have the transaction type option Post to GL set to No. Posted Unposted Show All Related Transactions: Enter Yes to view all invoices within the Transaction date range and all Adjusting Transactions (Credit Memos and Adjustments) that are related to that invoice. This parameter is only available when you provide a transaction date range. Reporting Level: Enter the reporting level for this report. Choose Set Of Books, Legal Entity, or Operating Unit. If you use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Operating Unit. If you do not use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Set Of Books. Note: The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines the top reporting level for your responsibility. Reporting Context: If you entered Set of Books for the Reporting Level, the default is the set of books associated with your responsibility. If you entered Legal Entity for the Reporting Level, select a legal entity from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which legal entities appear in the list of values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any legal entity that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose only the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. If you entered Operating Unit for the Reporting Level parameter, select an operating unit from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which operating units appear in the list of values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any operating unit that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose any operating unit within the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. If the profile option is set to Operating Unit, you can select only the operating unit assigned to your responsibility.
3 36
Note: The profile option MO: Operating Unit determines the operating unit for your responsibility.
Sales Tax
3 37
3 38
CHAPTER
Implementing Canadian Tax

his chapter provides a step by step description of how to implement Canadian Tax for your Oracle Application and includes information about Canadian tax reporting using the Tax Reconciliation Report and the Tax Register.
41
Implementing Canadian Sales Tax

This essay provides a logical flow for implementing Canadian Sales Tax in Receivables; your specific requirements may be different. We recommend that you perform your tax setup when you set up the rest of your Receivables system. For a complete list of the steps required to set up Receivables, see: Setting Up Receivables in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Suggestion: To help you plan and complete your taxspecific setup steps, use this essay with the Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard. You can use the Implementation Wizard as a resource center to read online help for a setup activity and open the appropriate setup window and to see a graphical overview of setup steps. You can also document your implementation by using the Wizard to record comments for each step for future reference and review. For more information, see: Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard User Guide.
Attention: If you use the Oracle Applications Multiple Organization Support feature, you need to perform this implementation for each of your operating units. For more information, refer to the Multiple Organizations in Oracle Applications manual.
Sales Tax In Canada, sales taxes exist at the federal level and at the provincial level. Goods and Services Tax (GST) is a federal tax levied in the nonparticipating provinces and territories across Canada. In the participating provinces, which include Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and New Brunswick, a federal and provincial blended tax called Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) is used. The recovery of tax is made through a rebate and/or an Input Tax Credit (ITC), depending on whether the purchases are intended for commercial or nonprofit activities. Some goods and services are exempt from GST and HST. Sales tax at the provincial level varies by province. The tax rates within each province apply to the value of goods or services before GST is applied (this is known as the sidebyside application). The only exceptions are Quebec and Prince Edward Island, where the sales tax applies to the value of goods or services after GST is applied (this is known as the compounding application).
42
Goods and Services Tax Goods and Services Tax (GST) is tax levied on many consumer products and professional services. Some goods and services are exempt from GST (for example, health and educational services). Depending on whether a purchase is considered commercial or not determines if the recovery of the tax can be made through a rebate, an Input Tax Credit (ITC), or both. With Goods and Services Tax, the purchaser may be eligible for an ITC, a rebate on taxes payable, or both. To claim the ITC or rebate, the purchaser must have on record the suppliers GST registration number. If purchases are used exclusively in commercial activities, the purchaser is eligible for a full ITC. Nonprofit organizations can also apply for rebates (at prescribed rates) for purchases not qualifying for ITC. In addition, an organization can claim an ITC on the purchased goods and services that qualify as commercial activities and a rebate on the noncommercial portion. For more information see: GST and HST Tax Recovery: page 4 4. Harmonized Sales Tax Effective April 1, 1997, the provinces of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick and Newfoundland combined their Provincial Sales Tax (PST) with the federal sales tax to form a harmonized, value added tax called Harmonized Sales Tax (HST). The HST operates as a single rate of 15%, of which seven percent represent the federal component and eight percent the provincial component. Most tax registrants will operate on a taxexcluded basis. However, the government has reserved the right to legislate tax included if more than 51% of the population agree to adopt this blended tax rate. Harmonized Sales Tax is similar to Goods and Services Tax in two ways. First, some goods and services are exempt from HST. Second, depending on whether a purchase is considered commercial or not determines if the recovery of the tax can be made through a rebate, an Input Tax Credit, or both. To claim an ITC, a rebate on taxes payable, or both, the purchaser must have the suppliers HST registration number on record. If purchases are used exclusively in commercial activities, the purchaser is eligible for a full ITC. Nonprofit organizations can also apply for rebates (at prescribed rates) for purchases not qualifying for an ITC. In addition, an organization can claim an ITC on the purchased goods and services
43
(which qualify as commercial activities) and a rebate on the noncommercial portion. GST and HST Tax Recovery Businesses registered for Goods and Services Tax (GST) purposes are required to collect GST for goods and services that are subject to GST. They can then claim Input Tax Credits for the GST that they paid to produce the goods and services which are subject to GST. The net amount (collectible GST, less ITC) is remitted to the federal government. In general, all purchasers are required to pay GST for goods and services subject to GST, unless they are specifically exempt by the federal government. To illustrate how GST works, consider a simplified example of a washing machine, which begins with mining of iron ore. The mine sells ore to a steel maker for $100, plus $7 GST which is remitted to the federal government. In transforming the ore into steel, the steel maker adds $200 (including profits) to its value and sells the steel to the appliance manufacturer for $300. The steel maker charges $21 GST on the sale, but claims ITC of $7 and therefore remits $14 difference to the federal government. If the appliance manufacturer sells the washing machine to a retailer for $500, it charges $35 GST, claims ITC of $21, and remits the difference of $14 to the government. Similarly, GST is charged and refunded at various stages of the production and sale chain until the final sale to the consumer. Note: The information in this section also applies to Harmonized Sales Tax (HST). Tax Status for GST and HST Taxable goods and services are subject to one of the following statuses: Taxable Zero rated Taxable Exempt
44
Taxable
Exempt
GST and HST are charged at 7% or 15% respectively, or 0%. You can claim input tax credits.
GST and HST are not charged. You cannot claim input tax credits.
Generally, the tax status is determined by product. In Canada, product is usually a function of industry so the status is assigned to the industry (with a few exceptions). For the consumer, there is no difference between zerorated and exempt goods and services: the consumer either pays tax or they do not. Although GST and HST are not charged on zerorated goods and services, the tax registrant can claim input tax credits to recover the GST or HST paid or owed on purchases and the expenses incurred to provide them.
Provincial Sales Tax

Provincial Sales Tax (PST) is levied by each Canadian province except Alberta, the Territories, and the participating provinces where the PST rate is now blended with the federal tax rate. Unlike GST, there is no recoverable input tax credit for provincial sales tax paid (except for Quebec where PST is recoverable as an Input Tax Credit, similar to GST). Each province has its own legislation that determines the PST rate and decides which goods and services are exempt from PST. The Provincial Sales Tax that is charged is based upon the destination of the goods or services, not their origin. If the goods or services are purchased for resale, the supplier is not required to charge PST on the basis of the purchasers licensed PST registration number. Most provinces require that the supplier maintain a PST exemption certificate on file for customers who claim exempt status. PST is levied only once and is paid by the ultimate consumer of the goods or services. For example, the purchase of office supplies by a manufacturer for its own consumption is subject to PST, but office supplies purchased for resale are not. In most provinces, provincial taxes paid to the purchaser are not recoverable and therefore become part of the cost of the goods and services purchased (Quebec is the only exception, as ITCs and rebates are allowed on many purchases). Sale of goods that are delivered by the supplier to destinations outside the province are exempt from originators tax; however, these goods
45
are subject to PST in the province where they are consumed. For example, if a supplier in Ontario ships goods to a buyer in Quebec, the supplier is not required to charge Ontario sales tax. However, the buyer is required to selfassess tax on the goods according to the province in which the goods are consumed. Additionally, if a company ships goods to three different provinces, the company must comply with the collection and remittance of three different provincial sales taxes (where applicable) to each of the three provincial tax authorities. This assumes that the supplier has a permanent, registered location in each shipto province (e.g. a business address) and they pay business taxes. If the supplier is not registered in the shipto province, no provincial sales tax is charged on the sale to that province. In this case, the customer is required to selfassess and remit the applicable provincial sales tax.
Attention: As stated above, resellers are exempt from PST because PST is charged only to the end consumer. A supplier can bill and ship directly to an endconsumer on behalf of a reseller and no PST applies. However, there is one exception: if the supplier sells to both a PSTexempt reseller and directly to the same endconsumer. Consider the following example: Madewell Inc. bills and ships goods to a reseller, PSTexempt Value Hardware. If Value Hardware resells to Best Cleaning Supplies, Value Hardware must charge PST. However, PST does not apply if Madewell Inc. (the supplier) sells to and bills Value Hardware (the reseller), but ships directly to Best Cleaning Supplies (the end consumer).
Tax Status for PST Taxable goods and services are subject to one of the following statuses: Taxable Exempt As with GST and HST, the tax status is determined by product. The product is usually a function of industry so the status is assigned to the industry (with a few exceptions). Each province dictates what the tax status is on the goods and services within their province. Domestic Transactions Domestic transactions are transactions between registered traders within Canada. These transactions may have GST and PST charged on
46
goods and services with shipto locations applying different PST rates to specific goods and services. Export Transactions Export transactions are transactions between a Canadian trader and a supplier or customer located outside Canada. Customers and sites outside Canada may be tax exempt and should have a zero tax code assigned to all invoices. However, there are a few cases where GST is charged. For example, a magazine subscription with a US shipto address should be charged GST. Public Service Bodies Public service bodies can be grouped into claimant types. There are different rebates for each type of claimant. To calculate the rebate, the claimant determines the GST eligible for rebate and multiplies it by the associated rebate factor. In addition, a nonprofit organization may fall into more than one category of the public service body rebate. For example, an organization may qualify as both a hospital authority and school authority, and each operation will use its respective rebate rate on the eligible purchases.
47
Setup Checklist for Canadian Sales Tax

Complete the following steps to implement Canadian sales tax in Receivables:
Step 1: Define System Options: page 4 9 Step 2: Save System Options: page 4 11 Step 3: Define Accounting Flexfield Value Set: page 4 11 Step 4: Define Tax Codes and Rates: page 4 12 Step 5: Define Tax Groups: page 4 15 Step 6: Define Items: page 4 23 Step 7: Assign Tax Group at Customer Level: page 4 23 Step 8: Define Tax Exemptions: page 4 24 Step 9: Define Transaction Types: page 4 24 Step 10: Define Automatic Accounting for Tax: page 4 25 Step 11: Enable Calculation of GST or PST on Freight: page 4 25 Step 12: Define Tax Profile Options: page 4 26 Step 13: Define Canadian Tax Report Set: page 4 28
48
Setup Steps for Canadian Sales Tax

Complete the following steps in the order shown to implement Canadian Tax in Receivables. Step 1 Define System Options The fields listed below are used to fine tune the tax calculation process. These fields control which aspects of the tax engine are used when calculating a tax rate. For Canadian based tax systems, we recommend the following settings. However, your implementation may be slightly different based on your business needs. For more information about these fields or any settings not described in this table, see: Defining Receivables System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Tax Option Field Name Suggested Setting
Accounting Tabbed Region Tax Account Tax Tabbed Region Tax Method Location Flexfield Structure Postal Code Range Address Validation Compound Taxes Invoice Printing Tax Registration Number VAT Province From: ! To: zzzzzzzzzzzzz Warning Yes Summarize by Tax Name Your companys tax registration number (this number prints on your invoices) Null Null Yes, if you use inclusive tax codes; otherwise, No. Line Null
Tax Vendor Views Sales Tax Geo Override Inclusive Tax Used Rounding Options Region Calculation Level
49
Suggested Setting
Rounding Rule Reporting Currency Precision Minimum Accountable Unit Allow Override Tax Defaults and Rules Tabbed Region Enforce Tax From Revenue Account Customer Site Customer Product Revenue Account System Options Tax Code
Nearest CND Enter a value based on your reporting currency. Enter a value based on your reporting currency. Set to Yes or No based on your business needs. Setting Hierarchy Number Null Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes 1 Null Yes 4 GSTPST * (this should represent your most commonly used Tax Group) Yes ** Yes *** No Canada Prorate All
Exception Rates Region Use Customer Exemptions Use Item Exemptions Use Item Tax Rate Exceptions
Miscellaneous Tabbed Region
Default Country Application Rule Set

* You need to define your tax codes and Tax Groups before you can enter a default tax code here. ** Customer exemptions let you fully or partially exempt specific customers from tax. In this tax system, customers can be assigned a specific tax code that would exempt them from tax.
4 10
*** Product exemptions let you fully or partially exempt specific items from tax. In this tax system, items can be assigned a specific tax code that would exempt them from tax. For more information, see: Tax Exemptions: page 3 4. Suggestion: If you need to use both the GSTPST and the HST Tax Groups simultaneously, enter the GSTPST code at the system options level and the HST code at the customer or customer site level for correct tax calculation. Note: It is possible to process multiple taxes under a US set of books. However, the taxes charged and reported on will be in the functional currency of that set of books. So if the functional currency is in US dollars, it will have to be converted to Canadian dollars if the taxes are collected for a Canadian Tax Authority. For more information, see: Canadian Tax Reporting: page 4 30. Tax Hierarchy Receivables searches for a tax code using the hierarchy you defined in the System Options window, stopping when one is found. Using the approach outlined above, you can automatically tax your transactions for: Domestic invoices for different inventory items, with each item having its own tax rate assigned to it Export invoices for customers both inside and outside Canada Invoices for customers in Canada with tax exemption numbers Step 2 Save System Options Save your system options. Use the Completed Requests window to check that each of the concurrent programs submitted by the System Options window has completed successfully. If the concurrent programs fail, choose Request Log for more information about the errors. You can also refer to the If Your Concurrent Programs Fail section of the Calculating Tax Essay. See: Calculating Tax: page 10 2. Step 3 Define Accounting Flexfield Value Set To simplify your Canadian Tax reporting process, you should assign a different tax liability account to each tax code by province and federal levels, thereby enabling the Canadian Tax Reconciliation Report to distinctly display the taxable and tax amounts for each tax code. This will provide a comprehensive method of verifying that all tax
4 11
transactions have been posted to the correct Provincial/Federal Tax Account. Use the Segment Values window to create a tax liability account for each distinct tax that you will collect. Using Receivables AutoAccounting, you can use any segment of your chart of accounts for reconciling taxes. Following is an example of how it could be set up using the Natural Account: Natural Account 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 Step 4 Description GST Goods and Services Tax Ontario PST Saskatchewan PST Alberta PST British Columbia PST Manitoba PST HST Newfoundland Prince Edward PST Quebec PST HST Nova Scotia Yukon Territories Northwest Territories HST New Brunswick Nunavut Territories
Define Tax Codes and Rates Before defining your Tax Groups, first determine the grouping of sales taxes that you are required to use to bill your federal and provincial sales taxes (for example, GSTPST and NOGSTPST). Then decide which tax codes you want to add to each Tax Group and define them in the Tax Codes and Rates window. Define your tax codes using the suggested settings in the table below as a guide. You can share tax codes across Tax Groups so, for example, you can use the tax code GST for 7% in both the GSTPST and the GSTNOPST Tax Groups. We recommend that you choose a Tax Type of Value Added Tax, as this tax method is similar to the type of tax applied in Canada.
4 12
When defining tax codes for Canadian tax, we recommend the following settings:
Field Name Suggested Settings/Comments
Rate Tabbed Region Tax Code Tax Type Taxable Basis Tax Rate Tax Amount Sign Formula Effective Tabbed Region Effective Dates The date from which this tax code is active. Leave the To field blank if you want to make this code active indefinitely. Yes to make this tax code available for use; No otherwise. Output (this lets you use this tax code on sales transactions) Yes or No (setting this to Yes lets you associate tax exemptions with this tax code) Yes or No (setting this to Yes lets you change the tax rate and amount at the invoice level) No (unless HST is required, in which case Yes may be appropriate) No Yes The tax accounting flexfield you created in Step 3. Enter a name for this tax code. VAT Before Discount Nominal rate of tax. Null Cr (this lets Receivables credit your Tax account) Null
Enable Control Tabbed Region Tax Class Allow Exempt
Ad hoc
Inclusive Tax Allow Inclusive Override Displayed More Tabbed Region Tax
4 13
Field Name
Suggested Settings/Comments
Printed Tax Name VAT Transaction Type

The tax code name as you want it to appear on printed invoices. Null
Note: If you assign a tax code with a rate of zero to an invoice, or if the invoice is exempt, it will still have tax lines and account distributions posted to the General Ledger for the zero tax amount. Suggestion: Although you can make changes to the fields in the Tax Codes and Rates window, we recommend adding an end date to the existing tax code, then redefining the code using the same tax code name. This lets you keep an audit trail of changes to rates while ensuring that the correct rate is always used for your transactions.
Attention: If you do not know a customers Provincial Tax Registration Number, you are required to charge tax. If you know the correct rate for a taxable customer, assign the appropriate tax code and rate to the customer. Otherwise, you should enter a zerorated tax code, which allows ad hoc changes. You must then enter the correct tax manually at the time of invoicing. To avoid charging tax unnecessarily, be sure to enter a customers tax registration number as soon as it is known. At this point you can update the Tax Group to zerorate this customer from tax. For more information, see:Entering Customers in the Oracle Receivables User Guide .
Refer to Figure 4 1 for an example of how you might define tax codes for Canada. Note: The rates in this example are provided for illustration purposes only. Please contact a tax professional for specific implementation requirements.
4 14
Figure 4 1: Sample Canadian Tax Codes

Printed Tax Allow Tax Tax Code Description Tax Name Type Exempt Displayed Taxable Basis Rate Tax Account ABPST BCPST ONPST SKPST MBPST QCPST PEPST YTPST NTPST NT2PST GST NGST NONPST NSKPST NABPST NBCPST NMBPST NQCPST NPEPST NYTPST NNTPST NNT2PST HSTNB HSTNF HSTNS Alberta PST British Col Ontario PST Saskatchewa ABPST VAT BCPST VAT ONPST VAT SKPST VAT No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount Before Discount 0 7 8 6 7 7.5 10 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 15 15 0100052030000000 0100052040000000 0100052010000000 0100052020000000 0100052050000000 0100052080000000 0100052070000000 0100052100000000 0100052110000000 0100052130000000 0100052000000000 0100052000000000 0100052010000000 0100052020000000 0100052030000000 0100052040000000 0100052050000000 0100052080000000 0100052070000000 0100052100000000 0100052110000000 0100052130000000 0100052120000000 0100052060000000 0100052090000000
Manitoba PS MBPST VAT Quebec PST QCPST VAT
Prince Edwa PEPST VAT Yukon Terri YTPST VAT Northwest T NTPST VAT Nunavut Ter NTPST VAT Goods&Servi GST No Goods&Se GST No Ontario No Saskatc No Alberta No British No Manitob No Quebec VAT VAT
ONPST VAT SKPST VAT ABPST VAT BCPST VAT MBPST VAT QCPST VAT
No Prince E PEPST VAT No Yukon PS YTPST VAT No Northwes NTPST VAT No Nunavut New Brunsw Newfoundla NTPST VAT HST HST VAT VAT VAT
Nova Scotia HST
For more information, see: Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2. Step 5 Define Tax Groups Using the Tax Groups window, create Tax Groups using each of the tax codes that you defined in the previous step.
4 15
After you define a group of tax codes, you can select any one of the Tax Group names as a default value at the System Options, BillTo Customer, ShipTo Customer Site, Item, and Memo Line levels. The default Tax Group is then copied down to the Order or Invoice Line and can be overridden if the profile option Tax: Allow Override of Tax Code is set to Yes. However, you should set up your default Tax Groups so no override is required. When you assign a Tax Group to an Order or Invoice Line, Receivables generates a correct set of tax codes, rates, and accounting based on the shipto address or other conditions defined within that group. Tax compounding is calculated automatically (see below). Group Constraint Define a Group Constraint for each Tax Group to ensure that shipto provinces for sales orders and invoices match the provinces defined in the Tax Group. For example, you can define a Group Constraint which displays a custom error message if the transactions shipto province does not exist in the Tax Group. For more information, see: Group Constraints: page 6 23. Condition Sets Define a Condition Set for each tax code in the Tax Groups to indicate that each tax code is dependent on one or more conditions that you specify. For example, you might define the following condition set for a tax code in a Tax Group: If the shipto province is Quebec, use this tax code. For more information, see: Condition Sets: page 6 21. Note: If you are upgrading from a previous release of Oracle Receivables, the Condition Set for the tax codes in your existing Tax Groups appears as Upgrade. Provincial Sales Tax Receivables uses the Condition Set you define to automatically select the correct provincial sales tax rate based on the shipto address. Goods and Services Tax Specify your GST tax code in the Tax Group without any Condition Set; this way, the GST tax code is used on every shipment. Compounding (tax on tax) Using Tax Groups, multiple conditional taxes can be automatically applied to each order and invoice line. Compounded taxes, such as those required in Quebec, are identified using the Precedence field of the Tax Groups window. Compound taxes are only applied if both the
4 16
GST and PST tax codes are each given a compounding precedence number. Suggestion: Canadian addresses can be entered and optionally validated using the Flexible Address Formats. Validating the Province field during address entry ensures that the Tax Groups window is always able to match the Provincial Sales Tax Code with the shipto province of the order and invoice line. See: Flexible Addresses in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Field Name Suggested Setting/Comments
Group Code
A Tax Group that represents the tax processing requirement for your organization (for example, HST, GSTPST, NOGSTNOPST). The name of this Tax Group (the default is the Group Code, but you can change it) The date from which this tax code is active (leave the To field blank if you want this Tax Group to be active indefinitely). Description of this Tax Group. Userdefined Yes Null Yes A tax code applicable to this Tax Group. The date from which this tax code is active within this Tax Group (leave the To field blank if you want to make this tax code active indefinitely). Yes Userdefined Userdefined (see: Exception Sets: page 6 22)
Group Name
Effective
Description Constraint Name Output Input Enabled Condition Tabbed Region Tax Code Start/End Dates
Enabled Condition Exception
4 17
Field Name
Suggested Setting/Comments
Rates Tabbed Region Tax Rate Displayonly (default value derived from the Tax Codes and Rates window) Displayonly (default value derived from the Tax Codes and Rates window) Displayonly (default value derived from the Tax Codes and Rates window) Null Displayonly (default value derived from the Tax Codes and Rates window) To support compound tax calculation, enter a number; otherwise, leave null.
Tax Amount
Sign
Formula Inclusive Tax
Compounding Precedence
For more information, see: Tax Groups: page 6 20. Suggestion: After setting up your Tax Groups, run the Tax Code and Tax Group Listing reports to ensure they are defined correctly. The Tax Group Listing is shown below to provide an example of how you might set up your Tax Groups. The tax rates shown in these examples are valid as of July 1999.
4 18
Figure 4 2: Tax Groups Listing, page 1

Tax Group Code Group Name Description Enabled Flag Constraint Name : : : : : GSTPST GSTPST GST Taxable, PST Taxable Y Cdn Group Constraint
Constraint Lines If Ship To Province Not Found Type True False Action Error Message Use This Tax Group Compounding Precedence Tax | Rate | Condition Lines Condition Actions 7 1 0 If Ship To Province = ALBERTA If Ship To Province = MANITOBA If Ship To Province = BRITISH COLUMBIA If Ship To Province = NORTHWEST TERRITIORIES If Ship To Province = SASKATCHEWAN 2 If Ship To Province = QUEBEC If Ship To Province = PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND If Ship To Province = YUKON TERRITORY If Ship To Province = ONTARIO If Ship To Province = NUNAVUT TERRITIORIES True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code Value No PST was calculated. The Province in the customer address is case sensitive, please ensure it matches exactly to the Province in the Tax Group.
Tax Code GST ABPST
Condition Name
AB
MBPST
MB
BCPST
BC
NTPST
NT
SKPST
SK
QCPST
QC
7.5
PEPST
PE
10
YTPST
YT
ONPST
ON
NT2PST
NT2
4 19

Tax Group Code Group Name Description Enabled Flag Constraint Name : : : : : GSTNOPST GSTNOPST GST Taxable, PST Not Taxable Y Cdn Group Constraint
Constraint Lines If Ship To Province Not Found Type True False Action Error Message Use This Tax Group Compounding Precedence Tax | Condition Name Rate | Condition Lines 7 1 AB 0 If Ship To Province = ALBERTA If Ship To Province = MANITOBA If Ship To Province = BRITISH COLUMBIA If Ship To Province = NORTHWEST TERRITIORIES If Ship To Province = SASKATCHEWAN 2 If Ship To Province = QUEBEC If Ship To Province = PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND If Ship To Province = YUKON TERRITORY If Ship To Province = ONTARIO If Ship To Province = NUNAVUT TERRITIORIES Value No PST was calculated. The Province in the customer address is case sensitive, please ensure it matches exactly to the Province in the Tax Group.
Tax Code GST NABPST
Condition Actions
True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code
NMBPST
MB
NBCPST
BC
NNTPST
NT
NSKPST
SK
NQCPST
QC
NPEPST
PE
NYTPST
YT
NONPST
ON
NNT2PST
NT2
4 20

Tax Group Code Group Name Description Enabled Flag Constraint Name : : : : : NOGSTNOPST NOGSTNOPST GST Not Taxable, PST Not Taxable Y Cdn Group Constraint
Constraint Lines If Ship To Province Not Found Type True False Action Error Message Use This Tax Group Compounding Precedence Tax | Rate | Condition Lines 0 1 0 If Ship To Province = ALBERTA If Ship To Province = MANITOBA If Ship To Province = BRITISH COLUMBIA If Ship To Province = NORTHWEST TERRITIORIES If Ship To Province = SASKATCHEWAN 2 If Ship To Province = QUEBEC If Ship To Province = PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND If Ship To Province = YUKON TERRITORY If Ship To Province = ONTARIO If Ship To Province = NUNAVUT TERRITIORIES Value No PST was calculated. The Province in the customer address is case sensitive, please ensure it matches exactly to the Province in the Tax Group.
Tax Code NGST NABPST
Condition Name
Condition Actions
AB
NMBPST
MB
NBCPST
BC
NNTPST
NT
NSKPST
SK
NQCPST
QC
NPEPST
PE
NYTPST
YT
NONPST
ON
NNT2PST
NT2
4 21

Tax Group Code Group Name Description Enabled Flag Constraint Name : : : : : NOGSTPST NOGSTPST No GST Taxable, PST Taxable Y Cdn Group Constraint
Constraint Lines If Ship To Province Not Found Type True False Action Error Message Use This Tax Group Compounding Precedence Tax | Rate | Condition Lines 0 1 0 If Ship To Province = ALBERTA If Ship To Province = MANITOBA If Ship To Province = BRITISH COLUMBIA If Ship To Province = NORTHWEST TERRITIORIES If Ship To Province = SASKATCHEWAN 2 If Ship To Province = QUEBEC If Ship To Province = PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND If Ship To Province = YUKON TERRITORY If Ship To Province = ONTARIO If Ship To Province = NUNAVUT TERRITIORIES Value No PST was calculated. The Province in the customer address is case sensitive, please ensure it matches exactly to the Province in the Tax Group.
Tax Code NGST ABPST
Condition Name
Condition Actions
AB
MBPST
MB
BCPST
BC
NTPST
NT
SKPST
SK
QCPST
QC
7.5
PEPST
PE
10
YTPST
YT
ONPST
ON
NT2PST
NT2
4 22
Figure 4 6 Tax Groups Listing, page 5

Tax Group Code Group Name Description Enabled Flag Constraint Name : : : : : HST HST HST Taxable Y HST Group Constraint
Constraint Lines If Ship To Province Not Found Type True False Action Error Message Use This Tax Group Compounding Precedence Tax | Rate | Condition Lines 15 If Ship To Province = NEW BRUNSWICK 15 If Ship To Province = NEWFOUNDLAND If Ship To Province = NOVA SCOTIA Value No HST was calculated. The Province in the customer address is case sensitive, please ensure it matches exactly to the Province in the Tax Group.
Tax Code HSTNB
Condition Name NB
Condition Actions True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code True Use This Tax Code False Do Not Use This Tax Code
HSTNF
NF
HSTNS
NS
15
Step 6
Define Items You can assign the appropriate tax code to each of your inventory items in the Items window. Each item that you enter on an order can also be assigned a default Tax Group. You can also set up a tax code on an override basis for organizations where exceptions are required (for example, pharmaceutical industry or freight items). The tax functionality follows the hierarchy that you defined in step 1, stopping when a tax code is found. See: Items in the Oracle Inventory User Guide and Entering Transactions in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Note: The set up described in this essay assumes that you primarily use tax codes defined at the customer site and the System Options window to handle your tax needs. This essay also assumes that you use items for specific exceptions, as indicated in the paragraph above.
Step 7
Assign Tax Group at Customer Level In addition to assigning a Tax Group to an item, you can optionally assign a default Tax Group at the Customer Site or Customer level. The tax hierarchy defined in step 1 will search for a Tax Group starting at the lowest number, stopping when one is found. An example of where this would be required is when GSTPST is the Tax Group
4 23
defined at the system options level but work is done in the participating provinces where HST is applicable. Therefore, HST would be set at the applicable customer site, so that HST and GSTPST can work interchangeably. See: Assigning a Business Purpose to a Customer Address in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Step 8 Define Tax Exemptions When implementing GST and PST, you would generally assign Tax Group codes to items to exempt customers from tax, rather than creating specific exemptions and then overriding the Tax Group code at order entry time. You may need to fully or partially override a particular GST and/or PST rate for a customer site or item. To do this, you must first create a tax code exemption line with the new tax rate. At the appropriate level, enter the tax code (not the Tax Group code) that you want to override and enter the percentage of change to the effective rate for this level. The item and Tax Group code is exploded into the appropriate GST and PST lines and rates, exemptions are checked for a match to the transaction (based on customer site or item) and then the tax calculations are performed on the derived rates. Note: Tax Exemptions can be used to override specific GST or PST tax codes (not the Tax Group code) as the Tax Engine is preparing to calculate taxes. Tax lines are created by exploding the Tax Group into the one or more applicable tax codes that fall under that Tax Group. Tax exemptions can be set up at the customer site and/or the item levels. Step 9 Define Transaction Types Use the Transaction Types window to ensure calculation of GST and PST on all transaction types. You should enter Yes in the Tax Calculation field for each transaction type that you define to ensure that all complete invoices include GST and PST. Customers and customer sites that are not subject to GST and PST should use transaction types which require the calculation of tax, but should be assigned an exempt tax code. This will ensure a zero value tax line will be created for reporting purposes. See: Transaction Types in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
4 24
If you are implementing Oracle Order Management, use the Define Order Types window to select a Receivables Transaction Type that has the Tax Calculation flag set to Yes. The Enter Orders window will then ensure that all booked orders have a tax code assigned to each order line. Additionally, the Sales Order Acknowledgment Report will display tax rates, tax amounts and tax summaries based on the transaction type you have selected. Step 10 Define Automatic Accounting for Tax Use the Automatic Accounting window to specify how you want Receivables to determine the General Ledger account for GST and PST. Query the segments for the Tax Type to view all of the segments of your Tax Accounting Flexfield. For each segment, assign the value that you want Receivables to use to derive the account. Choose from the following values: Constant Value Salesreps Transaction Types Standard Lines Taxes (the source for this type is the account on the Tax Codes) Suggestion: Assign the value Taxes to the natural Account segment. See: AutoAccounting and Using AutoAccounting in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Step 11 Enable Calculation of GST on Freight To enable the calculation of GST on freight, you should create freight amounts as ordinary invoice lines. This can be done through standard invoice entry (Transaction workbench, Lines window) or through AutoInvoice. Using an inventory item to define freight services enables the AutoAccounting program to distinguish freight lines from ordinary line items. AutoAccounting will then use the accounting rules for the freight account rather than the revenue account to derive the general ledger distribution for the freight service. When an invoice is printed, the freight amounts will be displayed as line items and any GST calculated on the freight will be displayed as tax.
4 25
To convert freight amounts to ordinary invoice lines, navigate to the Items window and use the Freight Item Template to define an inventory item for freight services. Be sure that your inventory item has a valid Tax Group, the appropriate Primary Unit of Measure, and a User Item Type of Freight. You can control the GST rate on freight services through the tax code assigned to the inventory item. Alternatively, you can override the tax code assigned to inventory item by assigning a different tax code to the customersite, which will allow export freight charges to be taxed differently than domestic freight charges (see Step 4, Define Tax Codes and Rates). Note: If you are implementing Oracle Order Management, you should set the user profile options Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue to Yes and Tax: Inventory Item for Freight to Freight. These are described in more detail in the next step. Step 12 Define Tax Profile Options To set your tax profile options, navigate to the Update System Profile Options window using the System Administrator responsibility. The following table lists each tax profile option and provides suggested settings for a Canadian based tax system.
Suggested Setting
Profile Option
Reason
Tax: Allow Manual Tax Lines Tax: Allow Ad Hoc Tax Changes Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions Tax: Allow Override of Tax Code
Yes Yes Yes
Lets you create manual tax lines. Lets you adjust a tax rate at the invoice level. Lets you create unapproved exemptions. Lets you adjust a tax code at the invoice level.
Yes
4 26
Profile Option
Suggested Setting
Reason
Freight
This lets Oracle Order Management identify an inventory item on a transaction line that you import into Receivables via the Receivables Interface program. The inventory item that you identify when defining this profile option must be created with a user type of Freight. After you identify an inventory item for freight, you can use tax codes assigned to this inventory item or item exceptions to control the applicable tax rates and accounting for freight service. Enables freight amounts entered in the Oracle Order Management Ship Confirm window to be passed into Receivables as taxable line items. Used for thirdparty tax hook. Ensures that Receivables does not incorrectly account for a credit memo applied to an invoice that has been partially paid. Used for thirdparty tax extension. Ensures that Receivables does not incorrectly account for a credit memo applied to an invoice that has been partially paid.
Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue *
Yes
Tax: Use Tax Vendor Tax: Calculate Tax on Credit Memos
No Yes
Tax: Use Tax Vendor Tax: Calculate Tax on Credit Memos
No Yes
* This profile option is used only by Oracle Order Management For more information, see: Overview of Receivables Profile Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Note: If a tax account is not assigned to a specific location, Receivables uses the tax account you entered in the System Options window to calculate tax.
4 27
Step 13
Define Canadian Tax Report Set To help you complete your monthly and yearly analysis as well as your Federal and Provincial Tax return, define a Canadian Tax Report set. To do this, navigate to the Concurrent Request Sets window using the System Administrator responsibility, then define a report set that includes the following reports: Tax Register: page 7 20 Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 Tax Exempt Customer Report: page 7 10 Tax Exempt Product Report: page 7 11 You can define your request set to provide default values for some run parameters. Preventing users from modifying most of the report parameters at run time will ensure that the report runs consistently each reporting period.
See Also
Canadian Tax Reporting: page 4 30 Implementing Canadian Sales Tax: page 4 2 Defining Request Sets (Oracle Applications System Administrators Guide)
Verify Tax Setup

Enter an Order (Oracle Order Management) Enter an order in Oracle Order Management. Entering information at the order header sets up the customer, the shipto and the billto address for the order. Moving to the Pricing tabbed region, each item is selected with the quantity, unit of measure and the unit price. The tax code defaults to the first tax code or Tax Group that is found in the search according to the hierarchy you defined in the System Options window. You can override the default tax code or Tax Group. The Tax Total tabbed region displays the value of the total order and the total tax (GST + PST) applied to the order based on the calculation done by the Receivables Tax Engine.
4 28
Additional overrides can be made for each item where the shipto address can be changed for that item. This will trigger a recalculation of the taxes for that item based on the new shipto address and credit check. See: Defining Credit Check Rules and Automatic Credit Checking of Orders in the Oracle Order Management User Guide. Import Orders from Order Management into Receivables Run Receivables Interface to import orders from Order Management into Receivables interface tables, and then run AutoInvoice from Oracle Receivables. AutoInvoice recalculates tax based on the tax calculation and invoice creation setup options that you specified. Note: You can set up Receivables Interface and AutoInvoice to run automatically or you can request them manually (manually is the default). View and Maintain Invoices (Receivables) Verify that you can query, view, and maintain invoices in the Transaction windows. Open the Lines window and verify that all items display as they were created. The Tax field should display the total tax calculated for this invoice. Choose Tax to view information about each tax line. Choose Line Items to view the tax account distribution for a line. Suggestion: To find the invoice number assigned to an order, go to the View Orders and Returns window in Oracle Order Management. Find the order to view, and then choose the View button. Then, navigate to Receivables and query the invoice in the Transaction window as explained above.
4 29
Canadian Tax Reporting

To ensure the collection of Canadian tax, each province and the Federal Government requires periodic tax returns detailing the taxable and tax amounts for every tax authority. These returns must be supported by reports that include all transactions for which Canadian taxes should have been charged. Use the Tax Reconciliation Report and the Tax Register to prepare the Legislative portion of your periodic tax returns. To accommodate tax reporting requirements for each province, you should be able to: Display tax for all taxable transactions Identify taxable and tax amounts for each tax code Prepare periodic tax returns, as required by each province and the Federal Government, from your Receivables and Payables submerged transactions Ensure the tax liability for each tax code is posted to a separate general ledger account or subaccount. The balance of each of these tax liability accounts, or subaccounts, must equal the amount of tax owed on each respective tax code. Ensure all tax transactions have been posted to the appropriate tax liability account and reported correctly Reconcile your tax returns to the tax liability accounts in your general ledger Use the Tax Reconciliation Report to prepare the Legislative portion of your periodic GST and PST returns. This report lists the taxable and tax amounts (by general ledger account) of all your Receivables transactions for a given period to help you identify and review your tax liability for various tax codes. The report parameters Tax Account Low and Tax Account High let you select only tax liability accounts from your general ledger. Only the taxable and tax amounts of a given transaction associated with a particular tax code and general ledger account will be reported within that account. These amounts will be in your functional currency. Note: Receivables lets you assign a unique general ledger account or subaccount for each tax code using the Tax Codes and Rates window. See: Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2.
4 30
Suggestion: Use the Tax Reconciliation Report to assist with preparing your Canadian Tax return. To simplify your Canadian tax return process, you should assign a different tax liability account to each tax code by province and federal levels, enabling the Tax Reconciliation Report to distinctly display the taxable and tax amounts for each tax code. This provides a comprehensive method of verifying that all tax transactions have been posted to the correct provincial/federal tax account. Review your tax transactions by invoice using the Tax Register. You can create manual journal entries to correct your tax liability on discounts, adjustments, miscellaneous cash receipts, and receipt applications. Where applicable, this report shows the total general ledger account activity for each tax account to assist you with your monthly tax reconciliation.
See Also
Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 Tax Register Report: page 7 20 Implementing Canadian Sales Tax: page 4 2
4 31
4 32
CHAPTER
Tax Accounting
his chapter describes how to set up Oracle Receivables to calculate tax on adjustments, discounts, finance charges, and miscellaneous cash and how to implement deferred tax accounting. It also provides accounting examples that show you how Receivables automatically accounts for tax on each type of activity.
Tax Accounting
51
Tax Accounting
You can set up Oracle Receivables to account for tax in a variety of ways. Depending on your setup, Receivables automatically accounts for tax on invoices, credit memos, debit memos, finance charges, earned and unearned discounts, adjustments, cash applications, and miscellaneous transactions. You can also set up Receivables to use deferred tax, an accounting method in which the tax is deferred until payment for goods or services is received, rather than when the transaction is created. You determine how Receivables accounts for tax on adjustments, discounts, finance charges, and miscellaneous transactions by specifying accounting rules for your Receivables Activities and tax accounting information for your tax codes. For each activity, Receivables automatically creates entries in the revenue, expense, and nonrecoverable tax accounts that you define and creates all associated payment schedules. By adjusting your tax accounts with the gross, net, and tax amounts created by these activities, Receivables records tax amounts according to the accounting rules that you define and helps you correctly state your overall tax liability. Whenever you create a transaction or apply and reverse a receipt, Receivables automatically creates the corresponding accounting entries according to the Receivable Activity and tax code that you defined. After defining Receivables Activities and tax codes, no additional data entry is required to calculate tax amounts or create accounting entries for tax reporting and auditing purposes. This section provides detailed examples of how to set up Receivables tax accounting and deferred tax to meet your business needs. Types of Tax Accounts You can define the following types of tax accounts in the Tax Accounting window: Tax: This account records taxes collected from your customers and any legal deductions taken from these amounts. Interim: This account records tax amounts for deferred tax codes. This account records tax liability before payment is received for a transaction. For example, when you create an invoice, Receivables creates an entry in this account for the invoiced tax amount. When you apply payment to the open item, Receivables automatically transfers the amount from the Interim account to the Tax account.
52
Expense/Revenue: Use this account to record net changes generated by adjustments, discounts, and finance charges. Typically, Receivables activities such as discounts and adjustments reduce the receivable amount, so they are considered an expense. Nonrecoverable: This account records changes in the tax collected when the amount cannot be taken as a deduction on taxes paid to the government. You can use this account for Receivables Activities of type Adjustment, Finance Charge, Earned Discount, and Unearned Discount. Definitions Recoverable: Tax amounts that you can claim as a legitimate deduction to reduce your overall tax liability. Gross Amount: The original amount due for a transaction, including any invoice lines and applicable tax amounts. Net Amount: The original amount due for a transaction, not including tax. Tax Amount: The amount of tax due for a transaction. Viewing and Reporting on Tax Accounting Lines The Tax Register and Tax Reconciliation reports display the tax accounting entries that Oracle Receivables creates based on your tax codes and Receivables Activities. You can also view these accounting entries online using the Receivables View Accounting windows listed below: View Adjustment Accounting View Receipt Accounting View Transaction Accounting See: Viewing Accounting Lines in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
See Also
Deferred Tax Accounting: page 5 5 Tax Accounting for Discounts: page 5 13
Tax Accounting
53
Tax Accounting for Miscellaneous Transactions: page 5 18 Tax Accounting for Adjustments and Finance Charges: page 5 22 Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10 Receivables Activities (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Tax Register: page 7 20 Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12
54
Deferred Tax Accounting

If your accounting method is Accrual, you can set up Receivables to record deferred tax. Deferred tax is an accounting method in which the tax on revenue is not due until payment is applied, rather than when the invoice is created. Using this method, an organization can legally defer the tax liability until payment is received for open items, thereby increasing available cash and decreasing current tax liability. To implement deferred tax, set up deferred tax codes and specify both an Interim Tax Account and a Tax Account for each in the Tax Accounting window. When you create a transaction and assign it to a deferred tax code, Receivables records the tax in the Interim Tax Account. When you partially or fully apply a receipt to this transaction, Receivables automatically transfers the tax amount from the Interim Tax Account to the Tax Account so you can correctly state your tax liability. To set up deferred tax codes, see: Tax Accounting: page 6 10.
Attention: If you are upgrading from a previous release of Oracle Receivables, you cannot calculate deferred tax on existing invoices because they might be assigned to tax codes that are not tax deferred. However, you can update your existing tax codes and Receivables Activities as described in this section to use deferred tax accounting for new transactions.
Deferred Tax Accounting Examples

The examples in this section show how Receivables creates tax accounting entries based on how you set up your tax codes and Receivables Activities.
Tax Accounting
55
The examples in this section refer to the following model invoice:

Invoice 102 Amount
Line 1 Line 2 Subtotal Deferred Tax on Line 1 @ 10% Deferred Tax on Line 2 @ 20% Total
600.00 + 400.00 = 1000.00 + 60.00 _ + 80.00 = 1140.00
Receivables creates the following accounting entries when you save this invoice:
Figure 5 1 Deferred Tax Accounting Model Invoice
Example 1 Applying and Reversing a Payment for a Deferred Tax Invoice

Figure 5 2 shows the accounting entries Receivables creates when you enter an invoice with a deferred tax code, apply a partial payment to the invoice, and then reverse the payment.
56
Figure 5 2 Deferred Tax Accounting Applying and then Reversing a Partial Payment
When you create the invoice, Receivables credits the revenue distribution accounts assigned to the invoice, and calculates deferred tax on revenue at $60 on line 1 and $80 on line 2. Receivables records the deferred tax on revenue in the Interim account. When you apply a partial payment, Receivables debits the deferred tax account and transfers the tax amount from the Interim to the Tax account. Note: When you apply a partial payment, Receivables uses an Application Rule Set to allocate the amount to the line, tax, freight, and any finance charges. See: Tax Accounting and Application Rule Sets: page 5 28. When you reverse the payment, Receivables creates offsetting entries for each account and transfers the tax amount from the Tax account back to the Interim account. Figure 5 3 shows the accounting for a single invoice with both accrual and deferred tax codes. This example uses a similar invoice as the one shown in Figure 5 2, but the Revenue @20% line is now taxed with
Tax Accounting
57
two tax codes: the first tax is a 12% deferred tax code and the second is an 8% accrual tax code.
Figure 5 3 Apply and then Reverse a Partial Payment for an Invoice with Deferred and Accrual Tax Codes
Example 2 Adjusting a Deferred Tax Invoice

This example shows an adjustment of $100 to the model invoice. Receivables uses the Receivables Activities you define to determine how to account for tax on adjustments. Note: The examples in this section show tax accounting for a negative adjustment, which decreases the invoice balance due and creates a Credit in the Receivables account and a Debit in each tax account that you specified. When you increase the balance due, either by creating a positive adjustment or by calculating finance charges, the tax engine creates a Debit in the Receivables account and a Credit in each tax account.
58
The Adjustment Receivables Activities in this example have the following settings:
Receivables Activity Option Setting
GL Account Source Tax Code Source Recoverable?
Revenue on Invoice Invoice No (example 1) Yes (example 2)
Note that the Tax Code Source for both Receivables Activities is set to Invoice. In the accounting examples in Figure 5 4, the tax code on the invoice is a deferred tax code, so Receivables creates entries in the Interim tax account as well as the Receivables and Revenue accounts.
Figure 5 4 Deferred Tax Accounting for Adjustments
The Adjustment Receivables Activities in the following example derive the GL accounts from the tax code on the invoice, but have different settings for the Tax Code Source. Additionally, the tax is recoverable in
Tax Accounting
59
the first example but in the second the recoverable flag does not apply because the Tax Code Source is set to None.
Example 1 Receivable Activity Option Setting Example 2 Receivables Activity Option Setting

Tax Code on Invoice Invoice Yes
Tax Code on Invoice None (NA)
Figure 5 5 shows the accounting entries Receivables creates when you create an adjustment for $100 using each of these activities:
Figure 5 5 Deferred Tax Accounting for Adjustments
5 10
Example 3 Gross Adjustments to the Revenue and Receivables Activity Accounts

In this example the Tax Code Source is set to None so Receivables accounts for the gross adjustment amount according to the setting of the GL Account Source. The Adjustment Receivables Activities in this example have the following settings:
GL Account Source Tax Code Source

Revenue on Invoice (example 1) Activity GL Account (example 2) None
Figure 5 6 Accounting for Adjustments Deferred Tax
Tax Accounting
5 11
Setting Up Deferred Tax Accounting

To set up deferred tax accounting, choose the Tax Accounting button in either the Tax Codes and Rates or the Tax Locations and Rates window, check the Deferred check box, and then specify an Interim Tax Account. See: Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10.
See Also
Tax Accounting and Receivables Application Rule Sets: page 5 28 Tax Accounting for Discounts and Miscellaneous Transactions: page 5 13 Tax Accounting for Adjustments and Finance Charges: page 5 22
5 12
Tax Accounting for Discounts

You can set up Receivables to account for the tax included whenever you apply a receipt that includes an earned or unearned discount. You determine how Receivables accounts for tax on discounts by assigning accounting rules to your Receivables Activities and specifying tax accounting information for your tax codes. When you apply a receipt that includes a discount, Receivables uses the activity to determine which general ledger account(s) is affected. When calculating earned and unearned discounts, Receivables checks the Receivables Activity assigned to the receipts Payment Method to determine how to account for tax. If the discount is earned, Receivables uses the Earned Discount activity assigned to the Payment Method; otherwise, it uses the Unearned Discount activity. Discounts use one of the following GL account sources: the tax code on the invoice the revenue account on the invoice the GL account specified for the Receivables Activity See: Calculating Tax on Discounts: page 5 14 and Setting Up Tax Accounting for Discounts: page 5 17. Discounts The amount and type of discount taken when you apply a receipt is determined by the transactions Payment Terms. For example, the Payment Term 2% 10, Net 30 indicates that a customer can take a two percent discount if payment is received within 10 days. After 10 days, the entire balance is due within 30 days of the invoice date with no applicable discount. If the Payment Term allows unearned discounts, your customer can take advantage of the two percent discount when remitting payment after the 10 day discount period. Receivables can account for tax included on discounts for partial payments, if you set up your system to allow them. Receivables also creates all offsetting accounting entries when you reverse a receipt application to ensure that all of your general ledger accounts balance correctly. Note: To allow discounts on partial receipt applications, set the system option Discount on Partial Payment to Yes. To allow discounts on payments received after the discount period has expired, set the system option Allow Unearned Discounts to Yes.
Tax Accounting
5 13
Calculating Tax on Discounts

Receivables uses the following formula to calculate the discount for each revenue account:
Gross Discount Amount x Net Revenue = Amount Gross Invoice Amount Net Discount
Receivables uses the following formula to calculate tax on discounts:

Gross Discount Amount x Tax Amount = Gross Invoice Amount Tax on Discount
After calculating these amounts, Receivables prorates the net discount over the expense accounts that you defined and allocates the tax on the discount to the tax distributions specified by the invoice. Note: The formulas and accounting described here are true when you apply full payment to an open debit item. When you apply a partial payment, Receivables uses an Application Rule Set to allocate the amount to the line, tax, freight, and any finance charges. See: Tax Accounting and Application Rule Sets: page 5 28. For example, you have the following invoice:
Invoice 101 Amount
Line 1 Line 2 Subtotal Tax on Line 1 @ 10% Tax on Line 2 @ 20% Total
600.00 + 400.00 = 1000.00 + 60.00 + 80.00 = 1140.00
Your Earned Discount Receivables Activity has the following settings:
5 14
Receivables Activity Option
Setting

Tax Code on Invoice Invoice Yes
When you save Invoice 101 and then apply payment within the discount period, Receivables creates the following accounting entries:
Figure 5 7 Accounting for Discounts
The formulas shown in Calculating Tax on Discounts: page 5 14 produce the following values for the two invoice lines: Net Discount = 87.72 Tax on Discount = 12.28 Then, using the Receivables Activity for earned discounts, Receivables prorates the $100 discount over the Net Expense and Tax account specified by the invoice tax code, as shown in Figure 5 7. Calculations 87.72 x (600/1000) = 52.63 (line 1)
Tax Accounting
5 15
87.72 x (400/1000) = 35.09 (line 2) 12.28 x (60/140) = 5.26 (prorated tax on line 1) 12.28 x (80/140) = 7.02 (prorated tax on line 2)
Attention: If the receipt is not enough to close the debit item (a partial payment) but the system option Discount on Partial Payment is set to Yes, Receivables creates entries in the same accounts as shown in this example (although the amounts would be different). Additionally, Receivables uses the Application Rule Set assigned to the open debit item to allocate the payment across all charges, including line, tax, freight, and finance charges. See: Tax Accounting and Receivables Application Rule Sets: page 5 28.
5 16
Setting Up Tax Accounting for Discounts

To set up Receivables to account for the tax included on discounts, perform the following steps.
Step Number Description
Step 1 Set Up Tax Accounting for Discounts. Use the Tax
Accounting window to define tax, expense, revenue, and nonrecoverable accounts for your earned and unearned discounts. See: Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10.
Step 2
Define Receivables Activities for Discounts. Define accounting rules for your Receivables Activities to specify how Receivables accounts for tax on earned and unearned discounts. See: Receivables Activities in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Step 3
Assign Receivables Activities to your Payment Methods. Receivables checks the receipt Payment Method to determine the accounting entries to create when you enter and apply receipts. Payment Methods also determine the remittance bank and General Ledger accounts that Receivables uses when you enter and apply receipts (for example, Cash, Unapplied, Unidentified, and Factoring accounts). To set up tax accounting for discounts, assign the earned and unearned discount Receivables Activities that you defined in the previous step to your new Payment Methods. You assign Receivables Activities to Payment Methods in the Remittance Banks window. See: Payment Methods in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
See Also
Discounts (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Assigning Remittance Banks (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
Tax Accounting
5 17
Tax Accounting for Miscellaneous Transactions

You can set up Receivables to account for tax on miscellaneous transactions. In Receivables, miscellaneous transactions are receipts and payments that are not related to a specific invoice. Examples of miscellaneous receipts include a rent payment or interest income. An example of a miscellaneous payment is a payment that you create by entering a receipt for a negative amount. When you create a miscellaneous transaction in Oracle Receivables, you specify a Receivables Activity. Receivables uses the tax accounting rules that you define for the this activity to account for tax on the transaction. To account for tax on your miscellaneous transactions, define at least one Receivables Activity of type Miscellaneous Cash and choose one of the following GL account sources: Activity GL Account Distribution Set If you choose Activity GL Account, Receivables allocates the expense or revenue to the general ledger account that you specify for this Receivables Activity. If you choose Distribution Set, Receivables allocates the expense or revenue to the distribution set that you specify. Additionally, choose a Tax Code Source of Activity Tax Code. This indicates that you want to use the Asset and Liability tax codes specified for this Receivables Activity to account for the tax. If the transaction is a receipt, Receivables uses the Asset Tax Code to account for the tax. If the transaction is a payment (i.e., the receipt is for a negative amount), Receivables uses the Liability Tax Code. You define Receivables Activities in the Receivables Activities window. Note: For information about how Receivables calculates inclusive tax for miscellaneous receipts, see: Tax Inclusive: page 10 26.
5 18
Example 1
In this example, the Miscellaneous Cash Receivables Activity has the following settings:

Activity GL Account Activity
Note: The Recoverable flag does not apply to Receivables Activities of type Miscellaneous Cash. Figure 5 8 shows the accounting entries Receivables creates when you assign this activity to a miscellaneous receipt and a miscellaneous payment:
Figure 5 8 Accounting for Miscellaneous Transactions
Note: You specify a Tax Class of either Input or Output when defining tax codes.
Tax Accounting
5 19
Example 2
In this example, the Miscellaneous Cash Receivables Activity has the following settings:

Distribution Set Activity
Figure 5 9 shows the accounting entries Receivables creates when you assign this activity to a miscellaneous receipt:
Figure 5 9 Accounting for Miscellaneous Transactions
5 20
Setting Up Tax Accounting for Miscellaneous Transactions

To set up Receivables to account for the tax included on miscellaneous transactions, perform the following.
Step 1 Define Receivables Activities for Miscellaneous Transactions.

Define accounting rules for your miscellaneous cash Receivables Activities. Choose an activity type of Miscellaneous Cash, a Tax Code Source of Activity Tax Code, and a GL Account Source of either Activity GL Account or Distribution Set. See: Receivables Activities in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Step 2
Assign Miscellaneous Cash Receivables Activity to your Miscellaneous Transactions. When entering miscellaneous transactions in the Receipts window, specify a Miscellaneous Cash activity in the Misc Transaction tabbed region.
See Also
Entering Miscellaneous Transactions (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
Tax Accounting
5 21
Tax Accounting for Adjustments and Finance Charges

You can optionally set up Receivables to account for tax whenever you create an adjustment or calculate finance charges on outstanding customer balances. Define Receivables Activities of type Finance Charge and Adjustment to account for expense, revenue, and tax amounts generated whenever you calculate finance charges or create adjustments. Receivables Activities determine which general ledger account and tax code to use for finance charges and adjustments and indicate whether the tax amount for these activities can be taken as a legitimate deduction to reduce your overall tax liability. You indicate whether Receivables should calculate finance charges for a customer and how charges are calculated when defining customer profile classes. Specify a number of grace days, the interest rate to use, and a minimum balance per customer and invoice to calculate finance charges on open debit items. Then, when you define dunning letter sets or print statements, indicate whether you want to include finance charges when calculating this customers account balance. For more information, see: Calculating Finance Charges in the Oracle Receivable User Guide. In Oracle Receivables, you create adjustments in the Adjustments window. After specifying the transaction to adjust, enter the Adjustment Receivables Activity that you defined as the Activity Name and specify the type of adjustment you are creating. Receivables uses the information defined for this Receivables Activity to account for the expense, revenue, and tax amounts generated by the adjustment and to determine whether the tax is recoverable.
Attention: To see how Receivables accounts for adjustments that you create for deferred tax invoices, see: Deferred Tax Accounting: page 5 5.
Tax Accounting for Adjustments

This section shows the various ways you can set up your tax codes and Receivables Activities to account for tax on adjustments. The examples in this section show a $100 adjustment to the model invoice and illustrate the accounting entries Receivables creates using different tax code and Receivables Activity definitions. Note: The examples in this section show tax accounting for a negative adjustment, which decreases the invoice balance due and creates a Credit in the Receivables account and a Debit in each tax account that you specified. When you increase the balance due, either by creating a positive adjustment or by
5 22
calculating finance charges, the tax engine creates a Debit in the Receivables account and a Credit in each tax account. All of the examples in this section refer to the following model invoice:
Invoice 102 Amount
Line 1 Line 2 Subtotal Tax on Line 1 @ 10% Tax on Line 2 @ 20% Total
600.00 + 400.00 = 1000.00 + 60.00 + 80.00 = 1140.00
Figure 5 10 shows the accounting entries Receivables creates when you save this invoice:
Figure 5 10 Tax Accounting for Adjustments Model Invoice
Calculating Tax On Adjustments Receivables uses the following formula to calculate tax on adjustments:
Gross Adjustment Amount x Tax Amount = Tax on Adjustment Gross Invoice Amount
After calculating the tax, Receivables prorates the net adjustment and the tax on the adjustment according to your adjustment Receivables Activity. Refer to the examples below for more information.
Tax Accounting
5 23
Example 1
The two Receivables Activities in this example have the same GL Account Source and Tax Code Source, but the recoverable and nonrecoverable flags are different.

Tax Code on Invoice Invoice Yes (example 1) No (example 2)
Figure 5 11 shows the accounting entries Receivables creates when you create an adjustment for $100 and specify one of these activities. In Example 1 the tax is recoverable. In Example 2 the tax is nonrecoverable.
Figure 5 11 Tax Accounting for Adjustments
5 24
Example 2
The Adjustment Receivables Activities in this example have the following settings:
Example 1 Receivable Activity Option Setting Example 2 Receivables Activity Option Setting

Revenue on Invoice Invoice Yes
Revenue on Invoice None (NA)
Tax Accounting
5 25
Example 3
The Adjustment Receivables Activity in this example has the following settings:

Activity GL Account None
Figure 5 13 shows the accounting entries Receivables creates when you create an adjustment for $100 and specify this activity:
5 26
Setting Up Tax Accounting for Adjustments and Finance Charges

To set up Receivables to account for the tax included on adjustments and finance charges, perform the following steps.
Step 1 Define Tax Accounting for Adjustments and Finance
Charges. Use the Tax Accounting window to define an expense, revenue, and nonrecoverable tax account for your adjustment and finance charge activities. See: Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10.
Step 2
Define Receivables Activities for Adjustments and Finance Charges. Define accounting rules for your Receivables Activities to specify how Receivables accounts for tax calculated on your adjustments and finance charges. See: Receivables Activities in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Step 3
Specify a Default Receivables Activity for Finance Charges (optional). When calculating tax on finance charges, Receivables searches for a Receivables Activity first at the customer shipto site, then the billto site, and finally the System Options window, stopping when one is found. Receivables provides a default finance charge activity in the System Options window, but you can enter an activity that you define.
See Also
Tax Accounting for Discounts and Miscellaneous Transactions: page 5 13 Deferred Tax Accounting: page 5 5 Assigning a Business Purpose to a Customer Address (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
Tax Accounting
5 27
Tax System Options (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Calculating Finance Charges (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
Tax Accounting and Receivables Application Rule Sets

If you set up tax accounting on adjustments, discounts, or finance charges, the Receivables Application Rule Set you use affects how Receivables calculates the net and tax amounts for open debit items. Application Rule Sets determine the steps Receivables uses to apply partial payments to open debit items and how discounts affect the balance for each type of associated charges (such as line, tax, freight, and finance charges). You assign Application Rule Sets to transaction types in Oracle Receivables and can optionally specify a default rule set at the system options level. When using tax accounting, Receivables calculates net and tax amounts using the amount due remaining, which is determined by the transactions payment schedule. When you apply a payment using the Prorate All rule set, Receivables applies the amount proportionately to each open item, including lines, tax, freight, and finance charges. This maintains the ratio between the transaction balance and the tax amount due. Other Application Rule Sets, such as Line First Tax After, apply the payment to the open line amount first and then, after the line amount is closed, apply any remaining amount to the associated tax. To decrease the balance due for the tax and line amounts proportionately when implementing tax accounting, assign the Prorate All Application Rule Set to your transaction types and at the system options level in Receivables.
See Also
Receivables Application Rule Sets (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
5 28
CHAPTER
Set Up Tax
his chapter describes how to set up tax in Oracle Receivables, Oracle Order Management, Oracle Sales, and Oracle Web Customers.
Set Up Tax
61
Tax Codes and Rates
Use the Tax Codes and Rates window to enter and maintain your tax codes and their associated tax rates. You can define as many tax codes of type VAT (Value Added Tax) or Sales Tax as you need. You can have only one enabled tax code of type Location for any given date range. This code cannot have a rate associated with it. You can enter a tax code at the customer ShipTo and BillTo business purpose level, as well as at the customer level. You can also assign tax codes to inventory items. If your tax method is VAT, you can include a tax code in the Tax Defaulting Hierarchy in the System Options window. You can specify whether a tax code: is enabled allows tax exemptions lets you modify the tax rate when entering transactions
62
displays line amounts inclusive or exclusive of tax lets you change a tax code from tax inclusive to tax exclusive when entering transactions appears in the list of values in Receivables windows Tax codes that you define appear on your tax reports, in the Tax windows when you enter transactions, and in the Tax Groups window when you define your tax groups. Note: If you have Multi Lingual Support (MLS), you can define tax codes in each of your installed languages. To enter translations, select Translations from the View menu or click on the globe icon. For more information, see: Oracle Applications Concepts or the Oracle Applications User Guide. Prerequisites
Define system options (Oracle Receivables User Guide)

"
To define a tax code: 1. 2. 3. Navigate to the Tax Codes and Rates window. Enter a unique name for this Tax Code. Choose a Tax Type. If you are using location based tax, you can only enter one enabled tax code with tax type of Location Based Tax for a given date range. Receivables displays subtotals by tax type in various tax reports. You can define additional tax types in the Receivables Lookups window. Specify a Taxable Basis to control how Receivables calculates tax on transactions assigned to this tax code. Choose one of the following: After Discount: Calculate tax on the invoice line amount, after any early payment discount is taken. Before Discount: Calculate tax on the invoice line amount, before any early payment discount is taken. Quantity: Calculate tax based on the quantity ordered and unit of measure of the invoice line. If you choose this option, specify a Tax Amount (see step 6). PL/SQL: Calculate tax using the PL/SQL formula that you specify. If you choose this option, go to Step 8. Prior Tax: Select this option if you use this tax code as part of a tax group (to calculate multiple taxes) and you want to calculate
4.
Set Up Tax
63
tax on only the tax for the previous tax line. See: Calculating Tax on Prior Tax in a Tax Group: page 10 31. 5. 6. If the tax type is not Location Based Tax and you specified a taxable Basis of either After Discount or Before Discount, enter a Tax Rate. If the Taxable Basis is Quantity, enter a Tax Amount. For example, you enter a Tax Amount of 2 for this tax code. If you create an invoice line with a quantity of 7 and assign this tax code to it, Receivables calculates tax of $14 for this line. Indicate whether this tax code is positive or negative by setting the Sign parameter to either Cr or Dr, respectively. When you use a tax code with a sign of Dr (negative), Receivables debits your tax account. When you use a tax code with a sign of Cr (positive), Receivables credits your tax account. If the Taxable Basis is PL/SQL, enter the name of a PL/SQL stored procedure in the Formula field. Receivables uses this stored procedure to calculate tax when you assign this tax code to a transaction. See: Available Parameters for PL/SQL Stored Procedures: page 8 30. Open the Effective region, and then enter a range of Effective Dates for this tax rate. The default start date is todays date, but you can change it. If you do not enter an end date, this tax rate will be valid indefinitely.
7.
8.
9.
10. To disable this tax code, uncheck the Enabled box. You can have multiple disabled tax codes for the same date range. 11. Open the Control region, then choose a Tax Class. Choose Output to use this tax code with invoices, debit memos credit memos, adjustments, discounts, finance charges and miscellaneous cash receipts. Choose Input to use this tax code with miscellaneous cash payments (negative receipts). Input tax codes appear only in the list of values for the Liability Tax Code field in the Receivables Activities window; output tax codes appear in all Receivables transaction and set up windows. Note: Receivables also displays subtotal amounts by tax class in various tax reports. Note: To define tax codes for use in Oracle Payables, use the Payables Tax Codes window. See: Tax Codes in the Oracle Payables User Guide. 12. To allow tax exemptions for items using this tax code, check the Allow Exempt box.
64
13. To be able to change the tax rate for this tax code in the Transaction windows, check the Adhoc box. You can only check this box if the tax type is not Location Based Tax. You can update this option after you save this tax code. 14. If you want this tax code to automatically display line amounts including tax, check the Inclusive Tax box. See: Tax Inclusive: page 10 26. 15. If you do not want to be able to change this tax code from inclusive to exclusive (or vice versa) when entering invoices, uncheck the Allow Inclusive Override box. Note: Locationbased tax codes are always tax exclusive and you cannot change them to be tax inclusive. 16. To prevent this tax code from appearing in Receivables windows, uncheck the Displayed box. If this box is not checked, you cannot assign this tax code to individual transactions. Suggestion: If you want to be able to use this tax code only within a tax group, uncheck this box. 17. To update the Tax Account assigned to this tax code, open the More tabbed region. The default account is the Location Tax Account you defined in the System Options window. AutoAccounting uses this value if the AutoAccounting structure for your tax account is derived from the tax code. 18. Enter the Printed Tax Name as you want it to appear on printed transactions. 19. Enter a description for this tax code (optional). Receivables displays this information in countryspecific reports as required. 20. Enter a VAT Transaction Type (optional). This field is used for Spanish and Belgian Tax reporting. For more information, see the Oracle Applications Spanish Globalizations Reference Manual or the Oracle Applications Belgium Globalizations Reference Manual. 21. To define additional tax accounting for this tax code, choose the Tax Accounting button. See: Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10. 22. Save your work.
Set Up Tax
65
See Also
Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10 AutoAccounting (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Reviewing Sales Tax Rates: page 6 12 Tax Groups: page 6 20 Calculating Tax: page 10 2
66
Tax Locations and Rates
Use the Tax Locations and Rates window to enter and update your locations and their associated tax rates. For each location you can define multiple tax rates and postal code ranges, as long as the date and postal code range do not overlap. Receivables uses these locations and tax rates to create authorities and sales tax rates for tax calculations. Receivables also uses locations to validate your customers addresses. Use this window to assign tax accounts to the components of your segment that has a tax account qualifier assigned to it. You assign a tax account qualifier to any one segment of your location flexfield structure using the Key Flexfield Segments window. You can also implement countryspecific validation of foreign customer address information using the Flexible Address Formats feature. For more information, see: Flexible Addresses in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Set Up Tax
67
If you do not want to manually enter or maintain location and tax rates, you can use the Sales Tax Rate Interface program to load this information from an outside tax service. See: Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 11 and Implementing the Tax Vendor Extension: page 8 29. Prerequisites
Define your sales tax location flexfield structure: page 10 38 Assign the tax account qualifier to any one of the segments of your
location flexfield structure in the Define Key Flexfields window (Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide)
"
To define a new or update an existing tax location and its associated tax rate: 1. 2. 3. Navigate to the Tax Locations and Rates window. Choose the type of sales tax structure to define. Choose City, County, or State. If you chose a sales tax structure of County, enter the Given State in which this county is located, then choose Find. If you chose a sales tax structure of City, enter the Given County in which this city is located, then choose Find. If you chose a sales tax structure of State, choose Find. 4. To update an existing location or rate, update the Tax Account, Tax Rate, and range of Effective Dates or Postal Codes for this location, then go to step 10. Note: You can also define additional tax accounting information for adjustments, discounts, or other Receivables activities by choosing the Tax Accounting button. See: Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10. To add a new location, choose New Record from the Edit menu. 5. 6. Enter the Name and Description of this location. If this segment has been assigned to the tax account qualifier, Receivables enters a default Tax Account. This is the account you defined for the Location tax code type in the Tax Codes and Rates window. You can update this information. Enter the Tax Rate percentage to assign to this location (optional). You can enter multiple tax rates for this location as long as the date
7.
68
and postal code range do not overlap. Receivables uses the date and postal code range for each tax rate assignment to determine when this assignment is active for this location. 8. If you are entering city level rate assignments and you include City in your tax location flexfield structure, you can optionally override the sales tax rates for the senior segments (State and/or County) of this structure. To override the sales tax rate for this citys state or county, enter a new rate in the Override Sales Tax Rates popup window. See: Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 38. Attention: You can only use the override feature if you include City in your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure.

9.
Enter a range of Effective Dates for this tax rate. The default start date is todays date, but you can change it. If you do not enter an end date, this tax rate will be valid indefinitely.
10. Enter a range of Postal Codes for this tax rate. Receivables uses the date and postal code range for your locations to determine which tax rate assignments to use when creating your sales tax rates. You can review these compiled sales tax rates in the Review Sales Tax Rates window. 11. Save your work.
See Also
Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10 Reviewing Sales Tax Rates: page 6 12 Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Tax Exemptions: page 6 16 Calculating Tax: page 10 2 Sales Tax Listing: page 7 9 U.S. Sales Tax Report: page 3 33
Set Up Tax
69
Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations

Use the Tax Accounting window to enter additional accounting information about your tax codes and tax locations. You can specify expense, revenue, and nonrecoverable accounts for your adjustment, finance charge, and earned and unearned discount activities. You can also use the Tax Accounting window to set up deferred tax, an accounting method in which tax is due when payment is applied to an invoice, rather than when the invoice is created. If you use tax codes, use the Tax Accounting window to assign tax accounts to your tax codes. If you use locationbased tax, use the Tax Accounting window to assign tax accounts to your tax locations. To record tax on adjustments, discounts, and finance charges, specify an expense or revenue account and a nonrecoverable account. The nonrecoverable account records decreases in the total amount of tax that you collect for activities that the government does not consider a legitimate tax deduction. Suggestion: You can define regular or deferred tax accounting for existing tax codes. To do this, select the tax code to modify, then disable it by entering the current date in the To field. Create a new record, then choose Duplicate Record Above from the Edit menu. Enter a new effective date range then define additional tax accounting for this tax code. To use deferred tax accounting, use the Tax Accounting window to specify an Interim Tax Account. When you create an invoice, Receivables accounts for the liability in the Interim Tax Account. When you apply a payment to the invoice, Receivables automatically transfers the tax liability to the Tax Account.
Attention: If you are upgrading from a previous release of Oracle Receivables, you cannot update the tax accounting for transactions that have a status of complete. Once a transaction is complete, Receivables creates all corresponding accounting entries and does not let you enter a different tax code or modify the existing accounting information.
Prerequisites
Define tax codes and rates: page 6 2 Define your sales tax location flexfield structure (Tax System
Options, Oracle Receivables User Guide)
Define tax locations and rates: page 6 7
6 10
Define Receivables Activities (Oracle Receivables User Guide)

"
To define additional tax accounting for existing tax codes or locations: 1. If you use tax codes, navigate to the Tax Codes and Rates window. If you use locationbased tax, navigate to the Tax Locations and Rates window. 2. 3. Select the tax code or location, then choose the Tax Accounting button. To use deferred tax, check the Deferred box and then enter an Interim Tax Account, or select from the list of values. Warning: Once you save your work, you cannot update the Deferred check box or modify the Interim Tax Account. 4. Enter an Expense/Revenue Account for each Receivables Activity type, including Adjustment, Earned Discount, Unearned Discount, and Finance Charge (optional). If tax is not deductible for an activity type, enter a NonRecoverable Tax Account. The Non Recoverable Tax Account records tax amounts that you cannot claim as a legitimate deduction to decrease your tax liability. Note: You can also calculate and account for tax on Miscellaneous Cash transactions when defining your Receivables Activities. Miscellaneous Cash transactions always use the Tax Account. 6. Save your work.
5.
See Also
Tax Accounting for Discounts : page 5 13 Tax Accounting for Miscellaneous Transactions: page 5 18 Tax Accounting for Adjustments and Finance Charges: page 5 22 Deferred Tax Accounting: page 5 5
Set Up Tax
6 11
Reviewing Sales Tax Rates

Use the Review Sales Tax Rates window to review your existing sales tax rates. Receivables creates these sales tax rates when you enter customer addresses in the Customers window. You can view the locations and associated rates for your customer addresses in the Tax Locations and Rates window. If you have a situation where locations are defined without rates and these locations are included in existing authorities, Receivables also creates sales tax rates when you assign rates to these locations. If you update rates belonging to locations that are already included in an authority, Receivables automatically updates all of the sales tax rates that are associated to this authority. You can review the changes in this window. The number of sales tax rates created for each authority depends upon the postal code and date ranges that you assigned to each location included in your authority. The following example demonstrates the criteria that Receivables uses to create sales tax records for your customer addresses. In this case, you have the following locations and rate assignments defined in Receivables where CA is the state of California, San Mateo is a county within California, and Foster City and Belmont are cities within San Mateo county:
Segment Value CA CA CA San Mateo San Mateo Foster City Belmont
From Zip 96199 85364 90000 00000 00000 94063 94065
To Zip 961999999 899999999 949999999 999999999 999999999 940659999 940699999
Start Date 15JUL90 15JUL90 15JUL90 07JUL88 01JAN91 01JAN91 01JAN90
End Date 31DEC90 31JAN91 31JAN91 31JAN91
Tax Rate 6.25% 6.25% 6.25% 0% 2% 1% 0%
Table 6 1 (Page 1 of 1 Locations and Rates as defined)
6 12
When you enter and save these locations and their rate assignments, Receivables generates the following sales tax rate records:
Authority CA.San Mateo.Foster City CA.San Mateo.Belmont CA.San Mateo.Belmont From Zip 94063 To Zip 940659999 Start Date 01Jan91 End Date 31Jan91 Tax Rate 6.25+2+1
94065 94065
940699999 940699999
15Jul90 01Jan91
31DEC90 31Jan91
6.25+0+0 6.25+2+0
Table 6 2 (Page 1 of 1 Sales Tax Rates for review)
Receivables only calculates sales tax rates for authorities that exist within your home country. For example, if you set up your sales tax system to handle business in the United States but you enter addresses in a foreign country, Receivables does not create locations, authorities, or sales tax records. Prerequisites
Enter customers (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Enter customer addresses (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
"
To review your sales tax rates: 1. 2. Navigate to the Review Sales Tax Rates window. Choose Run from the Query menu.
See Also
Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7 Calculating Tax: page 10 2 Sales Tax Listing: page 7 9 U.S. Sales Tax Report: page 3 33
Set Up Tax
6 13
Tax Authorities
Tax Authorities represent a unique combination of locations and are created manually through the Tax Authorities window or automatically when you enter customer addresses. Receivables uses authorities to expedite sales tax calculations. When you enter a customer address, Receivables first checks if this authority already exists for the appropriate date range. If it exists, Receivables uses the combined sales tax rate associated with this authority to calculate any tax amounts. If the authority does not exist, Receivables first checks if the locations and associated rates exist. If they exist, Receivables creates the authority and all of the sales tax rates. If the locations do not exist, Receivables creates the authority and the locations in the Tax Locations and Rates window. You can also implement country specific validation of foreign customer address information using Flexible Address Formats. See: Flexible Addresses in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. You can disable an existing tax authority either by unchecking the Enabled check box or entering an ending effective date, and then saving your work. Prerequisites
Define tax locations and rates: page 6 7

"
To define a new or review an existing tax authority: 1. 2. Navigate to the Tax Authorities window. If you are reviewing an existing authority, query the authority to view. If you are defining a new authority, enter the Authority location, or select from the list of values. Receivables displays an error message if you enter an authority that already exists. 3. Enter a range of Effective Dates for this authority. The default start date is todays date, but you can change it. If you do not enter an end date, this authority will be active indefinitely. Save your work.
4.
6 14
See Also
Reviewing Sales Tax Rates: page 6 12 Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Entering Customer Addresses (Oracle Receivables User Guide) U.S. Sales Tax Report: page 3 33
Set Up Tax
6 15
Tax Exemptions
Define tax exemptions to fully or partially exempt a customer, item, or range of items from specific tax codes. You can create exemptions against customers or items for either locations or specific tax codes. To use customer exemptions, set the Use Customer Exemptions system option to Yes. To use product exemptions, set the Use Product Exemptions system option to Yes. To exempt customers or products from tax codes with a type of VAT or Sales, set the appropriate Use Tax Code system option to Yes. See: Tax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. To exempt a customer from all taxes, use the Customers window to assign this customer to a tax code with a zero tax rate. To exempt an item from all taxes, use the Items window to assign this item to a tax code with a zero tax rate. See: Items in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. You can only define a tax rate exemption for items that can be entered on an invoice and have a status of Active. In addition, if you create more than one exemption for the same customer, item, tax code, reason,
6 16
or certificate number, the date ranges of these exemptions cannot overlap. You can also use the Tax Exemptions window to update the status of your exemptions. If you need to add an exemption number to an Unapproved exemption created in the Transaction window, you must change the status of this exemption to Expired and recreate the exemption with the number. Prerequisites
Define system options (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Enter customers (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Define items (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Define tax codes and rates: page 6 2
"
To define an exemption for a customer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Navigate to the Tax Exemptions window. Choose to create Exemptions By Customer. Enter the customer Name or Number. To view existing exemptions for this customer or item(s), choose Find. Enter the Locations for which this exemption will be valid (optional). Enter the Site to exempt (optional). Leave this field blank to exempt all of this customers sites or if you want to create a regional exemption using the Location flexfield (see previous step). Define your Exemption. See: Defining an Exemption: page 6 18.
7.
"
To define an exemption for an item: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose to create Exemptions By Customer. Choose to create Exemptions By Item. Enter the Item, or select from the list of values. To view existing exemptions for this item, choose Find. To create a new exemption, choose New Record from the Edit menu. Define your Exemption. See: Defining an Exemption: page 6 18.
Set Up Tax
6 17
"
To define an exemption for a range of items: 1. 2. Choose to create Exemptions By Range. Enter the Category and Category Set to which the range of items belongs (optional). (You use categories to group items with similar characteristics; a category set is a group of categories.) Enter the User Item Type. For example, Finished Good, ATO Model, or Subassembly. Enter the range of Items for this exemption. Define your Exemption. See: Defining an Exemption: page 6 18.
3. 4. 5.
Defining an Exemption
1. Enter the Tax Code from which you are partially or fully exempting this customer or item(s). You can enter exemptions for VAT tax codes, or for location based tax, using your Location tax code. Enter the tax code percentage to exempt. You must enter a percent between 0 and 100. Enter an exemption Number (optional). Enter a Reason for this exemption, or select from the list of values. Enter the range of Effective Dates for this exemption. The default start date is todays date, but you can change it. If you do not enter an end date, this exemption will be valid indefinitely. If an exemption exists for an item, the new exemption you define takes precedence. For example, item A1 has an exemption with no ending effective date. If you define an exemption for this item with an effective start date of January 1, 1996, Receivables sets the existing exemptions end date to December 31, 1995, and creates the new exemption with the effective dates that you specify. 6. Enter a Status for this exemption. Unapproved: Exemptions created automatically during Invoice entry or import are recorded as Unapproved. Exemptions with this status may be changed to any of the statuses listed here. Manual: This exemption has been approved but Receivables will not automatically use it. You have to explicitly use this exemption. Exemptions with this status can only be changed to Primary or Expired.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6 18
Primary: This exemption has been approved and Receivables will automatically calculate tax. Exemptions with this status can only be changed to Manual or Expired. Expired: Discontinue a previously approved exemption. Once discontinued, their status cannot be changed. Rejected: Reject an Unapproved exemption. Once rejected, their status cannot be changed. 7. Save your work.
See Also
Customer Exemption Certificates: page 3 4 Calculating Tax: page 10 2 Tax Rate Exceptions: page 6 26 Tax Exempt Customer Report: page 7 10 Tax Exempt Product Listing: page 7 11
Set Up Tax
6 19
Tax Groups
Use the Tax Groups window to group multiple, conditional taxes under one name. Tax groups allow countries with multiple taxes to automatically calculate each applicable tax within Receivables and Oracle Order Management. For example, Canada has two types of taxes: Goods and Services Tax (GST) and Provincial Sales Tax (PST). GST is a federal sales tax applied for all shipments, and it has one standard tax rate. PST is applied at the provincial level and has a different tax rate for each province. Similarly, India has multiple taxes, both Government and State Sales Tax is applicable, and the state tax rate is controlled by the shipto address. Compound Tax Tax groups support compounded tax rates within the group. Compound tax enables you to calculate multiple taxes for a transaction. To compound tax, specify an order of precedence for each tax code in
6 20
the group. Once set up, Receivables automatically calculates the compounding of multiple taxes within the group when you assign it to a transaction. Tax groups can also contain multiple independent branches of compounded tax. Within each compounding branch, Receivables adds tax to the original amount, so each subsequent tax line within the branch calculates tax on the new taxable amount. Receivables then adds the tax for each compounding branch to determine the total tax amount.
Attention: A compounding branch within a Tax Group can contain either inclusive or exclusive tax codes, but not both. Additionally, only one compounding branch in a Tax Group can have inclusive tax codes. Note: Tax groups consisting of tax inclusive tax codes cannot contain some tax codes with a Taxable Basis of After Discount and some with a Taxable Basis of Before Discount.
For more information, see: Compounding Tax Codes in a Tax Group: page 10 29. Inclusive Tax Inclusive tax codes include the tax for a transaction line in the line amount, rather than displaying these amounts separately. Certain restrictions apply when using inclusive tax codes in compounding branches of a Tax Group. See: Compounding Tax: page 6 20. For more information, see: Tax Inclusive: page 10 26. Note: If you override a tax code, Receivables preserves the override across all updates to the invoice. Similarly, changing the shipto address or the line item could change the default tax code. Condition Sets You can use a Condition Set to indicate that each tax code within the Tax Group is dependent on one or more conditions that you specify. You can also specify an action for each Condition Set. For example: If the shipto country is Canada and the shipto province is Quebec, use this tax code; otherwise, do not use this tax code. Following are the valid options for defining a Condition Set:
Set Up Tax
6 21
Condition Set Options Clause Entity Field Operator Action
Ship From ShipTo BillTo If, And, Or Order Origin Order Acceptance Transaction Item
Country; State; County; Province; City Country; State; County; Province; City Country; State; County; Province; City; Tax Classification Country; State; County; Province; City Country; State; County; Province; City FOB; Type User Item Type
< >, = Error Message < >, = Use This Tax Code < >, = Do Not Use this Tax Code < >, = Default Tax Code < >, = < >, = < >, = System Error
You can use a Condition Set in multiple Tax Groups. Note: If you are upgrading from a previous release of Oracle Receivables, the name of the Condition Set of each tax code in your existing Tax Groups is Upgrade. Exception Sets To automatically change the rate for a tax code within a Tax Group, assign an Exception Set to the tax code. When this tax code is used, Receivables changes the tax rate to the rate specified in the Exception Set. For example, the tax code Standard has a rate of 7%. However, if the billto site is located in New York city, the tax rate must be 9.5%. You create an Exception Set with the following definition and assign it to this tax code: If Billto City = New York, then Apply Exception rate of 9.5%. When the Standard tax code is used and the billto address is New York city, Receivables applies a tax rate of 9.5%; otherwise, Receivables uses the predefined rate of 7%. You can use an Exception Set in multiple Tax Groups. Note: Valid options for defining an Exception Set are the same as for Condition Sets, except:
6 22
the list of available Operators also includes Not Found the list of available Actions also includes Apply Exception and Do Not Apply Exception Group Constraints Assign Group Constraints to a Tax Group to ensure specific conditions are met before using this Tax Group. Receivables checks all Group Constraints when you assign a Tax Group to a transaction. If none of the constraints are found, Receivables uses the Tax Group to calculate tax; otherwise, Receivables performs the action specified (for example, use a default tax code). Following is an example of a Group Constraint: If shipto or shipfrom Province not found, display system error message. You can use a Group Constraint Set in multiple Tax Groups. Note: Valid options for defining a Group Constraints are the same as for Condition Sets, except: the list of available Entities also includes Tax Code the list of available Operators also includes Not Found the list of available Actions are Error Message, Default Tax Code, System Error, and Use This Tax Group Prerequisites
Define tax codes and rates: page 6 2

"
To define a Tax Group: 1. 2. 3. 4. Navigate to the Tax Groups window. Enter the Group Code for this Tax Group. Enter a Group Name for this Tax Group. The default is the Group Code, but you can change it. Enter a range of Effective dates for this Tax Group. The default start date is the current date, but you can change it. If you do not enter an end date, this Tax Group will be active indefinitely. Enter a Description of this Tax Group (optional). Choose Output to use this Tax Group with invoices, debit memos credit memos, adjustments, discounts, finance charges and
5. 6.
Set Up Tax
6 23
miscellaneous cash. Choose Input to use this Tax Group in Oracle Payables. 7. 8. To disable this Tax Group, uncheck the Enabled box. Enter a Tax Code or select one from the list of values. You can only select tax codes with effective dates that are within the effective dates for this Tax Group. For example, if the effective date for your Tax Group is from 01JAN97, you cannot enter a tax code with a start date before 01JAN97, even if the tax code has no end date. Receivables places this restriction because an end date could be added to the tax code later to make it inactive, thereby making it invalid within the Tax Group. To limit the dates in which this tax code will be active within this Tax Group, enter an End Date. The default Start Date is todays date, but you can change it. If you do not enter an end date, this tax code will remain active within this Tax Group until you specify an end date or uncheck the Enabled box.
9.
10. To specify conditions for using this tax code, choose a Condition Set or choose New to define a new Condition Set. To always use this tax code, do not specify a Condition Set. See: Condition Sets: page 6 21. 11. To specify a rate exception for this tax code, choose an Exception Set or choose New to define a new Exception Set. See: Exception Sets: page 6 22.
Attention: The Tax Code, Tax Rate, Tax Amount, Sign, Formula, and Inclusive Tax fields are for display only. You define these values in the Tax Codes and Rates window.
12. Enter a Compounding Precedence number (optional). This number indicates the order in which Receivables selects tax codes when compounding taxes in a Tax Group. 13. Repeat steps 8 through 12 for each tax code to add to this Tax Group. 14. To specify a Group Constraint for this Tax Group, choose an existing Group Constraint, or choose New to define a new one. See: Group Constraints: page 6 23. 15. Save your work. Note: If this Tax Group has no Condition Set, Receivables validates the Tax Group definition when you save your work. If this Tax Group has a Condition Set, Receivables does not validate the Tax Group definition until you assign it to a transaction. See: Condition Sets: page 6 21.
6 24
Suggestion: After setting up your Tax Groups, run the Tax Code and Tax Group Listing reports to ensure they are defined correctly.
See Also
Calculating Tax: page 10 2 Implementing Canadian Sales Tax: page 4 2 Tax Inclusive: page 10 26
Set Up Tax
6 25
Tax Rate Exceptions

Use the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window to assign special tax rates to products that you ship to specific authorities. You can only define a tax rate exception for items that can be entered on an invoice and have a status of Active. Item tax rate exceptions apply only to location based tax. Therefore, to use tax rate exceptions, your Location Flexfield Structure must be State.County.City. To use the exceptions that you define in this window, ensure that the system option Use Item Tax Rate Exceptions is set to Yes. Prerequisites
Define items (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Define tax codes and rates: page 6 2 Define tax rate exception reason lookups (Oracle Receivables User
Guide)
Define tax authorities: page 6 14

"
To define a tax rate exception: 1. 2. 3. Navigate to the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window. Choose to create an Exception By Item or Range. If you chose exceptions by Item, enter the Item to exempt or select from the list of values. If you chose exceptions by Range, enter the Category Set, User Item Type, and a range of Items. 4. 5. To query existing exceptions for this item or range, choose Find. Enter the range of Effective Dates for this exception. The default start date is todays date, but you can change it. If you do not enter an end date, this exception will be valid indefinitely. Enter the authority Location for which you want to define a tax exception for this item or range of items. You can choose to selectively enter values for the different segments in the authority. For example, to enter a tax exception for the entire state of California, you would enter a value for California in the state segment, and leave all the child segments blank. To enter the exception for a particular county within California, enter the state and county values, but leave the city segment blank. (This assumes
6.
6 26
that you are using statecountycity as your location flexfield structure.) Note that you cannot leave a segment blank if its child segment has a value assigned to it. For example, if you have assigned a value to city, its parent segments county and state must have values assigned to them. You cannot update the location flexfield for an exception once the exception has been used within Receivables. 7. Enter the Tax Rates for each location in your authority. You can choose to leave the tax rates blank for one or more locations of your authority if you do not wish to override that locations default tax rate. For example, if your state is California and you do not wish to override Californias default tax rate, leave the state tax rate blank. You cannot update the tax rate flexfield for an exception once the exception has been used within Receivables. 8. Choose a Reason for creating this tax exception. You can define tax exception reasons in the Receivables Lookups window by specifying the lookup type Tax Rate Exception Reason. See: Defining and Updating Receivables Lookups in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Save your work.
9.
See Also
Calculating Tax: page 10 2 Tax Exemptions: page 6 16 Tax Exceptions Listing: page 10 2
Set Up Tax
6 27
CHAPTER
General Tax Reports

his chapter describes the reports you can use to review all taxrelated information in your application, regardless of your tax method.
General Tax Reports
71
Overview of Receivables Tax Reports

Receivables provides the following reports to help you review your tax information and determine your overall tax liability. Tax Listing Reports You can print all of your tax listing reports from either the Print Listing Reports or the Submit Requests window. Receivables provides the following tax listing reports: Sales Tax Listing: page 7 9 Tax Code Listing: page 7 4 Tax Group Listing: page 7 6 Tax Exceptions Listing: page 7 11 Tax Exempt Customer Report: page 7 10 Tax Exempt Product Report: page 7 11 TaxOnly: Open Invoices Report: page 7 8 Sales Tax Reports You can print all of your sales tax reports from either the Submit Requests screen or the Print Other Reports window. Receivables provides the following sales tax reports: Tax Received Report: page 7 7 US Sales Tax Report: page 3 33 Tax Reports You can print all of your tax reports from the Submit Requests window. Receivables provides the following tax reports: Customers with Invoices at 0 and no VAT Registration Number: page 2 32 VAT Exception Report: page 2 34 Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 Tax Register Report: page 7 20
72
Sales Tax Rate Interface Report If you import your sales tax rate and location data using the Sales Tax Interface, Receivables automatically generates the Tax Interface Report: page 8 16. This report shows you what information was imported into Receivables. You run the Sales Tax Rate Interface from the Run Tax Rate Interface window. See: Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 11 and Running the Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 13.
See Also
CountrySpecific Documentation Country Specific VAT Reporting: page 2 2 Movement Statistics Report (Oracle Inventory User Guide)
General Tax Reports
73
Tax Code Listing

Use this report to review the tax codes that you defined in the Tax Codes and Rates window. This report lists the tax rate, tax type (VAT, Sales Tax, or Location), effectivity dates, control flags, taxable basis, and the tax accounts defined for each tax code. There are no parameters for this report.
Figure 7 1 Tax Code Listing
Vision Operations (USA) Tax Code Listing Report Date: 1999/05/25 09:02:09 Page: Tax Class: Output Allow Exempt Printed Tax Code Name Description Type Start Date End Date Ad Hoc ! ! Tax Incl Over ride ! ! Taxable Basis Incl. Tax Rate/ Qty Amount PL/SQL Formula 1
HSTNB Sales 01041997 No No
Yes Yes
Before Early Pay 15
Tax Account : 0100025253004000 OpeBalance SheeCanadian (GST) New BrunswickNo Product
HSTNF
Sales
01041997
No
No
Yes
Yes
Before Early Pay
15
Tax Account : 0100025253005000 OpeBalance SheeCanadian (GST) NewfoundlandNo Product
HSTNS
Sales
01041997
No
No
Yes
Yes
Before Early Pay
15
Tax Account : 0100025253007000 OpeBalance SheeCanadian (GST) Nova ScotiaNo Product
Internation
Non Ta 01111992
No
Yes
No
No
Before Early Pay
Tax Account : 0100013350000000 OpeBalance SheeExempt VATNo Sub AccountNo Product
KSALES
Sales
19031999
Yes
No
No
No
Before Early Pay
10
Tax Account : 0100025200000000 OpeBalance SheeState Sales andNo Sub AccountNo Product
Loc1
Sales
01011990
No
No
No
No
Before Early Pay
Tax Account : 0100025200000000 OpeBalance SheeState Sales andNo Sub AccountNo Product
74
Figure 7 2 Tax Code Listing

Vision Operations (USA) Tax Code Listing Report Date: 1999/05/25 09:02:09 Page: Tax Class: Output Allow Exempt Printed Tax Code Name Description Type Start Date End Date Ad Hoc ! ! Tax Incl Over ride ! ! Taxable Basis Incl. Tax Rate/ Qty Amount PL/SQL Formula 2
Location Locati 01111992 Yes Yes
No No
Before Early Pay
Tax Account : 0100025250000000 OpeBalance SheeCanadian (GST) No Sub AccountNo Product Adjustment : 0113025200000000
MBPST
Sales
01011990
No
No
No
Yes
Before Early Pay
Tax Account : 0100025253003000 OpeBalance SheeCanadian (GST) ManitobaNo Product
NBPST
Sales
01011990 31031997 No
No
No
Yes
Before Early Pay
11
Tax Account : 0100025253004000 OpeBalance SheeCanadian (GST) New BrunswickNo Product
NFPST
Sales
01011990 31031997 No
No
No
Yes
Before Early Pay
12
Tax Account : 0100025253005000 OpeBalance SheeCanadian (GST) NewfoundlandNo Product
NSPST
Sales
01011990 31031997 No
No
No
Yes
Before Early Pay
11
Tax Account : 0100025203007000 OpeBalance SheeState Sales andNova ScotiaNo Product
See Also
Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Defining Tax Accounting for Tax Codes and Locations: page 6 10 Tax Group Listing: page 7 6
General Tax Reports
75
Tax Group Listing

Use this report to review tax groups that you defined in the Tax Groups window. This report lists the Group Constraint name and effectivity dates for each tax group, as well as detailed information for each tax code in the group. The report lists the effectivity dates, Condition Set, compounding precedence, and Exception Set for each tax code and shows you the definition of each Condition Set in the group. There are no parameters for this report. Note: To see an example of the Tax Group Listing, refer to Figure 4 2 in: Setup Steps for Canadian Tax: page 4 9.
See Also
Tax Groups: page 6 20 Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Tax Code Listing: page 7 4
76
Tax Received Report

Use this report to review the amount of taxes you received for each taxable debit item. The Tax Received report automatically sorts by tax code and lets you see how much tax you received for the GL date range that you specify or for a specific tax code. Note: This report displays the Amount Received in the currency of the transaction.
Report Parameters
Receivables provides the following reporting options: Order By: Receivables uses state to order your report information. State: Select and print your report information from the state range you specify. GL Date: Select and print your report information from the debit item GL date range you specify.
Report Headings
Report headings provide general information about the contents of your report or listing such as your set of books name, report title, date and time you run your report and page number. Order By: Receivables prints State as your order by option. Currency: Receivables prints the currency above all debit items belonging to this currency. Receivables creates separate pages for debit items with different currencies. GL Date From (Date) To (Date): Receivables prints the debit item general ledger date range (if you entered one).
Row Headings
Row headings give you descriptions of the contents of each row within your report or listing. City Subtotal: Receivables prints the line, tax, amount received and tax received subtotals for each city. County Subtotal: Receivables prints the line, tax, amount received and tax received subtotals for each county.
General Tax Reports
77
Invoice Grand Total: Receivables prints the line, tax, amount received and tax received totals for all debit items on this report.
Column Headings
Amount Received: The total of the lines and tax amount for this transaction. The report shows this amount in the same currency as the transaction. Lines Amount: The total line amount for this transaction. Tax Amount: The total tax amount for this transaction. Tax Received: The total amount of tax received for this transaction.
Taxonly: Open Invoices Report

Use this report to review invoices where all amounts have been paid or credited except the tax amount. These are invoices where the tax amount may be in dispute. Use this report to highlight potential problems.
Report Parameters
Receivables provides the following reporting options: Order By: Select the option to use to sort your information from the following: Customer Name Invoice Date Invoice Number Currency Code: Select and print report information from the currency code you specify. Invoice Date: Select and print report information from the invoice date range you specify.
Report Headings
Report headings provide general information about your report or listing such as your set of books name, report title, date and time you run your report and page number.
78
Currency: The currency above all invoices belonging to this currency Invoice Date From (Date) to (Date): The invoice date range (if you entered one).
Column Headings
Column Headings describe specific columns in your report or listing. Customer Name: The customer name for this invoice. Invoice Date: The invoice date. This is typically the date you create the invoice. Days Overdue: The number of days the uncollected tax amount is past due. Original Amount: The original tax charges for this invoice. Amount Outstanding: The unpaid amount of tax for this invoice.
Row Headings
Row headings give you descriptions of the contents of each row within your report or listing. Amount Outstanding Grand Total: The total outstanding tax amount for the invoices on this report.
Sales Tax Listing

Use this report to review all home country locations that were ever used and the sales tax rates for these locations. The report lists each location, the postal code range covered by the location, the tax rates, the period for which the rates are valid, and the accounting flexfield associated with the sales tax. See: Reviewing Sales Tax Rates: page 6 12.
See Also
US Sales Tax Report: page 3 33
General Tax Reports
79
Tax Exempt Customer Report

Use this report to review customers with a tax exemption. Full tax exemptions are assigned in the Tax Exemptions window. For each exemption, Receivables lists the customer name, customer number, location code, site, tax code, the percentage of the customers debt that is exempt, reason code for the exemption, the date range when it is active, and the exemption status. See: Tax Exemptions: page 6 16.
Report Parameters
When you request this report, Receivables provides the following reporting options: Order By: This report orders your information in the following manner: 1. Tax Code 2. Exemption Status 2.1 Primary Certificates 2.2 Manual Certificates 2.3 Unapproved 2.4 Expired 2.5 Rejected 3. Customer or Location 4. Start Date 5. Exemption Certificate Select the option you want Receivables to use to sort your information in the third level. Customer Choose this option if you want Receivables to automatically sort and print your customer tax exemptions information by customer. Choose this option if you want Receivables to automatically sort and print your customer tax exemption information by location.
Location
Exemption Status: The status of the exemptions to include in this report. If you do not select a status, Receivables includes all exemptions. Valid options include Expired, Manual, Primary, Rejected, and Unapproved.
7 10
Company Name: The company name range to include in this report. Tax Code: The tax code range to include in this report. Creation Date: A date range to limit the customers included in this report to those whose tax exempt creation date falls within the range.
Tax Exempt Product Report

Use this report to review the inventory items with tax exemptions. You assign exemptions to items in the Tax Exemptions window. For each item with an exemption, Receivables lists the item name, tax code assigned to the item, percent of the item that is exempt, exemption number, reason code, and the date range when the exemption is active. See: Tax Exemptions: page 6 16.
Tax Exceptions Listing

Use this report to review a list of all item tax exceptions you defined in the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window. Item tax exceptions are tax rates that you assign to an inventory item that is shipped to a specific shipping address. Receivables displays tax rates that were originally assigned to the Location Flexfield as well as the tax exception rates. See: Tax Rate Exceptions: page 6 26.
General Tax Reports
7 11
Tax Reconciliation Report

Figure 7 3
Set of Books 2 (Release 10) Output Tax Reconciliation Report Posting Status: Posted GL Date: 01MAY1995 To 30JUN1995 Detail Level: Show Summary and all Transactions Include: Accruals Adjustments Discounts Miscellaneous Cash Payments Application Date: Due Date VAT Account From: 00.000.5600.000.000.000 To: 99.999.5603.999.999.999 VAT Account: 01.500.5600.000.000.000 Sporting Goods.None.Output VAT Standard.None.None.None Transaction Number Class Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice cm30001 Credit Mem Invoice Invoice cm30002 Credit Mem Invoice 1789 Invoice Ad Invoice 1782 Invoice Ad 1785 Invoice Ad 1786 Invoice Ad cm30003 Credit Mem 1801 Invoice Ad 1784 Invoice Ad Invoice Invoice Invoice 1790 Invoice Ad Invoice 310031 Credit Mem 1787 Invoice Ad 1788 Invoice Ad cm30004 Credit Mem Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Total Invoice Number 1161 1162 1163 30001 30001 31001 30002 30002 32001 31002 31002 32002 33001 33001 30003 32002 32002 30003 32002 33001 31003 31003 31003 34001 34001 30004 30004 32003 33002 34001 33003 34002 34003 VAT Taxable Manual GL Date Amount Posted Unposted Discount Adjustment Cash 02JUN95 650.00 131.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 02JUN95 650.00 131.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 02JUN95 650.00 131.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 05JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 05JUN95 (5,000.00) (1,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 05JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 06JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 06JUN95 (5,000.00) (1,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 06JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 08JUN95 (10,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 (2,000.00) 0.00 08JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 09JUN95 (5,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 (2,000.00) 0.00 09JUN95 (5,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 (2,000.00) 0.00 09JUN95 (2,500.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 09JUN95 (5,000.00) (1,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 09JUN95 (2,500.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 09JUN95 (1,500.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 09JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 09JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 09JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 11JUN95 (6,500.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 (1,300.00) 0.00 11JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 11JUN95 (3,500.00) (700.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 12JUN95 (5,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 (1,000.00) 0.00 12JUN95 (2,500.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 (500.00) 0.00 12JUN95 (5,000.00) (1,000.00) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 12JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 12JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 12JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 12JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 15JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 15JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 18JUN95 10,000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 97,950.00 27,694.50 0.00 0.00 (8,800.00) 0.00 Report Date: Page: 26JUN95 08:55 3
Totals for 01.500.5600.000.000.000 Sporting Goods.None.Output VAT Standard.None.None.None Taxable VAT General Ledger Class Amount Posted Unposted Manual Total Activity Invoice 161,950.00 32,394.50 0.00 0.00 32,394.50 Credit Memo (23,500.00) (4,700.00) 0.00 0.00 (4,700.00) Invoice Adjustments (40,500.00) 0.00 0.00 (8,800.00) (8,800.00) Total 97,950.00 27,694.50 0.00 (8,800.00) 18,894.50 (27,694.50)
To ensure the collection of tax, each country requires periodic tax returns detailing the taxable and tax amounts for every tax code with point of supply within your registration. These returns must be supported by reports that include all transactions for which tax should have been charged. To accommodate each countrys tax reporting requirements, you should be able to: Display tax for all taxable transactions. Identify taxable and tax amounts for each rate and transaction class. Prepare periodic tax returns (as required by each country) from your receivables and payables subledger transactions.
7 12
Ensure the tax liability for each tax code is posted to a separate general ledger account or subaccount. The activity for each of these tax liability accounts, or subaccounts, must equal the amount of output tax on each respective tax code. Ensure all tax transactions have been posted to the appropriate tax liability account and reported correctly. Reconcile your tax returns to the tax liability accounts in your general ledger. Report tax transactions on both an accrual calculation basis and a cash calculation basis. View both posted and unposted tax amounts to recognize your overall tax liability. Report on deferred tax and all taxable transactions for which tax accounting is defined. Taxable transactions include adjustments, discounts, finance charges, and miscellaneous receipts. Report across multiple organizations or legal entities (if using the multiple organization support feature). Use the Tax Reconciliation Report to prepare the Output Tax portion of your periodic tax returns. This report lists the taxable and tax amounts, by tax account, of all your Receivables transactions for a given period to enable you to identify and review your tax liability for various tax codes. The Tax Account Low and Tax Account High parameters enable you to select only tax liability accounts from your general ledger. Suggestion: To calculate the Input Tax for your tax return, refer to the Accounts Payable Tax section in the Oracle Payables User Guide. Only the taxable and tax amounts of a given transaction associated with a particular tax code and general ledger account will be reported within that account. If you post multiple taxes per invoice line, the taxable amount will be multiplied by the number of taxes you post. Note: Receivables lets you assign a unique general ledger account or subaccount for each tax code using the Tax Codes and Rates window. See: Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2. Additionally, the Tax Reconciliation Report provides you with all of the transaction detail from the Receivables subledger to enable you to reconcile the Output Tax portion of your tax returns to the general ledger.
General Tax Reports
7 13
Warning: This report will only be accurate and allow you to reconcile transactions to your general ledger if you have not created any adjustments of type Line, Invoice, or Freight. The Tax Reconciliation Report only includes adjustments of type Invoice and Charges when you set the Include Adjustments parameter to Yes. See the Report Parameters section below for more information.
Report Parameters
Within Receivables you can submit the Tax Reconciliation Report from the Submit Requests window. The parameters for the Tax Reconciliation Report should be set to include all tax transactions posted to your tax liability accounts for the accounting period you plan to review. Suggestion: Define a Tax Reconciliation Report Set that includes the following reports to assist you in compiling the Output portion of your tax return: Tax Reconciliation Report Tax Exempt Customer Report Tax Exempt Product Listing Tax Register Report Reporting Level: Enter the reporting level for this report. Choose Set Of Books, Legal Entity, or Operating Unit. If you use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Operating Unit. If you do not use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Set Of Books. Note: The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines the top reporting level for your responsibility. Reporting Context: If you entered Set of Books for the Reporting Level, the default is the set of books associated with your responsibility. If you entered Legal Entity for the Reporting Level, select a legal entity from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which legal entities appear in the list of values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any legal entity that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose only the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. If you entered Operating Unit for the Reporting Level parameter, select an operating unit from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which operating units appear in the list of
7 14
values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any operating unit that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose any operating unit within the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. If the profile option is set to Operating Unit, you can select only the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. Note: The profile option MO: Operating Unit determines the operating unit for your responsibility. GL Date Low/High: Enter the GL Date range for the period you wish to review. The default values are the start and end dates of the most recent accounting period. The general ledger activity of the tax account is displayed if the GL Date range selected corresponds to a valid accounting period and no transaction date range is entered. Transaction Date Low/High: The Transaction Date Range should be set to null. Otherwise, if the transaction date and GL date for a given transaction fall in different periods, your report will not balance to the general ledger for the requested GL Date Range. Tax Account Low/High: Select the general ledger account range to review. Suggestion: When defining your chart of accounts you should group your accrual basis tax accounts together and your cash basis tax accounts together. You can then use the distinct account ranges to define unique report sets for each type of tax basis. Include Accruals: Choose whether to report on accrual transactions from the receivables subledger, which include the following transaction classes: Invoices Debit Memos Credit Memos Include Adjustments: Choose whether to report on adjustments of type Invoice, Charges, Line, and Tax. Include Discounts: Choose whether to report on Earned and Unearned Discounts. Include Miscellaneous Cash: Choose whether to report on Miscellaneous Cash Receipts (including bank charges). Include Receipts: Choose whether to report on cash receipts (including bank charges).
General Tax Reports
7 15
Posting Status: You can report on posted, unposted or all transactions. When you report on posted transactions only, the Unposted column will always display zero, while the Posted column will display zero when reporting on unposted transactions. Detail Level: To include all transaction detail, accept the default value Show Summary and all Detail. To display only transaction summary information, choose Show Summary Only. Payment Date: If you choose to include receipts required in cash basis reporting of tax, you can control which date is used to report the receipt. Choose either the GL Date of the cash application or the Maturity Date of the cash receipt. Selecting Maturity Date is appropriate when utilizing Bills of exchange as it could mature several weeks after the application. Show Ship To Address: Choose how you want to print this customers ship to address on the report. Choose City, County, Country, Province, State, or None.
Column Headings
The Tax Reconciliation Report is ordered by the Company segment of the accounting flexfield, the natural account segment of the accounting flexfield, the accounting flexfield, the general ledger date, the invoice number, the transaction class and the transaction number. All amounts are displayed in functional currency and the transactions are totaled by general ledger account. See the Detail Section below for the contents of each column.
Detail Section
Batch Source: The batch source of this transaction. Transaction Number: This column displays the transaction number of the applied transaction and relates to the following transactions: Adjustments Credit Memos Debit Memos Discounts Invoices Miscellaneous Cash On Account Credit Memos
7 16
Receipt Applications Document Name/Number: The document sequence name and number of this transaction. Transaction Class: For example: Adjustment Credit Memo Earned and Unearned Discounts Debit Memo Finance Charges Invoice Miscellaneous Cash Receipt Application Related Transaction: This column displays the transaction number of any related transaction. For example, a credit memo, adjustment, or (for earned and unearned discounts) receipt number. GL Date: The GL date for this transaction. Ship to: The shipto address for this transaction, as specified in the Show Ship to Address parameter. For example, if you specified State, the report prints the state portion of the shipto address. Taxable Amount: This column reports on the taxable amount of the transaction related to the current general ledger account. If a transaction posts tax to multiple general ledger accounts, because the transaction includes multiple tax codes, the sum of the taxable amounts from each general ledger account will equal the total taxable amount for the transaction. Warning: Any invoice line that posts multiple taxes (each with its own tax code) will display the full value of the taxable amount of the invoice line once for each general ledger account associated with the tax code. The duplication of taxable amounts will cause the report to overstate your total taxable amount for the period. To avoid this, ensure that each tax code posts to a distinct tax account. Posted Tax: This column displays tax amounts posted to the general ledger. Unposted Tax: This column displays tax amounts not yet posted to the general ledger.
General Tax Reports
7 17
Summary Section
The summary section of this report contains the following information. Transaction Class: This column displays a summary of the transaction classes displayed in the detail section of the report. The report displays transaction classes in the following order: Invoice, Credit Memo and Debit Memo Earned Discount Unearned Discount Miscellaneous Cash Adjustment Cash Application Taxable Amount: This column shows a summary of the Taxable Amount column from the detail section per transaction class. Posted Tax: This column shows a summary of the Posted Tax column from the detail section per transaction class. Unposted Tax: This column shows a summary of the Unposted Tax column from the detail section per transaction class. At the end of the reporting period, you should not have any unposted transactions. Total Tax: This column displays the sum of the Posted and Unposted columns. This value represents your Output Tax for the reporting period and tax code as defined by the selected date range and Tax account parameters. General Ledger Activity: The General Ledger Activity of the tax account is displayed if the GL Date Range selected corresponds to a valid accounting period in General Ledger and no transaction date range is entered. The value reported in this column is the net of all general ledger activity posted to this account for the given period. You can use this value to compare the Total Tax by account with your General Ledger. The Total Tax for each account should equal the general ledger activity for the corresponding account. To review the details of the general ledger activity you should run the Account Analysis Report from Oracle General Ledger. Please refer to the Account Analysis Report in the Oracle General Ledger User Guide. Warning: If you revalue the foreign currency transactions for your tax accounts within the general ledger, the general ledger account activity shown will no longer balance to the subledger transactions in the detail section of this report. The functional
7 18
amounts reported by the subledger for the transaction detail will be shown using the original exchange rate of the transaction, not the exchange rate used to revalue the general ledger account.
Row Headings
Tax Account: The report groups all transactions by general ledger account. This row displays the general ledger account and description with the totals for each column within the account. Each account should map to a single tax code.
See Also
Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6 VAT Exception Report: page 2 34 Customers with Invoices at 0 and no VAT Registration Number: page 2 32 Tax Register Report: page 7 20
General Tax Reports
7 19
Tax Register Report

Figure 7 4
Science Research Institute Currency: USD Order By: Customer Name Tax code: Golf Invoice Adjustment Number Type Number B8347345 Invo Totals for tax code: Golf Gross Lines Amount Exempt Amount Taxable Amount Tax Amount 34,900.00 34,900.00 0.00 1,745.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 34,900.00 34,900.00 0.00 1,745.00 Tax Register GL Date: From 01JAN1994 To 31MAY1994 Invoice Date: From 01APR1993 To 01APR1995 Invoice Date 24MAY94 Report Date: Page: 28JUN94 10:35 1 of 10
Customer Invoice Lines Name Number Location Exempt Reason Amount Tax Amount Golfshot Corpor 1061 SHIP_TO 34,900.00 1,745.00 34,900.00 1,745.00
Invoices Credit Memos Adjustments Nets VAT Code: VAT Exempt Invoice Adjustment Number Type Number G902834 Invo Totals for VAT Code: Invoice Date 20MAY94
Customer Invoice Lines Name Number Location Exempt Reason Amount Tax Amount Golfshot Corpor 1061 SHIP_TO 6,000.00 0.00 6,000.00 0.00 Gross Lines Amount Exempt Amount Taxable Amount Tax Amount 6,000.00 6,000.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 6,000.00 6,000.00 0.00 0.00 Total Tax for Currency: USD 1745.00
VAT Exempt
Use the Tax Register report to review your tax liability. This report groups total tax amounts by tax type, tax class, and company. This report includes deferred tax accounting information and all transactions for which tax accounting is defined. You can define tax accounting for adjustments, discounts, finance charges, and miscellaneous receipts. See: Tax Accounting: page 5 2. If you use the multiple organization support feature (multiorg), you can also view information across multiple organizations or legal entities.
Report Parameters
Receivables provides the following reporting options: Reporting Level: Enter the reporting level for this report. Choose Set Of Books, Legal Entity, or Operating Unit. If you use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Operating Unit. If you do not use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Set Of Books. Note: The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines the top reporting level for your responsibility.
7 20
Reporting Context: If you entered Set of Books for the Reporting Level, the default is the set of books associated with your responsibility. If you entered Legal Entity for the Reporting Level, select a legal entity from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which legal entities appear in the list of values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any legal entity that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose only the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. If you entered Operating Unit for the Reporting Level parameter, select an operating unit from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which operating units appear in the list of values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any operating unit that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose any operating unit within the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. If the profile option is set to Operating Unit, you can select only the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. Note: The profile option MO: Operating Unit determines the operating unit for your responsibility. Register Type: Choose the tax account information to view for the tax code(s) specified. For example: Interim Tax Register: Choose this option to view amounts recorded in the Interim Tax Account you defined for each deferred tax code. When you close a receivable, the tax engine transfers amounts from the Interim Tax Account to the Tax Account. This activity appears as negative lines on the Interim Tax Register and as positive lines on the Tax Register. Tax Register: Choose this option to create a tax liability report that includes tax amounts accrued on the invoice and deferred tax collected. These amounts are recorded in the Tax Account defined for each tax code. Non Recoverable Tax Register: Choose this option to show amounts recorded in the Non Recoverable tax accounts you defined for each Receivables Activity. Use this register to view writeoff transactions that did not reduce your overall tax liability. For more information, see: Tax Accounting: page 5 2. Order By: Select the option you want Receivables to use to sort your information from the following:
General Tax Reports
7 21
Customer Name Customer Number Exempt Reason Invoice Date Invoice Number Transaction Type Summarization: Select the level of detail to use for your report: Exclude Lines: Show only transaction header level details. Show All Detail: Show header and line level details. For example: line number and amount; tax line number; tax rate; amount of each tax line; exemption number and reason). Show Complete Invoice: Show all tax codes for each invoice line separately (for example, an invoice line with multiple tax lines). GL Date Low/High: Select and print tax information for the GL date range you specify. The default values are the start and end dates for the most recent accounting period. Transaction Date Low/High: Select and print tax information for transaction dates in the range you specify. The default low and high values of the invoice date range is All. Tax Code Low/High: Select and print tax information for the tax code range you specify. If you leave this field blank, the report includes all tax codes and groups tax lines for transactions with multiple tax lines together. Currency Low/High: Select and print tax information for the Currency range you specify. The default low and high values of your currency range is All. Posting Status: You can report on Posted, Unposted, or All transactions. Show Functional Amounts: Choose whether to display report values in your functional currency or in the entered currency. If you choose No (i.e. show amounts in the entered currency), the report groups the transactions by currency code and provides a row heading to display the currency for each set of transactions. If you choose Yes, the report will show the functional amount of each transaction, using the exchange rate of the transaction. Warning: If you revalue the foreign currency transactions for your tax accounts within the general ledger, the general ledger
7 22
account activity shown will no longer balance to the subledger transactions in the detail section of this report. The functional amounts reported by the subledger for the transaction detail will be shown using the original exchange rate of the transaction, not the exchange rate used to revalue the general ledger account.
See Also
Tax Code Listing: page 7 4 Tax Reconciliation Report: page 7 12 VAT Exception Report: page 2 34 Customers with Invoices at 0 VAT and no VAT Registration Number: page 2 32
General Tax Reports
7 23
Financial Tax Register

Use the Financial Tax Register to view the output from the Tax Reporting Ledger using Reports Exchange and Application Desktop Integrator (ADI). Using these products you can change the layout of the report, publish the report in different formats, and export the data to a tab delimited or HTML file. The Tax Reporting Ledger consists of accounting information created in Oracle Receivables, Oracle Payables, and Oracle General Ledger. The Financial Tax Register uses this data to generate Tax Register reports using the RXi reporting tool. The following tax registers are available: Tax Register Interim Tax Register Nonrecoverable Tax Register The following summary levels are available within each Tax Register: Transaction Header Transaction Line Accounting Line You can submit this report from Receivables from the Requests window by selecting the concurrent program Financial Tax Register Report. The Financial Tax Register has two predefined layouts, but you can customize the output using attribute sets. The following attribute sets are available: DEFAULT Tax Register ATTRSET2 Tax Register with Tax Recovery Use DEFAULT to report on Receivables and General Ledger transactions. If you use this set to report on Oracle Payables or all products, the report will not include amounts for Recoverable and Non Recoverable tax. Use ATTRSET2 to report on Payables transactions. If you use this set to report on Oracle Receivables, Oracle General Ledger, or all products, the report will not include amounts for Recoverable and Non Recoverable tax Suggestion: To maintain RXi attribute sets in Oracle Receivables or Oracle Payables, navigate to Setup>Tax>Tax Reporting Ledger and copy the default attribute set for the
7 24
Financial Tax Register. For more information, refer to the Oracle Financials RXi Reports Administration User Guide. To see an example of these attribute sets, see: Attribute Sets: page 7 28.
Report Parameters
Matrix Report: Use matrix reporting to group tax amounts on a single line. You can use matrix reporting if you entered a Summary Level of either Transaction Level or Transaction Line Level. Use matrix reporting when you have transactions with: Two or more output taxes One or more input taxes, with a split between recoverable and nonrecoverable amounts The report always groups data by tax code. If you choose a Summary Level of Transaction Level and an item with 10 transaction lines (each with the same tax code) is included, the report shows just one record in the extract. However, if the invoice has two different tax codes, the report shows two different records in the extract. Use the Transaction Line Level report to show Item Line details including Inventory Item, Quantity, and optionally the Natural Accounts of the Taxable/Tax postings. For Input Tax reports, choose Transaction Line Level. The Item and Quantity information is taken from the matched purchase order if it is available. If the matched purchase order is not available, the report leaves these fields blank. Reporting Level: Enter the reporting level for this report. Choose Set Of Books, Legal Entity, or Operating Unit. If you use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Operating Unit. If you do not use Multiple Organization Support, the default is Set Of Books. Note: The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines the top reporting level for your responsibility. Reporting Context: If you entered Set of Books for the Reporting Level, the default is the set of books associated with your responsibility. If you entered Legal Entity for the Reporting Level, select a legal entity from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which legal entities appear in the list of values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any legal entity that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose only the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility.
General Tax Reports
7 25
If you entered Operating Unit for the Reporting Level parameter, select an operating unit from the list of values. The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines which operating units appear in the list of values. If this profile option is set to Set of Books, you can choose any operating unit that posts to your set of books. If the profile option is set to Legal Entity, you can choose any operating unit within the legal entity associated with the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. If the profile option is set to Operating Unit, you can select only the operating unit assigned to your responsibility. Note: The profile option MO: Operating Unit determines the operating unit for your responsibility. Register Type: Enter the type of register to create. Tax Register: Choose this option to see the transactions in the Collected Tax account(s) for the tax code(s). Interim Tax Register: Choose this option to see the transactions in the Interim Tax account(s) specified for the tax code(s). Nonrecoverable Tax Register: Choose this option to see the transactions in the Nonrecoverable Tax account(s). The tax on a transaction can be posted to an Interim Tax or Nonrecoverable account specified for that tax code or Recovery Rule. Interim Taxes are only applicable for transactions created in Oracle Receivables. Nonrecoverable taxes are applicable to both Payables and Receivables. A single transaction can also post tax into a combination of these accounts. When you choose the register type, you can view the transactions posted into any one of these three accounts defined for the Tax Code(s) selected. For more information, see: Tax Reporting Ledger: page 9 2. Tax Class: Specify which taxed transactions to include. Values include Input, Output, or All. The default value is Input for Payables responsibilities, Output for Receivables Responsibilities, and All for submissions from General Ledger. Summary Level: Select the level of detail for the report. Choose Transaction Level, Transaction Line Level, or Transaction Distribution Level. Product: Choose to include transactions for a specific Oracle Applications product. The default values are AR when submitted from Oracle Receivables, AP when submitted from Oracle Payables, and ALL when submitted from Oracle General Ledger.
7 26
GL Date Low/High: Enter the range of GL dates for which you want to report. The default values for GL Date Low and High parameters are the start and end dates of the most recent accounting period. Transaction Date Low/High: Select the transaction date range for the period to review. The transaction dates for each class of transaction is defined as follows: For invoices, credit memos, debit memos, and adjustments, the date of the transaction. For discounts and receipt applications, the application date of the associated cash receipt. For Miscellaneous Cash transactions, the date of the receipt. Tax Code: The range of tax codes to include in the report. Currency Code Low/High: Select the range of currencies to include in the report. Transactions in currencies other than those within the range you select will not be included. If Show Functional Amounts is Yes, this parameter shows only the functional currency for this set of books. The list of values is only enabled when Show Functional Amounts is set to No. Posting Status: You can report on Posted, Unposted, or All transactions. AR Exemption Status: To include only transactions that reference a specific exemption, enter an exemption status. This parameter applies only to Receivables transactions. Transaction Number: To include a specific transaction, enter a transaction number. The list of values for this field depends on the Transaction Class you entered. Transaction Class: To include only transactions with a specific class, enter a transaction class. For example, choose Invoice, Credit Memo, or Payment. VAT Transaction Type Low/High: Enter a range of VAT transaction types to include in the report, or select from the list of values. Tax Type Low/High: Enter a range of Tax Types of the tax code range.
See Also
Tax Reporting Ledger: page 9 2
General Tax Reports
7 27
Oracle Financials RXi Reports Administration User Guide
Attribute Sets
The two predefined attribute sets you can use with the Financial Tax Register are shown below. Use DEFAULT to report on Receivables and General Ledger transactions. Use ATTRSET2 to report on Payables transactions. To maintain RXi attribute sets in Oracle Receivables or Oracle Payables, navigate to Setup>Tax>Tax Reporting Ledger and copy the default attribute set for the Financial Tax Register.
Tax Register Layout[132 Char] (DEFAULT Attribute Set)
Vision Operations (USA) Financial Tax Register
29SEP1999 18:12:13 Page 1
Reporting Level: Set of Books Reporting Context: Vision Operations Register Type: Tax Register Tax Class: Output Summary Level: Transaction Level Product: Oracle Receivables GL Date Low: 01AUG1999 GL Date High: 31AUG1999 Transaction Date Low: Transaction Date High: Tax Code Low: Tax Code High: Currency Code Low: Currency Code High: Posting Status: All AR Exemption Status: Transaction Number: Transaction Class: Tax Type Low: Tax Type High: Matrix Report: No
Functional Currency: USD Company: 01 Tax Class: Output Tax Code: 10% Tax Transaction Transaction Number Class APR282 Invoice APR283 Invoice d789 Invoice i22 Invoice i23 Invoice DC114 Invoice DC118 Invoice DCCP114 Invoice DCCP115 Credit Memo kminv345 Invoice Totals for Company
Related Transaction
22t67
Transaction Date 06MAY1999 06MAY1999 06MAY1999 06MAY1999 06MAY1999 02May1999 02May1999 02May1999 02May1999 11May1999
Billing Partner Name Business World 1 Business World 1 American Telephon AT&T Universal Ca AT&T Universal Ca AT&T Universal Ca Computer Service AT&T Universal Ca AT&T Universal Ca American Telephon
Registration Number 11111 33333 88888 999999 999999 999999 123987 999999 999999 888888
Taxable Amount Tax Amount 100.00 10.00 100.00 10.00 100.00 10.00 6,600.00 660.00 7,700.00 770.00 22,000.00 2,200.00 22,000.00 2,200.00 22,000.00 2,200.00 <2,000.00> <200.00> 1,000.00 100.00 81,600.00 8,160.00
Figure 7 5 DEFAULT Attribute Set
7 28
Tax Register with Tax Recovery Layout [132 Char] (ATTRSET2 Attribute Set )
Vision Operations (USA)
Financial Tax Register
29SEP1999 17:15:56 Page 1 / 1
Reporting Level: Set of Books Reporting Context: Vision Operations Register Type: Tax Register Tax Class: Input Summary Level: Transaction Level Product: Oracle Payables GL Date Low: 01SEP1999 GL Date High: 31DEC2001 Transaction Date Low: Transaction Date High: Tax Code Low: Tax Code High: Currency Code Low: Currency Code High: Posting Status: ALL AR Exemption Status: Transaction Number: Transaction Class: Tax Type Low: Tax Type High: Matrix Report: No Functional Currency: USD Company: 01 Tax Class: Input Tax Code: 10% Tax Transaction Related Class Transaction Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice
Transaction Number fpsep0802 kksep0801 fpsep0802 kksep0801 0811jay02 kksep0801 fpsep0802 kminv05201 kminv05201 OmarW20 OmarW21
Transaction Date 08SEP1999 08SEP1999 08SEP1999 08SEP1999 11AUG1999 08SEP1999 08SEP1999 20MAY1999 20MAY1999 19MAY1999 19MAY1999
Billing Partner Name American Telepho American Telepho American Telepho American Telepho Jay Supplier American Telepho American Telepho GE Capital GE Capital Advanced Network Advanced Network
Registration Number
Taxable Amount 100.00 300.00 100.00 300.00 45.00 300.00 100.00 200.00 400.00
Recoverable Tax Amount
Non Recoverable Tax Amount 10.00 10.00 10.00 30.00 4.50 30.00 10.00
20.00
10.00 20.00
10.00 20.00 6.00 4.00
FR123456789 FR123456789
60.00 40.00 1,945.00 50 .00
Totals for Company
144.50
Figure 7 6 ATTRSET2 Attribute Set
General Tax Reports
7 29
See Also
Oracle Financials RXi Reports Administration User Guide
7 30
CHAPTER
Open Interfaces
his chapter describes the Sales Tax Rate Interface you can use to load sales tax records into your application from a feeder system. It also provides information about the Tax Vendor Extension, which lets you integrate external tax calculation programs with Oracle Applications.
Open Interfaces
81
Importing Address Validation Data and Sales Tax Rates

The Sales Tax Rate Interface lets you load sales tax records into your application from your sales tax feeder system. You can use the Sales Tax Rate Interface program to load new locations and tax rates from an interface area into Receivables. This program lets you load one or more tax rates for the same location which cover different date ranges and postal codes. The records that you load into Receivables through the Sales Tax Rate Interface program update your existing sales tax rates with the most current tax rates for each location. You can then use this new tax information to create invoices manually, import invoices into Receivables using the AutoInvoice program, and validate new customer addresses that you enter. Note: Oracle Order Management also uses the Sales Tax Rate Interface. Adjust Tax Rate Dates The Sales Tax Rate Interface program can adjust the active date range of existing tax rates as new tax rates are loaded into Receivables. Load Multiple Tax Locations and Rates The Sales Tax Rate Interface program allows you to load all of your locations and tax rates into Receivables at one time rather than enter each one manually. You can also load rates for sales tax rate overrides. You can immediately use this new tax information to create invoices manually, import invoices into Receivables using the AutoInvoice program, and validate new customer addresses that you enter. Maintain Up to Date Tax Rate Information Use the Sales Tax Rate Interface program to ensure that you have the most current sales tax information in Receivables. You can submit this program periodically to update your existing tax rates with the most recent changes.
See Also
Overview of the Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 4
82
Preparing to Load Sales Tax Rates: page 8 5 Importing Data From Your Feeder System: page 8 7 Sales Tax Rate Interface Validation: page 8 9 Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 11 Running the Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 13 Tax Interface Report: page 8 16 Sales Tax Rate Date Adjustments: page 8 19 Action Codes of the Sales Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 22 Sales Tax Rate Interface Program Updates of AR_TAX_INTERFACE Table: page 8 25
Open Interfaces
83
Overview of Sales Tax Rate Interface

The following diagram shows how customer information is imported into the Receivables tax tables. You should only use this program to load locations and tax rates for the country you specified as your Default Country in the System Options window.
Figure 8 1 Sales Tax Rate Interface
For more information about the validation that Sales Tax Rate Interface performs on each column of the AR_TAX_INTERFACE table, see: Sales Tax Rate Interface Validation: page 8 9.
See Also
Preparing to Load Sales Tax Rates: page 8 5
84
Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 11
Preparing to Load Sales Tax Rates

To ensure that the Sales Tax Rate Interface works correctly, you should complete the following steps before loading sales tax records into Receivables: Verify the Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure Perform Backup of Sales Tax Information Clear Tax Interface Table Verify and Define Tax Table Storage Parameters Verify the Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure When you use the Tax Interface program for the first time, navigate to the Key Flexfields window and verify that your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure is frozen and compatible with the location and tax rate data that you will be loading into Receivables. You only need to perform this step once. Perform Backup of Sales Tax Information Before you load sales tax data into Receivables, you should perform a backup of your location and tax rate information. This information is stored in the following tables: AR_LOCATION_VALUES AR_LOCATION_RATES AR_LOCATION_COMBINATIONS AR_SALES_TAX You need to perform this step every time you execute the Sales Tax Rate Interface program. Clear Tax Interface Table Verify that the AR_TAX_INTERFACE table does not contain any records. The SQL loader control scripts aravp.ctl and arvertex.ctl will clear all existing tax rate information before loading a new set of locations and rates. You can either rely upon these scripts to clear
Open Interfaces
85
existing records or truncate the table AR_TAX_INTERFACE manually using the TRUNCATE command. Note: You cannot rollback a TRUNCATE statement. You need to perform this step every time you execute the Sales Tax Rate Interface program. Verify and Define Tax Table Storage Parameters Verify that the AR_LOCATION_VALUES and AR_LOCATION_RATES tables into which you will load locations and tax rates have sufficient allocations of space. If you are loading sales tax data for the entire United States, then your database administrator must allocate the following amount of space for Receivables tax interface, tax locations, and tax rates tables. You need to perform this step every time you execute the Sales Tax Rate Interface program. Table AR_TAX_INTERFACE AR_LOCATION_VALUES AR_LOCATION_RATES TOTAL: Data Storage 8 Megabytes 7 Megabytes 10 Megabytes 25 Megabytes Index Storage 11 Megabytes 8 Megabytes 5 Megabytes 24 Megabytes
Table 8 1 Tax Storage Parameters (Table 1 of 1)
A submission of sales tax information which includes every state, county, and city in the United States will load approximately 60, 000 records into the AR_TAX_INTERFACE table. If you enter customer addresses which use every state, county, and city within the United States, Receivables creates sales tax rates to handle each of these distinct addresses. Receivables uses the table AR_LOCATION_COMBINATIONS to store each unique authority, and the table AR_SALES_TAX to store the composite sales tax rates that it generates for these authorities. In this case, your database will require the following storage space for these tables in addition to the storage requirements listed previously.
86
Table AR_LOCATION_ COMBINATIONS AR_SALES_TAX TOTAL:
Data Storage 7 Megabytes 8 Megabytes 15 Megabytes
Index Storage 6 Megabytes 5 Megabytes 11 Megabytes
Table 8 2 Authority and Sales Tax Rates Storage Parameters (Table 1 of 1)
See Also
Importing Data From Your Feeder System: page 8 7 Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 11
Importing Data From Your Feeder System

After you finish preparing to run the Sales Tax Rate Interface program, use a SQL*Loader script to transfer sales tax records from your sales tax feeder system into the tax interface table. Receivables provides two SQL*Loader scripts arvertex.ctl and aravp.ctl as model files for loading your sales tax data into the tax interface table from your feeder system. These scripts are designed for the State.County.City Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure and must be modified if you are using a different structure. The scripts reside in your ar/bin directory. Note: These SQL*Loader control files upload current sales tax rate data only. If you need to upload historical sales tax data, you will have to customize the supplied scripts. Additionally, you should check with your Tax Vendor to ensure that they can supply you with historic sales tax rates. The SQL*Loader scripts support several sales tax features. You can use these scripts to define sales tax locations and tax rates for each of the segments in the structure. These scripts support and will upload the following:
Open Interfaces
87
multiple tax rates for a single tax location that have different effectivity dates and multiple zip code ranges common names (these are used, for example, for cities, and areas within cities) rates for sales tax rate overrides
Truncated City Names

Receivables tax windows and the list of values support up to 60 characters for each location. Your tax feeder system may support a smaller number of characters. For example, if you have a State, County and City name of Arizona, Havasupai, Havasupai Indian Reservation, and your Sales Tax feeder system only supports 25 characters for each name, the city named Havasupai Indian Reservation is truncated to Havasupai Indian Reservat. You must update any truncated city names in the Tax Locations and Rates window to reflect the correct names. See: Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7.
See Also
Running the Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 13 Sales Tax Rate Interface Validation: page 8 9
88
Sales Tax Rate Interface Validation

By understanding the data in the AR_TAX_INTERFACE table, you can identify the underlying causes of invalid tax interface data. If the Sales Tax Rate Interface program identifies a record in the interface table that has invalid data, then the program will not pass this record into Receivables location and tax rate tables. Each location that you load into the tax interface table must have a unique location ID associated with it. This unique location ID enables the Sales Tax Rate Interface program to distinguish between different locations even if the same name appears more than once in your tax data. All locations which are junior to other locations must identify their parent through the parent location ID. The Sales Tax Rate Interface program will only load a tax record into Receivables if it has a parent, unless it is a senior location. In the example below, each location has a unique location ID. This location ID is composed of a unique identifier for the junior location, prefixed with the location ID of the parent of this location. To identify their parents, the county of Los Angeles has the location ID of California as its parent location ID, and the city of Los Angeles has the location ID of Los Angeles county as its parent location ID. Record Number
1 2 3 4 5 4
Location ID
11 1101 110102 110103 1104 110405
Parent Location ID
Location Value
California
Location Qualifier
State County City City County City
11 1101
Los Angeles Los Angeles Santa Monica
11 1104
Orange County Santa Ana
Table 8 3 Location and Parent Location IDs (Table 1 of 1)
Note: The Sales Tax program will not load Record 4 into Receivables because this record does not have a parent location ID and its qualifier indicates that this is not a senior location. If a tax record that you load into the tax interface table from your sales tax feeder system includes a location without rates, then the Sales Tax Rate Interface program will load this location information. You must assign tax rates to this location manually using the Tax Locations and Rates window in Receivables.
Open Interfaces
89
If the tax record that you load into the interface table has a tax account segment, Receivables will automatically default the tax account defined in the Tax Codes and Rates window for the tax code of type Location as the tax account for this segment. The tax account will be populated in the AR_LOCATION_VALUES.TAX_ACCOUNT_CCID. If no tax code of type Location has been defined, Receivables will use the Tax Location Account defined in the System Options window as the default tax account for this segment. Each location that you pass into the tax interface table must have an appropriate segment qualifier value. You assign a segment qualifier to each segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. For example, if you are loading in the city of Los Angeles, then this location must have a segment qualifier of CITY. The Sales Tax Rate Interface program will not load tax records into Receivables that do not have a segment qualifier. Each record in the tax interface table must have a value for the CHANGE_FLAG column. This value indicates to the Sales Tax Rate Interface program whether a record is different from the most recent listing of this tax data. If this column is N, then the Sales Tax Rate Interface program assumes this record is unchanged. If it is Y, then the program assumes that this record is different from the most recent listing. You can use this column to submit the Sales Tax Rate Interface program only for tax data that has been changed since the last submission. This could reduce the time it takes to upload your Sales Tax data. The Sales Tax Rate Interface program assigns Action Codes to each row of the Sales Tax Rate Interface table based on the results of the validation it performed for that row.
See Also
Sales Tax Rate Interface Program Updates of AR_TAX_INTERFACE Table: page 8 25
8 10
Using Sales Tax Rate Interface

Running Sales Tax Rate Interface You must invoke the Sales Tax Rate Interface program from the Run Tax Rate Interface window to transfer sales tax records from the Receivables tax interface table into the Receivables tax location and tax rate tables. Report Submission Parameters Parameter Review or Upload Possible Values Load All Data in Tax Interface Load Changed Data Only in Tax Interface Table Review Tax Interface Data Print Format Print All Detail Print Summary Only Print Warnings in Detail Senior Location Enter a value from the first segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure containing the sales tax rates you want to upload or review. For example, if your structure is State.County.City then you would enter the State that contained the rates you want to upload or review. If you leave this parameter null, all values are included.
Table 8 4 Sales Tax Rate Interface Submission Parameters (Table 1 of 1)
Review or Upload If you enter Load All Data in Tax Interface for the Review or Upload parameter, the Sales Tax Rate Interface program loads all tax data from the tax interface table into the location and tax rates tables. If you enter Load Changed Data Only in Tax Interface Table for this parameter, the program only loads tax rows from the tax interface table
Open Interfaces
8 11
that are different from the most recent data your sales tax feeder system supplied. This is the default value. Suggestion: When uploading data, choose the default value, Load Changed Data only in Tax Interface Table. The Load All Data in Tax Interface option is similar to the default, but it also generates diagnostic information and will therefore require more system resources than the Load Changed Data Only option. If you enter Review Tax Interface Data for this parameter, the program prints the Tax Interface report without actually performing the upload to the location and tax rate tables. Use this to review the tax data in the tax interface table before or after you have submitted the Sales Tax Rate Interface program. If you use this method after invoking the Sales Tax Rate Interface program, the Tax Interface report shows the action that it performed on each row of the tax data in the tax interface table. Choose Review Tax Interface Data to review the tax rates of a particular location in the interface table before loading the records. In this case, choose Print All Detail as your Print Format parameter value, and specify the senior location for which you want to review tax rates. You can then use SQL*Plus to update the tax rates for this location if they are not what you require. Print Format If you enter Print Summary Only as your Print Format parameter, the Tax Interface report includes a summary of the actions that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has performed on the tax data uploaded from the tax interface table. This summary includes each action code that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program used for the upload, the action codes description, and the number of rows on which the program executed each action. These action codes are described in detail later in the Action Codes section of this essay. If you enter Print Warnings in Detail as your Print Format parameter, the Tax Interface report includes a summarized section that lists the programs actions, and a detailed section that lists lines from the tax interface table that the program identified with a warning action code. This is the default value. If you enter Print All Detail as your Print Format parameter, the Tax Interface report includes a summarized section that lists the programs actions, and a detailed section that lists each line that the program loaded and the action that was identified for it.
8 12
State If you do not enter a value for the State parameter, the Sales Tax Rate Interface program lets you upload or review tax rows in the tax interface table for all states. Use the list of values to select a specific state as your senior location value to upload or review only the tax rows for a specific location. If you are using one of the predefined Sales Tax Location Flexfield structures, the first segment of that structure will be your senior location.
See Also
Running the Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 13 Tax Interface Report: page 8 16
Running the Tax Rate Interface Program

Run the Tax Rate Interface program to upload new tax authorities and sales tax rates into the Receivables tax tables. When you enter and update your location segment values and rate assignments using the Tax Rate Interface program, Receivables creates new compiled images of the sales tax rates for each unique overlapping combination of the location segment values that your customer shipto addresses include. Receivables uses the postal ranges and start and end dates that you specify for each tax authoritys rate assignments to create these sales tax rate records. Receivables does not create a compiled sales tax rate record until you either enter a customer shipto address that uses your tax authority location values and their associated rate assignments, or you update the actual location segment values and their rate assignments. You can update these location segment values and their assignments through the sales tax interface program or by creating manual entries in the Tax Location Values window. After the program has uploaded all of its records into your system, Receivables deletes these rows from the interface table. Upon completion, this program generates a report listing all of the new rates for each taxing authority that the external tax vendors tape loader system has brought into Receivables.
Open Interfaces
8 13
Suggestion: If you have existing tax locations and rates with narrow zip code ranges, use the Tax Locations and Rates window to delete the existing rate assignments before you run Sales Tax Rate Interface. You submit the Tax Rate Interface program from the Run Tax Rate Interface window. You can view your completed submission of the Tax Rate Interface program as well as its status from the Concurrent Requests Summary window. Note: You should not load sales tax information through the Tax Interface if it is for a foreign location. You can run any report or report set that your system administrator includes for your responsibilitys request security group, as well as any report set that you create using the Define Report Set window. Note: It is possible that a report set in your request security group could contain individual reports that are not in your request security group. You can run these reports as part of that report set, but you cannot run them as individual reports. For more information, see: Defining a Request Security Group in the System Administrators Guide. Prerequisites
Prepare to Load Sales Tax Rates: page 8 5 Import Data From Your Feeder System: page 8 7
"
To run the Tax Rate Interface: 1. 2. 3. Navigate to the Run Tax Rate Interface window. Enter a request Name of Sales Tax Rate Interface. Enter parameters for submitting the program. Review or Upload: Choose to upload the tax data or print a report for review by selecting one of the following options: Load All Data in Tax Interface Table; Load Changed Data only in Tax Interface Table; Review Tax Interface Data. Print Format: Select a printing format from the following: Print all Detail; Print Summary Only; Print Warnings in Detail. State: Select a specific location as your state value to upload or review only the tax rows for a specific location (optional). If you do not enter a location, Receivables will include all states.
8 14
Note: For more information about these options, see: Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 11. 4. 5. Choose OK. To print the results of this submission, enter Print Options. Enter the number of Copies to print, a printing Style, and the Printer to use. Note: If you do not specify Run Options or Printer Options, Receivables uses either the optional default values defined for this report or, if the report has no default values, the values defined in your profile options. 6. 7. To save the output to a file, check the Save Output check box. Choose Submit. Receivables displays a concurrent Request ID for this submission and generates the Tax Interface Report: page 8 16.
See Also
Sales Tax Rate Date Adjustments: page 8 19 Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 11 Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7 Defining Receivables System Options (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
Open Interfaces
8 15
Tax Interface Report

Figure 8 2 Tax Interface Report
Senior Segment: CA For Request: All Printing Option:Print Warnings in Detail Action: Review Tax Interface Data Summary for California Action Code ALREADYEXISTS IGNORE INSERT NEWLOCATIONINSERT Location Number Line 1 178421 2 178618 Action Description Number of Rows Tax Rate Already Exists 1 Ignored 1 New Tax Rate for Existing Location 231 New Location Created, Tax Rate information Defined 2608 Warnings for California Value From Zip To Zip Start Date End Date Tax Rate Action SOUTH LAKE TAHOE 96150 96150 0.00 IGNORE WHITEHORN 95589 95589 0.00 ALREADYEXISTS Tax Interface Report STATE: CA California Date: 17AUG1993 12:15 Page: 1
Qualifier CITY CITY
Locations and Rates Defined for Warnings Location Number Location From Zip To Zip 1 EL DORADOSOUTH LAKE TAHOE 95702 95708 95716 95716 95761 95761 96150 96158 2 HUMBOLDTWHITEHORN 95495 95495 95589 95589 Line 176232 176233 Qualifier CITY CITY
Start Date 01JAN1900 01JAN1900 01JAN1900 01JAN1900 01JAN1900 01JAN1900
End Date Tax Rate 31DEC2199 0.00 31DEC2199 0.00 31DEC2199 0.00 31DEC2199 0.00 31DEC2199 0.00 31DEC2199 0.00 Parent ID 02240 02261
Orphan Records, Parent_Location_ID was invalid Location Value From Zip To Zip End Date Start Date Tax Rate Location Id BORDER 99780 99780 0.00 022401056 SLANA 99586 99586 0.00 022611037
Review Sales Tax Interface Report The Tax Interface report provides information on the tax data you have loaded into Receivables or are reviewing for an upload. The report displays each senior location on a separate page. The Tax Interface report is automatically generated when you run the Sales Tax Rate Interface program. This report is divided into the following sections: Summary Section: The summarized section of the Tax Interface report lists each action code that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has used for the upload, the action code description, and the number of tax interface rows on which the program has executed each action. Warning Section: The warning section of the Tax Interface report lists every line of tax interface data that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has identified with an action code other than INSERT or NEWLOCATIONINSERT. Each row in this section lists the interface line ID, segment qualifier, location, postal code range, active date range, tax rate, and action for each row in the tax interface table that has a warning action code.
8 16
Locations and Rates Defined for Warnings Section: This section of the report lists all of the locations and tax rates which are defined in Receivables for each location in the Warnings Section. This section includes the postal code and active date ranges of each of these locations tax rates. Use this section in combination with the Warnings Section of the report to determine whether you need to take further action. If the tax rates are correct, then no further actions are necessary. If they are not, then you many need to update tax rates and locations manually in the Receivables Tax Locations and Rates window. For example, if the Warnings Section of this report includes a tax interface line with an action of ALREADYEXISTS for a tax rate, then the Locations and Rates Defined for Warning section will show a tax rate for this location with the same postal code and active date range that already exists in Receivables. No action is necessary in this case. Orphan Records, Parent_Location_ID Was Invalid Section: The final section on the Tax Interface report lists lines of tax interface data which the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has identified as not having a valid parent location ID value. All locations that are junior to other locations identify their parent location through the parent location ID. The program will not load a tax record into Receivables if it cannot identify a parent location using this ID, or if it is not a senior location. If this section of the report includes a tax interface line that is missing a Parent ID value, you must use SQL*Plus to update the line with the appropriate parent location ID, before it can be loaded into Receivables. For a review of this information, see: Table 8 3.
See Also
Running the Tax Rate Interface: page 8 13
Open Interfaces
8 17
Termination of the Tax Interface Report

If more than 100 Oracle errors occur during the upload of a single senior location, the program will terminate with an error message indicating that too many errors have occurred. Because the program saves after uploading the tax records of each senior location value, the Tax Interface report lists all of the tax records that the program has successfully uploaded, as well as the Oracle errors which resulted in the termination of the program. All of the remaining tax records of senior locations that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has not processed will have a status of <NULL>. If you resubmit the Sales Tax Rate Interface program using the same parameter values, the program only processes those tax records that satisfy these criteria and have an action code status of <NULL>. If the Tax Interface report indicates that the Oracle errors only occurred on the tax data of a specific senior location, then you should specify this location as your senior location parameter when you resubmit the Sales Tax Rate Interface program.
See Also
Running the Tax Rate Interface: page 8 13 Tax Interface Report: page 8 16
8 18
Sales Tax Rate Date Adjustments

The Sales Tax Rate Interface program adjusts the active date ranges of existing tax rates to ensure that they do not overlap with incoming tax rates for a location. For example, if an incoming sales tax rate for a location has start and end dates that overlap the active date range of an existing rate, then the Sales Tax Rate Interface program adjusts the active date range of the existing rate so that its active period does not overlap the date range of the incoming rate. The following diagrams indicate how the Sales Tax Rate Interface program inserts new tax rates and updates the active date range of existing tax rates. Each diagram shows the action code associated with the type of rate date adjustment that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program performs.
Figure 8 3 UPDATEINSERT
In Figure 8 3, when the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has assigned an action code of UPDATEINSERT to a new tax rate record, it has updated the existing tax rate by assigning it an end date immediately before the start date of the new tax rate. The program then inserts the new sales tax rate into Receivables.
Open Interfaces
8 19
Figure 8 4 IGNORE
In Figure 8 4, when the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has assigned an action code of IGNORE to a new tax rate record, it has ignored the new tax rate because it cannot determine either an end date for the existing rate, or a start date for the new rate. Therefore, the existing tax rate remains unchanged.
Figure 8 5 IGNORE
In Figure 8 5, when the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has assigned an action code of IGNORE to a new tax rate record, it has ignored the
8 20
new tax rate because it cannot determine an end date for this rate. Therefore, the existing tax rate remains unchanged.
Figure 8 6 RATEADJUST
In Figure 8 6, when the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has assigned an action code of RATEADJUST to a new tax record, it has replaced an existing tax rate with a new rate for the same location and active date range. You can either accept this new rate, or update it manually through the Tax Locations and Rates window in Receivables.
Figure 8 7 Sales Tax Rates That Change Over Time
Open Interfaces
8 21
As you continually update your tax rates using the Sales Tax Rate Interface program, you will store different tax rates for the same location that have mutually exclusive active date ranges. Figure 8 7 shows how Receivables will record different tax rates for a location as you update its rates over time.
See Also
Running the Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 13 Action Codes of Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 22
Action Codes of Sales Tax Rate Interface Program

The following lists include all of the possible actions that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program can perform on a row of tax data in the tax interface table. Success Action Codes The following codes are for tax rows that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has successfully loaded into the location or tax rate tables. These codes do not require you to take any additional actions. Action Code INSERT NEWLOCATION INSERT ZIPRANGE UPDATED Meaning Inserted a new tax rate for a location that already exists Inserted new location and new tax rate information Updated the zip code range for a location to the range provided by your tax vendor
Table 8 5 Success Action Codes (Table 1 of 2)
8 22
Action Code IGNORED NARROWERZIP
Meaning Two overlapping zip code ranges were found in AR_TAX_INTERFACE. Sales Tax Interface added the broader range and rejected the other. Replaced existing zip code range with a narrower zip code range.
NARROWERZIP RANGE
Table 8 5 Success Action Codes (Table 2 of 2)
Warning Action Codes The following codes are warning action codes. You should verify that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program has performed the updates or adjustments that you require for each record with a warning action code. For example, if a row of tax data from the tax interface table receives an action of RATEADJUST, then you should verify that the new tax rate for the location associated with this tax rate is correct. Action Code ALREADYEXISTS NEWLOCATION Meaning This tax rate already exists in Receivables. Inserted a new location that did not include any tax rate information. You must manually assign a tax rate to this location for Receivables to be able to create a tax line for invoices with this location. If you are only loading locations for address validation purposes, then you do not need to assign a tax rate to this location. Replaced an existing tax rate with a new tax rate Inserted new tax rate information, and adjusted the active dates of existing tax rate information
RATEADJUST UPDATEINSERT
Table 8 6 Warning Action Codes (Table 1 of 1)
Open Interfaces
8 23
Error Action Codes The following codes indicate that an Oracle error has occurred during the processing of tax data by the Sales Tax Rate Interface program. The program will still produce the Tax Interface report even if an Oracle error occurs during the upload process. Action Code ORACLE_ERROR Meaning An Oracle error has occurred. The Oracle error number is listed for this error.
Table 8 7 Error Action Codes (Table 1 of 1)
The following action codes indicate that either the tax data in the tax interface table is invalid, or the Sales Tax Rate Interface program did not interpret this data correctly. Although the Sales Tax Rate Interface program may assign these codes to records in the tax interface table, these codes should not appear on the Tax Interface report in normal circumstances. Note: These codes would, however, appear in the report if you elected to run it in review mode, immediately after using SQL Loader to load your data, but before uploading into Receivables. Action Code IGNORE <NULL> Meaning The Sales Tax Rate Interface program did not upload this record. This record is ready to be loaded by the Sales Tax Rate Interface program.
Table 8 8 Error Action Codes (Table 1 of 1)
See Also
Running the Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 13 Tax Interface Report: page 8 16
8 24
Sales Tax Rate Interface Program Updates of AR_TAX_INTERFACE Table: page 8 25
Sales Tax Rate Interface Program Updates of AR_TAX_INTERFACE Table

Below is a description of the columns in the tax interface table AR_TAX_INTERFACE that the Sales Tax Rate Interface program updates during execution. All other columns in this table remain unchanged after the initial load from your feeder system. You can review this data by running the Sales Tax Rate Interface report in Review mode.
Column Name STATUS LOCATION_ SEGMENT_ID
Value The Sales Tax Rate Interface program populates this column with the action code that it identifies for this record. The Sales Tax Rate Interface program populates this column with the ID of the location associated with this row. This ID column links a location in Receivables to the rows of tax interface data that relate to this location, and is a foreign key to AR_LOCATION_VALUES.LOCATION_SEGMENT_ID. Note: If you need to reload the tax data for a month that you have previously loaded into the interface tables, you should first null the above two columns to reset the data. You can then run the sql*loader file again and reload the data for that month. If you do not null these two columns, Receivables will not reload the same months data.
Receivables Tables
The Sales Tax Rate Interface program transfers sales tax data into the following Receivables tables: AR_LOCATION_VALUES AR_LOCATION_RATES
Open Interfaces
8 25
Table and Column Descriptions AR_TAX_INTERFACE

Below is a description of the columns in the AR_TAX_INTERFACE table into which you load sales tax data using SQL*Loader. The Sales Tax Rate Interface program transfers the sales tax rate data from AR_TAX_INTERFACE to the AR_LOCATION_VALUES and AR_LOCATION_RATES tables. These two tables store your locations and tax rates, respectively. The AR_TAX_INTERFACE tables column descriptions note the columns in the AR_LOCATION_VALUES and AR_LOCATION_RATES tables into which records are transferred. If the column description does not have a destination section, this information will not be transferred.
Column Name REQUEST_ID
Value The concurrent request ID of each submission of the Sales Tax Rate Interface program. Receivables lets you submit multiple uploads of tax data concurrently. This column is not null. column is not null.
INTERFACE_LINE_ID The sequence number that uniquely identifies each tax data line. This CREATED_BY CREATION_DATE SEGMENT_ QUALIFIER
The ID of the Oracle Application Object Library user who has loaded this tax data record into this table. This column is not null. The date on which the user loaded this tax data record into this table. This column is not null. Identifies which segment this tax data record is for. COUNTRY, STATE, COUNTY, CITY, and PROVINCE are examples of possible segment qualifier values. This column is not null. Destination: AR_LOCATION_VALUES.LOCATION_ SEGMENT_QUALIFIER
RATE_TYPE LOCATION_ID
Identifies the tax rate type of this tax data record, and will always be SALES. This column is not null. The ID (or Geocode) for this location. This ID number must be unique for every location. This number is composed of a unique identifier for the location prefixed by the parent location ID. This column is not null.
8 26
LOCATION_VALUE
The actual location. CA is an example of a location for the segment of STATE. Destination: AR_LOCATION_VALUES.LOCATION_ SEGMENT_VALUE
LOCATION_ DESCRIPTION
The description of the location. For a location of CA, the description is California. Destination: AR_LOCATION_VALUES.LOCATION_ SEGMENT_DESCRIPTION
PARENT_LOCATION_ The ID of the location that is directly senior to this record. This value is a foreign key to the LOCATION_ID column in the tax interface table. ID FROM_POSTAL_ CODE
The starting postal code for the postal code range of this tax rate. If this column is null, Receivables uses the value that you have defined for the Postal Code Range: From field in the System Options window for this column. This value is stored in the column AR_SYSTEM_PARAMETERS.FROM_POSTAL_CODE. Destination: AR_LOCATION_RATES.FROM_POSTAL_CODE
TO_POSTAL_ CODE
The ending postal code for the postal code range of this tax rate. If this column is null, Receivables uses the value that you have defined for the Postal Code Range: To field in the System Options window for this column. This value is stored in the column AR_SYSTEM_PARAMETERS.TO_POSTAL_CODE. Destination: AR_LOCATION_RATES.TO_POSTAL_CODE
START_DATE
The start date of a tax rate for this location. If this column is null, then Receivables uses the value 01JAN1900 00:00:00 for this column. Destination: AR_LOCATION_RATES.START_DATE
END_DATE
The end date of a tax rate for this location. If this column is null, then Receivables uses the value 31DEC2199 23:59:59 for this column. Destination: AR_LOCATION_RATES.END_DATE
TAX_RATE
The tax rate for this location. Destination: AR_LOCATION_RATES.TAX_RATES
CHANGE_FLAG
A flag that indicates whether this tax record is different from the previous listing of this data. Set this column to Y if this record has been changed, N if it has not, and U if it is unknown whether this tax record has changed. This column is not null.
Open Interfaces
8 27
See Also
Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 2 Running the Tax Rate Interface Program: page 8 13 Tax Interface Report: page 8 16
8 28
Implementing the Tax Vendor Extension

Receivables provides a Tax Vendor Extension to integrate external tax calculation programs with Oracle Applications. This Extension lets you provide for complex tax calculation needs while retaining the full power of Receivables to create and store all other tax data. The Tax Extension is called whenever a tax rate is calculated by the Receivables Tax Engine. When implemented, the Tax Extension will return a tax rate or amount from the vendor program. Receivables will use this information to create the appropriate tax line(s) and related accounting information. Receivables lets you implement either the Taxware Sales/Use Tax System or the Vertex Quantum tax vendor extension. Depending on the tax vendor you select, refer to one of the following implementation guides: Integrating Oracle Receivables with Taxware Sales/Use Tax System, Release 11 or Integrating Oracle Receivables with Vertex Quantum, Release 11. Note: If your Receivables installation uses multiple organizations (multiorg), the profile option Tax: Use Tax Vendor lets your system administrator control which users can call an installed third party application for tax calculations. The default value is Yes; this indicates that a user can call a third party application to calculate tax. See: Overview of Receivables Profile Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
Open Interfaces
8 29
Available Parameters for PL/SQL Stored Procedures

When defining a tax code in Oracle Receivables, you can specify PL/SQL as the taxable basis and enter the name of a PL/SQL stored procedure to calculate tax rates and amounts. Receivables automatically calls this stored procedure when you assign this tax code to a transaction. PL/SQL programmers can use the database structure TAX_INFO_REC to view input parameters and set output parameters for each tax calculation. The structure ARP_TAX.TAX_INFO_REC is the communications area for the tax extension ARP_TAX_VENDOR.CALCULATE. This structure passes information selected from the database views. The tax extension then calculates the tax and passes back all of the necessary output parameters through the same structure. For more information about PL/SQL stored procedures and customizing Oracle Applications, contact your system administrator. Warning: The parameters in ARP_TAX.TAX_INFO_REC are subject to change in subsequent releases of Oracle Applications. If you customize Oracle Applications to integrate your own PL/SQL tax calculations, you should review and test your custom code after each upgrade.
Data Type varchar2 Parameter Type input Null Allowed no
Member amount_includes_tax _flag audit_flag bill_to_customer_ name bill_to_customer_ number bill_to_cust_id bill_to_location_id bill_to_postal_code bill_to_site_use_id calculate_tax
Related View Column AMOUNT_INCLUDES_TAX_ FLAG AUDIT_FLAG BILL_TO_CUSTOMER_NAME
varchar2 varchar2
input input
no yes
number
input
yes
BILL_TO_CUSTOMER_NUMBER
number number varchar number varchar2
input input input input input
no yes yes yes yes
BILL_TO_CUSTOMER_ID BILL_TO_LOCATION_CCID BILL_TO_POSTAL_CODE BILL_TO_SITE_USE_ID TAXABLE_FLAG
Table 8 9 (Table 1 of 4) Members of the database structure ARP_TAX.TAX_INFO_REC
8 30
Member company_code credit_memo_flag customer_trx_charge_ line_id customer_trx_id customer_trx_line_id default_ussgl_ transaction_code division_code extended_amount fob_point gl_date inventory_item_id invoicing_rule_id item_exception_rate_ id link_to_cust_trx_line_ id memo_line_id minimum_ accountable_unit part_no payment_terms_ discount_percent payment_term_id poa_code poa_id poo_code
Data Type varchar2 boolean number
Parameter Type input input input
Null Allowed yes no yes
Related View Column COMPANY_CODE (True if credit memo) CUSTOMER_TRX_CHARGE_ LINE_ID TRX_HEADER_ID TRX_LINE_ID USSGL_TRANSACTION_CODE
number number varchar2
input input input
yes yes yes
varchar2 number varchar2 date number number number
input input input input input input input/output
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
DIVISION_CODE EXTENDED_AMOUNT FOB_CODE GL_DATE INVENTORY_ITEM_ID INVOICING_RULE_ID TAX_EXCEPTION_ID
number
input
yes
TRX_LINK_TO_CUST_TRX_ LINE_ID MEMO_LINE_ID MINIMUM_ACCOUNTABLE_ UNIT PART_NUMBER PAYMENT_TERMS_ DISCOUNT_PERCENT PAYMENT_TERM_ID POA_ADDRESS_CODE POA_ID POO_ADDRESS_CODE
number number
input input/output
yes yes
varchar2 varchar2
input input
yes yes
number varchar2 number varchar2
input input input input
yes yes yes yes
Open Interfaces
8 31
Member poo_id precision previous_customer_ trx_id previous_customer_ trx_line_id previous_trx_number qualifier ship_from_code
Data Type number number number
Parameter Type input input/output input
Null Allowed yes yes yes
Related View Column POO_ID PRECISION PREVIOUS_TRX_HEADER_ID
number
input
yes
PREVIOUS_TRX_LINE_ID
number varchar2 varchar2
input input input input input input
yes no yes yes yes yes
PREVIOUS_TRX_NUMBER LOCATION_QUALIFIER SHIP_FROM_ADDRESS_CODE SHIP_FROM_WAREHOUSE_ID SHIP_TO_ADDRESS_CODE SHIP_TO_CUSTOMER_NAME
ship_from_warehouse number _id ship_to_code ship_to_customer_ name ship_to_customer_ number ship_to_cust_id ship_to_location_id ship_to_postal_code ship_to_site_use_id status taxable_amount taxable_basis taxed_quantity tax_amount tax_calculation_plsql _block tax_code tax_control varchar2 varchar2
number
input
yes
SHIP_TO_CUSTOMER_NUMBER
number number varchar2 number number number varchar2 number number varchar2
input input input input output output input input input/output input
yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes
SHIP_TO_CUSTOMER_ID SHIP_TO_LOCATION_CCID SHIP_TO_POSTAL_CODE SHIP_TO_SITE_USE_ID (Default return code) TAXABLE_AMOUNT TAXABLE_BASIS TAXED_QUANTITY TAX_AMOUNT TAX_CALCULATION_ PLSQL_BLOCK TAX_CODE TAX_EXEMPT_FLAG
varchar2 varchar2
input/output input/output
yes yes
8 32
Member tax_exemption_id tax_header_level_flag tax_line_number tax_rate tax_rounding_rule tax_vendor_return_ code trx_currency_code trx_date trx_exchange_rate trx_line_type trx_number trx_type_id userf110 usern110 vat_tax_id vdrctrl_exempt
Data Type number varchar2 number number varchar2 varchar2
Parameter Type input/output input input input/output input output
Null Allowed yes yes yes yes yes no
Related View Column VAT_TAX_ID TAX_HEADER_LEVEL_FLAG TAX_LINE_NUMBER TAX_RATE TAX_ROUNDING_RULE (Return code from tax vendor)
varchar2 date number varchar2 number number varchar2 number number varchar2
input input input input input input input input input/output input
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
CURRENCY_CODE TRX_DATE EXCHANGE_RATE TRX_LINE_TYPE TRX_NUMBER TRX_TYPE_ID ATTRIBUTE110 NUMERIC_ATTRIBUTE110 VAT_TAX_ID VENDOR_CONTROL_ EXEMPTIONS TAX_EXEMPT_NUMBER TAX_EXEMPT_PERCENT TAX_EXEMPT_REASON
xmpt_cert_no xmpt_percent xmpt_reason
varchar2 number varchar2
input/output input/output input/output
yes yes yes
Note: The taxable_amount output parameter is required and must be set by the PL/SQL program before returning control to the tax module. Additionally, the program must also set either the tax_amount or the tax_rate parameter. For more information, refer to the example below.
Open Interfaces
8 33
Example PL/SQL Formula

Following is an example of a PL/SQL formula to set the tax rate, tax amount, and taxable amount parameters.
create or replace procedure mytaxcalc as begin Stored procedure example for user tax calculation. The following example shows a constant rate tax calculation but highlights how Oracle rounds the returned amounts. Set the Tax rate arp_tax.tax_info_rec.tax_rate := 4.21231; Set the Tax Amount. Oracle rounds the calculation as needed. arp_tax.tax_info_rec.tax_amount:= arp_tax.tax_info_rec.extended_amount * arp_tax.tax_info_rec.tax_rate / 100; Set the Taxable Amount. This number will be used in reporting. arp_tax.tax_info_rec.taxable_amount := arp_tax.tax_info_rec.extended_amount; end; . / show errors procedure mytaxcalc;
See Also
Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2
8 34
CHAPTER
Tax Reporting Ledger

his chapter describes the Tax Reporting Ledger, an Oracle Applications feature you can use to review all tax information in Oracle Receivables, Oracle Payables, and Oracle General Ledger.
91

The Tax Reporting Ledger provides a single reporting solution for the complex global tax requirements on sales and purchases and enables you to summarize tax information from Oracle Receivables, Oracle Payables, and Oracle General Ledger. In Release 11i of Oracle Applications, taxable transactions are accounted for in the base products following the countryspecific rules that you define. The Tax Reporting Ledger consists of the tax information recorded in each of these products. The Tax Extract copies the accounting information from each application and stores it in an interface table. You can then use any reporting tool such as RXi and Application Desktop Integrator (ADI) to specify which fields of the Tax Reporting Ledger to include and then print the report in a format that meets your needs. The Tax Reporting Ledger supports the following reports: Deferred Output Tax Register Recoverable and NonRecoverable Tax Registers Single Cross Product Tax Register Standard Input and Output Tax Registers Tax Reporting In most jurisdictions, tax reports must include certain information and be presented at different levels of summarization. Oracle Applications support this requirement with the Tax Journal reports, Tax Audit reports, and Tax Summary reports. The Tax Reporting Ledger includes tax accounting for: Receivables Invoices, Credit Memos, and Debit Memos Receivables Line, Tax, and Invoice Adjustments Receivables Payment Applications for Deferred Tax Receivables Earned and Unearned Discounts Receivables Finance Charges Receivables Miscellaneous Receipts & Payments Payables Invoices & Credit Memos Payables Prepayments Global Descriptive Flexfields
92
General Ledger Manual Journal Entries Tax Extract The Tax Extract draws information from each application and stores the data in an interface table. This information can easily be taken from multiple tables using RXi, Oracle Reports, or any client program. Output from the Tax Extract is designed to look as close to a simple tax report as possible. The Tax Extract copies the original data and does not perform complex calculation or derivations of taxable or tax amounts. Each record of the extract table includes both taxable and tax amounts and shows that information grouped by the transaction number and tax code of each transaction. The Tax Extract can be called from several sources, including Oracle Reports and RX and RXienabled concurrent programs. The following reports are available: Financial Tax Register RX Only: Financial Tax Register Figure 9 1 shows how the Tax Extract collects tax information from Oracle Applications and integrates with external programs to format your tax reports.
93
Figure 9 1 How the Tax Extract Collects Tax Information
94
Tax Reporting Ledger Columns The Tax Reporting Ledger lets you select the columns to include in your report. For more information, see: Tax Reporting Ledger Column Descriptions: page 9 24. Note: The columns for tax exemptions are only populated for Receivables Invoice, Debit Memo, and Credit Memo transactions where a customer or item exemption certificate has been assigned to the original transaction. These certificates are typically used in US state and local tax reporting.
Register Types
The Tax Register and the RX Only: Financial Tax Register include a Register Type parameter. Three registers are available: Interim Tax Register: Use this register to manage your deferred tax accounting entries for Receivables transactions and cash applications applied against invoices. This report is not yet available in Oracle Payables. Tax Register: Use this register to manage your accounting entries for invoice lines that reference standard tax codes and cash applications against invoice lines with deferred tax codes. This report manages your tax liability from your standard and collected output tax accounts. The Tax Register shows both partial and fully recoverable input taxes. Input tax transactions that are fully not recoverable appear only in the NonRecoverable Tax Register (see below). NonRecoverable Tax Register: This register shows your partial and fully nonrecoverable input taxes. Receivables transactions involving earned discounts, unearned discounts, finance charges, and receivable adjustments may make accounting entries to this report as identified by the tax code of the referenced invoice or Receivables Activity.
95
Example 1 Interim Tax Register vs. Tax Register This example shows the difference between the Interim Tax Register and the Tax Register. Interim Taxes are only supported in Oracle Receivables, they are not yet supported in Oracle Payables. Example Receivables Invoice: InvTest1 Invoice Line 1 for $600.00 net plus 10% Tax Invoice Line 2 for $400.00 net plus 20% Deferred Tax
Dr Receivable Cr Revenue @10% Cr Tax @10 Cr Revenue @20 Cr Tax @20 Table 9 1 (Page 1 of 1) 1140.00 600.00 60.00 400.00 80.00 (Interim Tax @20%) (Tax @10%)
Table 9 2 shows the accounting entries created when you apply a partial payment of $570.00. In addition to reducing the open receivable, the cash application moves 50% of the deferred tax originally recorded on the invoice to a collected tax account. Cash Receipt: CRTest1. Applied to the Invoice with: CRAppnTest1
Dr Cash Dr Tax @20 Cr Receivable Cr Tax @20 Table 9 2 (Page 1 of 1) 570.00 40.00 570.00 40.00 (Cash application of $570.00) (50% of the Deferred Tax) (Reduce AR by Cash Amount) (Tax due to the Government)
96
The output from the two Tax Registers (in which both transactions are within the period range entered for the report) is shown below: Interim Tax Register @10%
Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
<No Records Found> Table 9 3 (Page 1 of 1)
Interim Tax Register @20%

Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
InvTest1 CrTest1
Invoice Cash App.
400.00 (200.00)
80.00 (40.00)
Tax Register @10%

Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
InvTest1
Invoice
600.00
60.00
Tax Register @20%

Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
CRTest1
Cash App.
200.00
40.00
As these examples illustrate, the Interim Tax Register shows only those account postings for deferred tax, including the invoice and cash application. The Tax Register shows all standard tax transactions as well as all cash applications to a deferred tax invoice. Note: Using Oracle Receivables you can apply, reverse and reapply cash. Each time you perform these tasks, the original
97
document sequence name and number of the cash receipt identifies the application. Example 2 Output Taxes: NonRecoverable Tax Register vs. Tax Register This example shows the difference between the NonRecoverable Tax Register and the Tax Register. Invoice: InvTest2
Dr Receivable @10% Cr Revenue @10 Cr Tax @10 Cr Revenue @20 Cr Tax @20 Table 9 7 (Page 1 of 1) 1140.00 600.00 60.00 400.00 80.00 (Tax at 20%) (Tax at 10%)
An adjustment for (100.00) is made against the invoice, reducing the receivable to $1040.00. This adjustment is accounted for using the following Receivables Activity: Receivables Activity Option GL Account Source Tax Code Source Recoverable?
Setting Revenue on Invoice Invoice Yes
98
Table 9 9 shows the accounting entries created as a result of this adjustment: Adjustment ADJ1 for (100.00) to InvTest2
Dr Revenue @10% Dr Revenue @20% Dr Tax @10% Dr Tax @20% Cr Receivable Table 9 9 (Page 1 of 1) 52.63 35.09 5.26 7.02 100.00
A second adjustment is made to invoice INVTest2 for 200.00. This adjustment is accounted for using the following Receivables Activity: Receivables Activity Option GL Account Source Tax Code Source Recoverable?
Setting Revenue on Invoice Invoice No
Table 9 11 shows the accounting entries created as a result of this adjustment: Adjustment ADJ2 for (200.00) to InvTest2
Dr Revenue @10% Dr Revenue @20% Dr Tax (nonrecoverable) @10% Dr Tax (nonrecoverable) @20% Cr Receivable Table 9 11 (Page 1 of 1) 105.26 70.18 10.52 14.04 200.00
99
Using the accounting entries created in this example, the Tax Register and the NonRecoverable Tax Register appear as shown below: Tax Register @10%
Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
InvTest2 ADJ1
Invoice Adjustment
600.00 (52.63)
60.00 (5.26)
Tax Register @20%

Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
InvTest2 ADJ1
Invoice Adjustment
400.00 (35.09)
80.00 (7.02)
NonRecoverable Tax Register @10%

Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
ADJ2
Adjustment
(105.26)
(10.52)
NonRecoverable Tax Register @20%

Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
ADJ2
Adjustment
(70.18)
(14.04)
9 10
Example 3 Oracle Payables NonRecoverable Tax Register vs. Recoverable Tax Register The following example shows how the Tax Registers appear when two Payables invoices have either fully recoverable or partial/nonrecoverable Taxes. This example includes two Oracle Payables invoices: APInvTest3 and APInvTest4. Payables Invoice: APInvTest3 Invoice Line 1 for $600.00 net is taxed at 10%, tax is recoverable Invoice Line 2 for $400.00 net is taxed at 20%, 40% is nonrecoverable
Dr Expense @10% Dr Tax @10% Dr Expense @20% Dr Expense @20% Dr Tax @20% Cr Liability Table 9 16 (Page 1 of 1) 600.00 60.00 400.00 32.00 48.00 1140.00 (Net amount $600.00 taxed @10%) (Tax @10% fully recoverable) (Net expense amount @20%) (40% of 80 is nonrecoverable) (60% of 80 is recoverable)
Payables Invoice: APInvTest4 Invoice Line 1 for $600.00 net is taxed at 10%, tax is nonrecoverable Invoice Line 2 for $400.00 net is taxed at 20%, tax is nonrecoverable
Dr Expense @10% Dr Expense @10% Dr Expense @20% Dr Expense @20% Cr Liability Table 9 17 (Page 1 of 1) 600.00 60.00 400.00 80.00 1140.00 (Net amount $600.00 taxed @10%) (nonrecoverable Tax @10%) (Net amount of $400.00) (nonrecoverable Tax @20%)
9 11
The Tax Registers for these invoices appear as shown below: Input Tax Register @10%
Taxable Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT
NonRecoverable Tax Amount

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
APInvTest3
Invoice
600.00
60.00
0.00
Input Tax Register @20%

TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
APInvTest3
Invoice
400.00
48.00
32.00
NonRecoverable Input Tax Register @10%

TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
APInvTest4
Invoice
600.00
0.00
60.00
NonRecoverable Input Tax Register @20%

TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
APInvTest3 APInvTest4
Invoice Invoice
400.00 400.00
48.00 0.00
32.00 80.00
9 12
Example 4 Prepayment Transactions, Tax is Exclusive This example shows the content of the Tax Register when you create prepayments. Prepayment Established: AP (InvTest10) Invoice Line 1 Prepayment invoice for $500 plus tax at 10% (fully recoverable)
Dr Prepaid Asset or Expense @10% Dr Tax @10% Cr Liability Table 9 22 (Page 1 of 1) 500.00 50.00 550.00 (Asset or expense is half paid) (Tax on asset or expense fully paid) (Prepaid with tax)
Pay the prepayment invoice: AP (InvTest10)

Dr Liability Cr Cash Table 9 23 (Page 1 of 1) 550.00 550.00
The Tax Register for this prepayment appears as shown below: Tax Register @10%
TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
InvTest10
Invoice (prepayment)
500.00
50.00
0.00
9 13
Another example of a prepayment is shown in Table 9 25. Invoice for a total including prepayment: AP (InvTest20) Invoice Line 1 Item purchased for $1,000.00 with $500 prepaid applied and taxed at 10%
Dr Asset or Expense @10% Dr Tax @10% Cr Liability Cr Prepaid Asset or Expense Table 9 25 (Page 1 of 1) 1000.00 50.00 550.00 500.00 (Invoiced amount) (Tax on balance of invoiced amount) (Liability for balance of invoiced amount) (Reverse prepaid asset or expense)
The Tax Register for this prepayment appears as shown below: Tax Register @10%
TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
InvTest20
Invoice
500.00
50.00
0.00
Example 5 Tax Calculation of Offset Taxes This example shows how the Tax Register displays offset taxes in Oracle Payables. Payables Invoice: APInvTest30 Invoice Line 1 for $1000.00 is taxed at 10% and 10% offset tax
Dr Expense @10% Dr Output Tax @10% Cr Liability Cr Input Tax @10% Table 9 27 (Page 1 of 1) 1000.00 100.00 1000.00 100.00 (Input Tax @10%) (Net amount $600.00 taxed @10%) (Output Tax @10%)
9 14
The Tax Registers for this invoice appear as shown below: Output Tax Register @10%
TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
InvTest30
Invoice
1000.00
100.00
0.00
Input Tax Register @10%

TRX NUMBER

TAX1 ACCTD AMT

TAX2 ACCTD AMT
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
InvTest30
Invoice
1000.00
100.00
0.00
Example 6 Tax Calculation for GL Entries This example shows how the Tax Register displays entries created in Oracle General Ledger. General Ledger: APInvtest60 Debit Amount for $1000.00 is taxed at 10% and is fully recoverable
Dr Expense @10% Dr Tax @10% Cr Liability Table 9 30 (Page 1 of 1) 1000.00 100.00 1100.00 (Net amount) (Tax @10%)
9 15
The Tax Register appears as shown below: Tax Register @10%

Transaction Number
TRX NUMBER
Transaction Class
TRX CLASS MEANING
Taxable Amount
TAXABLE ACCTD AMT
Tax Amount
TAX ACCTD AMT
InvTest60
General Ledger
1000.00
100.00
See Also
Multiple Organization Reporting: page 9 16 Tax Reporting Ledger Column Descriptions: page 9 24 Financial Tax Register: page 7 24
Multiple Organization Reporting

If you implemented the Oracle Applications Multiple Organizations feature (multiorg), you can use the Tax Reporting Ledger to create reports across multiple organizations. Use the Reporting Level and Reporting Context report parameters to determine the information to include in your report. For more information about the Reporting Level and Reporting Context parameters, see: Financial Tax Register: page 7 24.
9 16
Example 1 Reporting Level is set to Set of Books If you set the Reporting Level to Set of Books, the Reporting Context parameter defaults to the Set of Books. The report then contains data for all operating units in the Set of Books hierarchy.
Example 2 Reporting Level is set to Legal Entity If you set the Reporting Level to Legal Entity, the Reporting Context parameter defaults to Legal Entities and only legal entities appear in the list of values. The report then contains data for all operating units within the legal entity you specify.
Example 3 Reporting Level is set to Operating Unit If you set the Reporting Level to Operating Unit, the Reporting Context parameter defaults to Operating Units and only operating units appear in the list of values. The report then contains data for only the operating unit you specify.
9 17
CrossProduct Reporting You can also use the Tax Reporting Ledger to create crossproduct reports that include information in Oracle Receivables, Oracle Payables, and Oracle General Ledger. To include tax information for each of these products, enter ALL for the Product reporting parameter. You can also report across operating units and products. Oracle uses standard security rules to control which data to include in your report. These controls include: The profile option MO: Top Reporting Level Your Operating Unit Your Set of Books For example, you submit a single concurrent request for the Financial Tax Register using the following parameters: Reporting Level: Set of Books (the profile option MO: Top Reporting Level determines the top reporting level for your responsibility) Reporting Context: ABC Corporation Tax Class: All Product: All The result is a single report across all three Oracle Applications products for all Operating Units that fall within the ABC Corporation set of books. You control the reporting level and products using the parameters listed above and Oracle automatically links Payables, Receivables, and General ledger together based on the setup of your organization hierarchy. Example 1 Reporting Level is set to Set of Books To create a crossproduct report at the Set of Books level, the user, responsibility, and profile options must be defined as follows:
User Name
Tax User Tax User
User Responsibility
Ireland Division 1 AP Ireland Division 1 AR
Set of Books
ABC Corporation ABC Corporation
MO: Top Reporting Level

Set of Books Set of Books
MO: Operating Unit

Ireland Division 1 Ireland Division 1
9 18
User Name
Tax User Tax User Tax User Tax User Tax User Tax User Tax User Tax User Tax User Tax User
User Responsibility
Ireland Division 1 GL Ireland Division 2 AP Ireland Division 2 AR Ireland Division 2 GL UK Division 1 AP UK Division 1 AR UK Division 1 GL UK Division 2 AP UK Division 2 AR UK Division 2 GL
Set of Books
ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation

Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books Set of Books
MO: Operating Unit

Ireland Division 1 Ireland Division 2 Ireland Division 2 Ireland Division 2 UK Division 1 UK Division 1 UK Division 1 UK Division 2 UK Division 2 UK Division 2
Example 2 Reporting Level is set to Legal Entity To create a crossproduct report at the Legal Entity level, the user, responsibility, and profile options must be defined as follows:
User Name
Tax User Tax User Tax User
User Responsibility
Ireland Division 1 AP Ireland Division 1 AR Ireland Division 1 GL
Set of Books
ABC Corporation ABC Corporation ABC Corporation

Set of Books or Legal Entity Set of Books or Legal Entity Set of Books or Legal Entity
MO: Operating Unit

Ireland Division 1 Ireland Division 1 Ireland Division 1
9 19
User Name
User Responsibility
Set of Books

Set of Books or Legal Entity Set of Books or Legal Entity Set of Books or Legal Entity
MO: Operating Unit

Example 3 Reporting Level is set to Operating Unit To create a crossproduct report at the Operating Unit level, the user, responsibility, and profile options must be defined as follows:
User Name
User Responsibility
Set of Books

Set of Books, Legal Entity, or Operating Unit Set of Books, Legal Entity, or Operating Unit Set of Books, Legal Entity, or Operating Unit
MO: Operating Unit

Matrix Reporting
Use Matrix Reporting to show a single line in the Tax Reporting Ledger for two or more tax amounts. Matrix reporting can be used to support countries with multiple taxes (for example, Canada) or to provide a breakdown of input taxes, showing both recoverable and nonrecoverable tax amounts on the same report line. If Matrix Reporting is enabled, the Tax Reporting ledger groups either of the following into a single line: Up to Four Output Taxes Up to Two Input Taxes, each with a split between Recoverable and NonRecoverable amounts. In situations where an invoice is taxed with different tax groups, or different tax codes used within the group, then two or more records in
9 20
the Tax Reporting Ledger will automatically be built. The Tax Reporting Ledger will always report the Recoverable tax first and then the NonRecoverable tax amount. A column called TAX#_RECOVERABLE_FLAG separately reports any one of the available sets of Tax attributes as either Recoverable, NonRecoverable or Null (not applicable). Example of Matrix Reporting with Multiple Taxes This example shows an Oracle Receivables invoice with three taxable lines with multiple taxes. Transaction Number ES001
Line Amount Item Line #1 100.00 Tax Group ESSTD Tax Code ES16 RDE7 Item Line #2 300.00 ESRD ES8 RDE4 Item Line #3 500.00 ESSTD ES16 RDE7 $900.00 Tax Rate 16% 7% 8% 4% 16% 7% Tax Amount 16.00 7.00 24.00 12.00 80.00 35.00 174.00
Invoice Total: Table 9 35 (Page 1 of 1)
$1074.00
Using the data in this example, you create a report using matrix reporting, with a summary level of Transaction. The following information is shown in the Tax Reporting Ledger:
9 21
Tax Reporting Ledger, Matrix Report

Taxable Amount 600.00 300.00 Tax 1 Code ES16 ES8 Tax 1 Amount 96.00 24.00 Tax 2 Code RDE7 RDE4 Tax 2 Amount 42.00 12.00
Transaction No. ES001 ES001
Tax Group ESSTD ESRED
Totals by Tax Code ES16 RDE7 ESRED RDE4 Table 9 36 (Page 1 of 1)
Taxable Amount $600.00 $600.00 $300.00 $300.00
Tax Amount 96.00 42.00 24.00 12.00
This two part report would be repeated for each company. The table below shows the how the report appears when you create it with the Matrix Reporting flag set to No. Tax Reporting Ledger
Tax Code ES16 ES16 RDE7 RDE7 ES8 RDE4 Trx Number ES001 ES001 ES001 ES001 ES001 ES001 Trx Class Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Taxable Amount 100.00 500.00 100.00 500.00 300.00 300.00 Tax Group ESSTD ESSTD RDE7 RDE7 ESRED ESRED Tax Amount 16.00 80.00 7.00 35.00 24.00 12.00
Totals for Company: Table 9 37 (Page 1 of 1)
1800.00
174.00
9 22
See Also
Financial Tax Register: page 7 24 Tax Reporting Ledger Column Descriptions: page 9 24 Tax Reporting Ledger: page 9 2
9 23
Tax Reporting Ledger Column Descriptions

The Tax Reporting Ledger lets you select your reporting columns from a single reporting view. The view AR_TAX_EXTRACT_ITF_V unites data from many sources and provides a single, consistent reference to the taxed transactions in your subledgers. Since this reporting view is large, the columns in the view have been grouped together for ease of use. The column groupings are shown below. Extract Reporting Entity Reporting Context Legal Entity Transaction Header Level Billing Shipping Banking Receivables Transaction Taxable Amounts Taxable Line fields Tax Amounts Tax Line fields, including Tax Code & Tax Rate Total Amounts Payables Tax Line Receivables Tax Line Transaction Line User Descriptive Flexfield Accounting Miscellaneous Each group of columns shows at which level the column is available (i.e., Summarization Level, Transaction Header Level, Transaction Line Level, or Transaction Distribution Level) and whether the column is available in Oracle Receivables (AR), Oracle Payables (AP), and Oracle General Ledger (GL). Note: The following tables list the attribute names for the attribute set DEFAULT, but you can change them when copying or updating your own attribute sets using RXi.
9 24
Extract Columns
The Extract columns maintain system and Row Who information necessary for running the Tax Reporting Ledger. Each time the Tax Reporting Ledger is populated, the request ID of the concurrent program submission is used to identify the set of report lines that belong to that submission. The Extract columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name Column Name Description
Concurrent Request ID of the Concurrent Program or Report that populates the Interface table. Concurrent Request Created By Concurrent Request Created Date Concurrent Request Updated By Concurrent Request Update Date Internal identifier for the Set of Books Internal identifier for the Chart of Accounts Internal unique identifier for this record Identifies the Source Ledger for this ledger line. Can be AP,AR or GL. A sequential line number for each record of the Tax Ledger Matrix Report Flag to indicate matrix reporting
Application
AR, AP, GL
Extract Request Id REQUEST_ID
Extract Created By Extract Creation Date Extract Last Update By Extract Last Update Date Reporting Set of Books ID Reporting Chart of Accounts ID Extract Line ID Extract Source Ledger Extract Report Line Number
CREATED_BY CREATED_DATE LAST_UPDATED_BY LAST_UPDATE_DATE SET_OF_BOOKS_ID CHART_OF_ACCOUNTS_ ID EXTRACT_LINE_ID EXTRACT_SOURCE_LEDGER
AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL
EXTRACT_REPORT_LINE_ NUMBER
AR, AP, GL
Matrix Report Flag
MATRIX_REPORT_FLAG
AR, AP, GL
9 25
Reporting Entity Reporting Entity has been included for legacy support only. New implementations should use the Legal Entity implementation for Who am I reporting. The Reporting Entity columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Reporting Entity ID Reporting Entity Tax Registration Number Reporting Entity Name
Column Name
REPORTING_ENTITY_ID REPORTING_ENTITY_TAX_ REG_NO REPORTING_ENTITY_NAME
Description
Identification of the Reporting Entity Tax Registration Number of the Reporting Entity
Application
AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL
The name of the Reporting Entity
AR, AP, GL
Reporting Context
These columns identify the reporting context, including name, level, and address. The reporting context is defined in Oracle Payables and is associated with the Balancing segment of either the Receivable or Liability account. The Reporting Context columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Reporting Context Tax Registration Number Reporting Context Level Code
Column Name
REPORTING_CONTEXT_TAX_ REG_NO REPORTING_CONTEXT_LVL__ CODE
Description
The Tax Registration number taken from the Additional Organization Window for the Legal Entity Internal Lookup code for the displayed field Reporting Context Level.
Application
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
9 26
Attribute Name
Reporting Context Level
Column Name
REPORTING_CONTEXT_LVL__ MEANING
Description
One of Operating Unit, Legal Entity or Set of Books. The Reporting Context Level will be taken from the submission parameters. The Reporting Context Name used in standard Cross Organization Reporting. The Reporting Context name will be taken from the submission parameter Reporting Context Name and will be for one of Operating Unit, Legal Entity or Set of Books.
Application
AR, AP, GL
Reporting Context Name
REPORTING_CONTEXT_NAME
AR, AP, GL
Legal Entity
The Legal Entity columns provide the name, tax registration number, and address information for the Legal Entity. The Legal Entity is defined using Oracles Organization windows and the multiple organizations implementation. Use the Legal Entity to implement the Who am I required during tax reporting. The Legal Entity columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Legal Entity Tax Registration Number
Column Name
LEGAL_ENTITY_TAX_REG_NO
Description
The Tax Registration number for the Legal Entity as setup using the Additional Organization information for the Legal Entity business purpose of the Organization. The Internal identifier for the Legal Entity associated with this transaction. The name of the Legal Entity
Application
AR, AP, GL
Legal Entity Org ID Legal Entity Name
LEGAL_ENTITY_ORG_ID
AR, AP, GL
LEGAL_ENTITY_NAME
AR, AP, GL
9 27
Attribute Name
Legal Entity Location ID
Column Name
LEGAL_ENTITY_LOCATION_ID
Description
The internal ID used to identify the HR_LOCATIONS record for the address of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction The City field of the address of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction The County field of the address of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction The State field of the address of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction The Province field of the address of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction Address Line 1 of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction Address Line 2 of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction Address Line 3 of the Legal Entity reporting this transaction The Country Code of the Address for the Legal Entity reporting this transaction
Application
AR, AP, GL
Legal Entity City
LEGAL_ENTITY_CITY
AR, AP, GL
Legal Entity County Legal Entity State
LEGAL_ENTITY_COUNTY
AR, AP, GL
LEGAL_ENTITY_STATE
AR, AP, GL
Legal Entity Province Legal Entity Address 1 Legal Entity Address 2 Legal Entity Address 3 Legal Entity Country Legal Entity Postal Code Legal Entity Telephone Number
LEGAL_ENTITY_PROVINCE
AR, AP, GL
LEGAL_ENTITY_ADDRESS1
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
LEGAL_ENTITY_COUNTRY
AR, AP, GL
LEGAL_ENTITY_POSTAL_CODE The Postal Code field of the Address for the Legal entity reporting this transaction LEGAL_ENTITY_TELEPHONE_ NUMBER The Telephone number field of the Address for the Legal entity reporting this transaction
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
9 28
Transaction Header Level

The Transaction Header Level columns are common across all sources and are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Trans ID TRX_ID
Column Name
Description
The Internal ID used with TRX_CLASS_CODE and REPORTING_SOURCE_ LEDGER to identify the original transaction The Transaction Number as reported in the Tax Register. This can be the Invoice Number, Credit Memo Number, or Prepayment Number (depending upon the source of the transaction) A description of the Transaction The Internal ID of the sequence name used in the taxed transaction The name of the sequence used in the taxed transaction The value of the document sequence number field The Transaction date of the transaction Internal lookup code for the Transaction Class used by developers to identify the original document. The Printed Trx Class; can be Invoice, Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Prepayment, Earned Discount, or Unearned Discount The Internal identifier used to control the Receivable Transaction Type of the original Invoice, Debit Memo or Credit Memo.
Application
AR, AP, GL
Transaction Number
TRX_NUMBER
AR, AP, GL
Trans Description Trans Document Sequence ID Trans Document Sequence Name Trans Document Sequence Value Transaction Date Trans Class Code
TRX_DESCRIPTION TRX_DOC_SEQUENCE_ID
TRX_DOC_SEQUENCE_NAME
AR, AP, GL
TRX_DOC_SEQUENCE_VALUE TRX_DATE TRX_CLASS_CODE
AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL
Transaction Class
TRX_CLASS_MEANING
AR, AP, GL
Trans Type ID
TRX_TYPE_ID
AR, AP
9 29
Attribute Name
Trans Type
Column Name
TRX_TYPE_MEANING
Description
The Receivable Transaction Type assigned to the transaction Internal Table Name
Application
AR, AP
Trans Applied From Trans Header Table Trans Applied From Trans Header ID Trans Applied From Trans Class Code Trans Applied From Trans Class
TRX_APPLIED_FROM_ HEADER_TABLE TRX_APPLIED_FROM_TRX_ HEADER_ID TRX_APPLIED_FROM_ CLASS_CODE TRX_APPLIED_FROM_ CLASS_MEANING
AR, AP
Internal Unique Identifier
AR, AP
The internal lookup code used to control the applied from document class. The displayed transaction class for the applied from document. For an earned or unearned discount this would be the cash receipt number. The cash receipt number for receipt applications, earned and unearned discounts The Internal table name used to store the Applied From Document The Internal ID used to identify the Applied From Document Name The Transaction Number to which this document is applied. For a Credit Memo, Cash Receipt, Earned or Unearned Discount this is the Invoice Number. The internal lookup code used to identify the Transaction Class of the Applied To document
AR, AP
AR, AP
Trans Applied From Trans Number Trans Applied To Trans Header Table Trans Applied To Trans Header ID
TRX_APPLIED_FROM_TRX_ NUMBER TRX_APPLIED_TO_TRX_HDR_ TABLE TRX_APPLIED_TO_TRX_ HEADER_ID
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
Related Transaction
TRX_APPLIED_TO_TRX_ NUMBER
AR, AP
Trans Applied To Trans Class Code
TRX_APPLIED_TO_CLASS_ CODE
AR, AP
9 30
Attribute Name
Trans Applied to Trans Class
Column Name
TRX_APPLIED_TO_CLASS_ MEANING
Description
The displayed transaction class of the applied to document. For a Credit Memo, Cash Receipt, Earned or Unearned discount this is the Invoice Number The description of the Receivable Transaction type that assigned to this transaction. User Descriptive flexfield Attribute Category. User Descriptive flexfield 1 through 10.
Application
AR, AP
Trans Type Description
TRX_TYPE_DESCRIPTION
AR, AP
Trans User Desc Flex Category Trans User Desc Flex Attribute 110 Trans User Desc Flex Attribute11 15 Trans Terms Date Trans Shipping Date Trans Communicated Date Trans Currency Code Trans Currency Conversion Type
TRX_HEADER_CATEGORY TRX_HEADER_ATTRIBUTE110
Available in AR, AP, GL for Attributes1 10.
TRX_HEADER_ATTRIBUTE1115
User Descriptive flexfield 11 through 15.
Available in AR, AP for Attributes11 15. AR, AP AR, AP
TRX_DUE_DATE TRX_SHIPPING_DATE
The Payment Due Date of the Invoice/Term. The Shipping or Receipt Date identified at the Invoice Header The date Printed/Received of the Transaction The Entered Currency Code of the Transaction Header The Currency Conversion Type of the Transaction
TRX_COMMUNICATED_DATE
AR, AP, GL
TRX_CURRENCY_CODE TRX_CURRENCY_ CONVERSION_TYPE
Trans Currency Conversion Date
TRX_CURRENCY_ CONVERSION_DATE
The Currency Conversion date of the Transaction
AR, AP, GL
Trans Currency Conversion Rate
TRX_CURRENCY_ CONVERSION_RATE
The Currency Conversion rate of the Transaction
AR, AP, GL
9 31
Attribute Name
Trans Control Account Flexfield
Column Name
TRX_CONTROL_ACCOUNT_ FLEXFIELD
Description
The accounting flexfield of the Receivables or Payables control account. In General Ledger this is the accounting flexfield of the accounting line that offsets the tax line.
Application
AR, AP, GL
Company
TRX_CONTROL_ACCOUNT_BS_ The balancing segment or company value taken from the Transaction Control VALUE Account Flexfield. This is usually the company code associated with the transactions balancing segment. TRX_CONTROL_ACCOUNT_BS_ The description associated with the Transaction Control Balancing Segment DESC flexfield segment value. This is usually the company name associated with the tranactions balancing segment.
AR, AP, GL
Trans Control Balancing Segment Desc
AR, AP, GL
Billing
The Billing columns provide trading partner information and the name and address for billing functions. These columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Billing Partner ID
Column Name
BILLING_TRADING_PARTNER_ ID
Description
The Internal Identifier of the Trading Partner (Customer or Supplier) that is used to bill or pay this transaction. The internal identifier of the Trading Partner Site (Customer Site or Supplier Site) that is used to bill or pay this transaction The Customer or Supplier Number
Application
AR, AP
Billing Partner Site ID
BILLING_TP_SITE_ID
AR, AP
Billing Partner Number
BILLING_TP_NUMBER
AR, AP, GL
9 32
Attribute Name
Tax Registration Number
Column Name
BILLING_TP_TAX_REG_NUM
Description
The Tax Registration Number of the Trading Partner that is either Billing or Paying this transaction The Taxpayer ID of the Billing or Paying/Trading Partner The name given to the Billing or Paying/Trading Partner site The alternate name given to the Billing or Paying/Trading Partner site The Tax Registration Number for the Billing/Paying Trading Partner Identifies whether this site is used for Income Tax Reporting Trading Partner Name. For Receivables, this is the Bill to Customer Name, for Payables this is the Supplier Name. Alternative or phonetic name of the Trading Partner SIC Code of Trading Partner The Internal ID of the Customer Address or Supplier Site City field of the billing trading partner address County field of the billing trading partner address State field of the billing trading partner address Province field of the billing trading partner address
Application
AR, AP, GL
Billing Partner Taxpayer ID Billing Partner Site Name Billing Partner Site Alternate Name Billing Partner Site Tax Registration Number Billing Partner Income Tax Reporting Flag Billing Partner Name
BILLING_TP_TAXPAYER_ID
AR, AP
BILLING_TP_SITE_NAME
AR, AP
BILLING_TP_SITE_NAME_ALT
BILLING_TP_SITE_TAX_REG_ NUM BILLING_TP_TAX_REPORTING_ FLAG BILLING_TP_NAME
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP, GL
Billing Partner Alternate Name Billing Partner S.I.C. Code Billing Partner Address ID Billing Partner City Billing Partner County Billing Partner State Billing Partner Province
BILLING_TP_NAME_ALT BILLING_TP_SIC_CODE BILLING_TP_ADDRESS_ID
AR, AP AR, AP AR, AP
BILLING_TP_CITY BILLING_TP_COUNTY BILLING_TP_STATE BILLING_TP_PROVINCE
AR, AP AR, AP AR, AP AR, AP
9 33
Attribute Name
Billing Partner Address 1 Billing Partner Address 2 Billing Partner Address 3 Billing Partner Address Alternate Lines Billing Partner Country Billing Partner Postal Code
Column Name
BILLING_TP_ADDRESS1 BILLING_TP_ADDRESS2 BILLING_TP_ADDRESS3 BILLING_TP_ADDRESS_LINES_ ALT BILLING_TP_COUNTRY BILLING_TP_POSTAL_CODE
Description
Address line1 of the billing trading partner address Address line 2 of the billing trading partner address Address line 3 of the billing trading partner address The alternate address lines of the billing trading partner Country field of the billing trading partner address Postal Code field of the billing trading partner address
Application
AR, AP AR, AP AR, AP AR, AP
AR, AP AR, AP
Shipping
These columns provide the name and address for the shipping function in Oracle Payables; however, no shipping information is recorded. The Shipping columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Shipping Partner ID
Column Name
SHIPPING_TRADING_ PARTNER_ID
Description
The Ship to Customer Internal ID, used only for Receivable Transactions The Ship to Customer Site Internal ID, used only for Receivable Transactions The Ship to Customer Name, used only for Receivable Transactions The Tax Registration number of the Ship To Customer, used only for Receivable Transactions
Application
AR, AP
Shipping Partner Site ID Shipping Partner Number Shipping Partner Tax Registration Number
SHIPPING_TP_SITE_ID
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_NUMBER
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_TAX_REG_NUM
AR, AP
9 34
Attribute Name
Shipping Partner Taxpayer ID Shipping Partner Site Name Shipping Partner Site Alternate Name Shipping Partner Site Tax Registration Number Shipping Partner Name Shipping Partner Alternate Name
Column Name
SHIPPING_TP_TAXPAYER_ID
Description
The Taxpayer ID of the Ship To Customer, used only for Receivable Transactions The Site Name of the Shipping trading partner
Application
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_SITE_NAME
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_SITE_NAME_ALT The alternate name given to the Shipping or Paying/Trading Partner site SHIPPING_TP_SITE_TAX_REG_ NUM The Tax Registration Number of the Ship to Customer site, used only for Receivable Transactions The Ship To Customer Site Name, used only for Receivable Transactions The alternative or phonetic name of the Ship To Customer Name, used only for Receivable Transactions The SIC code of the Ship to Customer, used only for Receivable Transactions The internal identifier of the Ship to Customer Address, used only for Receivable Transactions The City field of the Ship to customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions The County field of the Ship to customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions The State field of the Ship to customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions The Province field of the Ship to customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_NAME
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_NAME_ALT
AR, AP
Shipping Partner S.I.C. Code Shipping Partner Address ID
SHIPPING_TP_SIC_CODE
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_ADDRESS_ID
AR, AP
Shipping Partner City Shipping Partner County
SHIPPING_TP_CITY
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_COUNTY
AR, AP
Shipping Partner State Shipping Partner Province
SHIPPING_TP_STATE
AR, AP
SHIPPING_TP_PROVINCE
AR, AP
9 35
Attribute Name
Shipping Partner Address 1
Column Name
SHIPPING_TP_ADDRESS1
Description
The Address line 1 of the Ship to customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions The Address line 2 of the shipto customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions The Address line 3 of the Ship to customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions The alternate address lines of the shipping trading partner The Country field of the Ship to customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions The Postal Code field of the shipto customer address, used only for Receivable Transactions
Application
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
Shipping Partner Address Alternate Lines Shipping Partner Country
SHIPPING_TP_ADDRESS_ LINES_ALT SHIPPING_TP_COUNTRY
AR, AP
AR, AP
Shipping Partner Postal Code
SHIPPING_TP_POSTAL_CODE
AR, AP
9 36
Banking
Trading partner columns provide the name and address for banking functions and are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Banking Partner Name
Column Name
BANKING_TP_NAME
Description
The Bank Name of the remittance bank account, only populated for Miscellaneous Payments and Miscellaneous Receipts in Oracle Receivables The Taxpayer ID field of the remittance bank account, only populated for Miscellaneous Payments and Miscellaneous Receipts in Oracle Receivables
Application
AR
Banking Partner Taxpayer ID
BANKING_TP_TAXPAYER_ID
AR
Receivables Transaction
These columns provide Oracle Receivablesspecific header level transaction information and are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
AR Trans Batch Source Name
Column Name
AR_TRX_BATCH_SOURCE_ NAME
Description
The Receivables Batch Source name used to create the original Transaction, used only for Receivable Transactions The Internal identifier of the Receivables Batch Source name used to create the original Transaction, used only for Receivable Transaction The SIC Code of the Receivables Transaction Header The FOB (Terms of Delivery) of the Receivables Transaction Header
Application
AR
AR Trans Batch Source ID
AR_TRX_BATCH_SOURCE_ID
AR
AR Trans S.I.C. Code AR Trans FOB Point
AR_TRX_SIC_CODE
AR
AR_TRX_FOB_POINT
AR
9 37
Attribute Name
AR Trans WayBill Number AR Trans Posting Status AR Trans Purchase Order Number AR Trans Purchase Order Revision AR Trans Sales Order AR Trans Sales Order Source
Column Name
AR_TRX_WAYBILL_NUMBER
Description
The Waybill number of the Receivables Transaction Header The posting status of the Receivables Transaction Header The Purchase Order Number, recorded on the Receivables Transaction Header The Purchase Order Revision, recorded on the Receivables Transaction Header The Sales Order Number, recorded on the Receivables Transaction Header The Sales Order Source, recorded on the Receivables Transaction Header The Sales Order Revision, recorded on the Receivables Transaction Header The Sales Order Date, recorded on the Receivables Transaction Header
Application
AR
AR_TRX_POSTING_STATUS
AR
AR_TRX_PURCHASE_ORDER
AR
AR_TRX_PURCHASE_ORDER_ REVISION AR_TRX_SALES_ORDER
AR
AR
AR_TRX_SALES_ORDER_ SOURCE
AR
AR Trans Sales Order Revision
AR_TRX_SALES_ORDER_ REVISION
AR
AR Trans Sales Order Date
AR_TRX_SALES_ORDER_DATE
AR
Taxable Amounts
These columns provide the taxable amount for this tax ledger line and are available at all summarization levels. Note: The taxable amount for the Recoverable tax is held in Taxable1 and the taxable amount for the Nonrecoverable tax is held in Taxable2. If the invoice had a second tax code, the Recoverable tax for the Recoverable tax is held in Taxable3 and the taxable amount for the Nonrecoverable tax is held in Taxable4. Note: In Oracle Receivables, the matrix columns are used when a Tax Group with multiple tax codes is assigned to a transaction. If there is an exemption, the taxable amount is the
9 38
amount after applying the exemption. Additionally, when the report is run at the transaction line, multiple lines with same tax code are added together.
Attribute Name
Taxable Amount Entered Debit Taxable Amount Entered Credit Taxable Amount Entered Currency
Column Name
TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR
Description
The sum of DR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line For Output Tax codes this is TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR. For Input Tax Codes this is TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR
Application
AR, AP, GL
TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP, GL
TAXABLE_ENTERED_AMOUNT
AR, AP, GL
Taxable Amount Debit Taxable Amount Credit Taxable Amount
TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_DR
The sum of DR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line For Output Tax codes this is TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ CR TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ DR. For Input Tax Codes this is TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ DR TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ CR
AR, AP, GL
TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_CR
AR, AP, GL
TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ AMOUNT
AR, AP, GL
Taxable1 Amount Entered Debit Taxable1 Amount Entered Credit
TAXABLE1_ENTERED_DR
The sum of DR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line
AR, AP
TAXABLE1_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
9 39
Attribute Name
Taxable1 Amount Entered Currency
Column Name
TAXABLE1_ENTERED_ AMOUNT
Description
For Output Tax codes this is TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR. For Input Tax Codes this is: TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR
Application
AR, AP
Taxable1 Amount Accounted Debit Taxable1 Amount Accounted Credit Taxable1 Amount Accounted
TAXABLE1_ACCOUNTED_DR
AR, AP
TAXABLE1_ACCOUNTED_CR
AR, AP
TAXABLE1_ACCOUNTED_ AMOUNT
AR, AP
Taxable2 Amount Entered Debit Taxable2 Amount Entered Credit Taxable2 Amount Entered Currency
TAXABLE2_ENTERED_DR
AR, AP
TAXABLE2_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
AR, AP
Taxable2 Amount Accounted Debit Taxable2 Amount Accounted Credit
The sum of DR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line
AR, AP
AR, AP
9 40
Attribute Name
Taxable2 Amount Accounted
Column Name
Description
For Output Tax codes this is TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ CR TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ DR. For Input Tax Codes this is TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ DR TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ CR
Application
AR, AP
Taxable3 Amount Entered Debit Taxable3 Amount Entered Credit Taxable3 Amount Entered Currency
TAXABLE3_ENTERED_DR
AR, AP
TAXABLE3_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
Taxable4 Amount Entered Debit
TAXABLE4_ENTERED_DR
The sum of DR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line
AR, AP
9 41
Attribute Name
Taxable4 Amount Entered Credit Taxable4 Amount Entered Currency
Column Name
TAXABLE4_ENTERED_CR
Description
The sum of CR Taxable amounts recorded for this ledger line For Output Tax codes this is TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR. For Input Tax Codes this is TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR
Application
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
9 42
Taxable Line Fields

The taxable line fields provide transaction linelevel information. These columns are available at the transaction line level.
Attribute Name
Taxable Line Number
Column Name
TAXABLE_LINE_NUMBER
Description
The Line number of the Taxable Line. This is only available for Line and Distribution level reporting. Otherwise this column is null. Identifies the Taxable Source Table name, this column is only available for Line and Distribution reports. Requested by Latin America to allow extensible reporting of the GDF and other attributes of the taxable line. Identified the Row within the Taxable Source Table, this column is only available for Line and Distribution level reports. The Line Description used to document the original Taxable document line, this column is only available for Line and Distribution level reports. For Receivable Invoices the value comes from the Invoice Line table. For Payables Invoices the value comes from the Distribution Item Description. The internal ID of the inventory item used on this invoice line. For Receivable Invoices the value comes from the Invoice Line table. The Description of the inventory item used on this invoice line. For Receivable Invoices, the value comes from the Invoice Line table.
Application
AR, AP, GL
Taxable Line Source Table
TAXABLE_LINE_SOURCE_ TABLE
AR, AP
Taxable Line Source ID
TAXABLE_ITEM_SOURCE_ID
AR, AP
Taxable Line Description
TAXABLE_LINE_DESCRIPTION
AR, AP, GL
Taxable Inventory Item ID
TAXABLE_LINE_ITEM_ID
AR
Taxable Inventory Item Flexfield
TAXABLE_LINE_ITEM_ FLEXFIELD
AR
9 43
Attribute Name
Taxable Inventory Item Desc
Column Name
TAXABLE_ITEM_ DESCRIPTION
Description
The Description of the inventory item used on this invoice line. For Receivable Invoices the value comes from the Invoice Line table. Available in Line and Distribution level reports only. The Internal lookup code for the Receivables or Payables Line Type of the Taxable document line, only available for Line and Distribution level reports. The Taxable Line Type of the Receivables or Payables line, only available for Line and Distribution level reports.
Application
AR
Taxable Line Type Code
TAXABLE_LINE_TYPE_CODE
AR, AP
Taxable Line Type
TAXABLE_LINE_TYPE_ MEANING
AR, AP
Tax Amounts The Tax Amounts columns provide the tax amount that is stored in the database. When the report is run at the transaction line level, the report sums multiple lines with same tax code. These columns are available at all summarization levels. Note: For partially recoverable tax in Oracle Payables, the Recoverable tax is held in Tax1 and the Nonrecoverable tax is held in Tax2. If the invoice had a second tax code, the Recoverable tax for the second tax code is held in Tax3 and the Nonrecoverable tax for the second tax code is held in Tax4. Note: In Oracle Receivables, the matrix columns are used when a Tax Group with multiple tax codes is assigned to a transaction.
Attribute Name
Tax Amount Entered Debit Tax Amount Entered Credit
Column Name
TAX_ENTERED_DR
Description
The sum of DR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line
Application
AR, AP, GL
TAX_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP, GL
9 44
Attribute Name
Tax Amount Entered Currency
Column Name
TAX_ENTERED_AMOUNT
Description
For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR For Input tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
Application
AR, AP, GL
Tax Amount Debit
TAX_ACCOUNTED_DR
The sum of accounted DR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line The sum of accounted CR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR For Input tax Codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP, GL
Tax Amount Credit
TAX_ACCOUNTED_CR
AR, AP, GL
Tax Amount
TAX_ACCOUNTED_AMOUNT
AR, AP, GL
Tax1 Amount Entered Debit Tax1 Amount Entered Credit Tax1 Amount Entered Currency
TAX1_ENTERED_DR
The sum of DR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR. For Input tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX1_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX1_ENTERED_AMOUNT
AR, AP
Tax1 Amount Accounted Debit
TAX1_ACCOUNTED_DR
The sum of accounted DR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line The sum of accounted CR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line
AR, AP
Tax1 Amount Accounted Credit
TAX1_ACCOUNTED_CR
AR, AP
9 45
Attribute Name
Tax1 Amount Accounted
Column Name
TAX1_ACCOUNTED_AMOUNT
Description
Application
AR, AP
TAX2_ENTERED_DR
The sum of DR amounts of Tax recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR amounts of Tax recorded for this ledger line For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR For Input tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX2_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX2_ENTERED_AMOUNT
AR, AP
TAX2_ACCOUNTED_DR
The sum of accounted DR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line The sum of accounted CR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR For Input tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX2_ACCOUNTED_CR
AR, AP
AR, AP
Tax3 Amount Entered Debit Tax3 Amount Entered Credit
TAX3_ENTERED_DR
The sum of DR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line
AR, AP
TAX3_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
9 46
Attribute Name
Tax3 Amount Entered Currency
Column Name
TAX3_ENTERED_AMOUNT
Description
Application
AR, AP
TAX3_ACCOUNTED_DR
The sum of accounted DR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line The sum of accounted CR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR For Input tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX3_ACCOUNTED_CR
AR, AP
AR, AP
TAX4_ENTERED_DR
The sum of DR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line The sum of CR amounts of tax recorded for this ledger line For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR For Input tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX4_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP
TAX4_ENTERED_AMOUNT
AR, AP
TAX4_ACCOUNTED_DR
The sum of accounted DR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line
AR, AP
9 47
Attribute Name
Column Name
TAX4_ACCOUNTED_CR
Description
The sum of accounted CR amounts, in the functional or reporting currency, of this ledger line For Output tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_CR TAX_ENTERED_DR For Input tax codes this is TAX_ENTERED_DR TAX_ENTERED_CR
Application
AR, AP
AR, AP
Tax Line The Tax Line columns provide tax amounts, tax codes and rates, and other attributes taken from the document line of type Tax. These columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Tax Line Number
Column Name
TAX_LINE_NUMBER
Description
The Line number, within the Tax Reporting Ledger, for groups or multiple taxes on an invoice. Using the Line number to identify that a given tax code is part of a multiple tax group. This is available in Transaction Line level and Distribution Line level reporting; otherwise, this column is null. The Internal ID of either the Input or Output Tax code used on this transaction Either I or O, used internally to identify the Tax Code Class as one of Input or Output. This information is already available using Tax Line Tax Code Register Type
Application
AR, AP
Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_ID ID Tax Line Tax Class Code TAX_CODE_TAX_CLASS_CODE
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
9 48
Attribute Name
Tax Line Tax Class
Column Name
TAX_CODE_TAX_CLASS_ MEANING
Description
The displayed Tax Code Class (Input, Output )
Application
AR, AP, GL
Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_RATE Rate
The Tax Code used on this transaction The tax rate setup for this tax code, this rate may not be the effective tax rate of the transaction line if limits or exceptions are applied The effective tax rate for this transaction line
Tax Line Effective Tax Rate
TAX_LINE_EFFECTIVE_TAX_ RATE
AR, AP
Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_VAT_TRX_TYPE_ VAT Trans Type Code CODE Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_VAT_TRX_TYPE_ VAT Trans Type MEANING Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_VAT_TRX_TYPE_ VAT Trans Type Desc DESC Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_REG_TYPE_CODE Register Type Code Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_REG_TYPE_ Register Type MEANING
The VAT Transaction Type internal lookup code for this Tax Code The VAT Transaction Type displayed value for this Tax Code The VAT Transaction Type description for this Tax Code The internal lookup code for the Tax Register for this Tax Register Line. The displayed value for the Tax Register for this Tax Register Line. Can be one of: Interim Input Tax Register Input Tax Register Output Tax Register Nonrecoverable Input Tax Register Nonrecoverable Output Tax Register
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
AR, AP, GL
9 49
Attribute Name
Column Name
Description
The internal lookup code of the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of tax and is based on the extensible lookup AR: TAX_TYPE. The displayed value of the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of tax. The Printed Tax Name for this Tax Code. The Description for this Tax Code Recoverable Flag The Line number, within the Tax Reporting Ledger, for groups or multiple taxes on an invoice. This is available in Transaction Line level and Distribution Line level reporting; otherwise this column is null. The Internal ID of either the Input or Output tax code used on this transaction Either I or O, used internally to identify the Tax Code Class as one either Input or Output This information is already available using Tax Line Tax Code Register Type
Application
AR, AP, GL
Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_TYPE Type Code
Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_TYPE_MEANING Type
AR, AP, GL
Tax Code
TAX_CODE_NAME
AR, AP, GL AR, AP, GL AP AR
Tax Line Tax Code TAX_CODE_DESCRIPTION Description AP Tax Line Tax Recovery Flag Tax1 Line Number AP_TAX_RECOVERABLE_FLAG TAX1_LINE_NUMBER
Tax1 Line Tax Code ID Tax1 Line Tax Class Code
TAX1_CODE_ID
AR, AP
TAX1_CODE_TAX_CLASS_ CODE
AR, AP, GL
Tax1 Line Tax Class
TAX1_CODE_TAX_CLASS_ MEANING
AR, AP, GL
Tax1 Line Tax Code
TAX1_CODE
The Tax Code used on this transaction
AR, AP
9 50
Attribute Name
Tax1 Line Tax Code Rate
Column Name
TAX1_CODE_RATE
Description
The tax rate setup for this tax code. This rate may not be the effective tax rate of the transaction line if limits or exceptions are applied The effective tax rate for this transaction line
Application
AR, AP
Tax1 Line Effective Tax Rate
TAX1_LINE_EFFECTIVE_TAX_ RATE
AR, AP
Tax1 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Code Tax1 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Tax1 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Desc Tax1 Line Tax Code Register Type Code Tax1 Line Tax Code Register Type
TAX1_CODE_VAT_TRX_TYPE_ CODE TAX1_CODE_VAT_TRX_TYPE_ MEANING TAX1_CODE_VAT_TRX_TYPE_ DESC TAX1_CODE_REG_TYPE_CODE
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
TAX1_CODE_REG_TYPE_ MEANING
AR, AP
Tax1 Line Tax Code Type Code
TAX1_CODE_TYPE
The internal lookup code of the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of tax and is based on the extensible lookup AR: TAX_TYPE.
AR, AP
9 51
Attribute Name
Tax1 Line Tax Code Type
Column Name
TAX1_CODE_TYPE_MEANING
Description
The displayed value for the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of Tax. The Printed Tax Name of this Tax Code. The Description of this Tax Code Recoverable Flag The Line number, within the Tax Reporting Ledger, for groups or multiple taxes on an invoice. This is available in Transaction Line level and Distribution Line level reporting otherwise this column is null. The Internal ID of either the Input or Output Tax code used on this transaction Either I or O, used internally to identify the Tax Code Class as one of Input or Output This information is already available using Tax Line Tax Code Register Type
Application
AR, AP
Tax1 Line Tax Code Name Tax1 Line Tax Code Description Tax1 Line Recoverable Flag Tax2 Line Number
TAX1_CODE_NAME TAX1_CODE_DESCRIPTION TAX1_RECOVERABLE_FLAG TAX2_LINE_NUMBER
AR, AP AR, AP AP AR
TAX2_CODE_ID
AR, AP
AR, AP, GL
Tax2 Line Tax Class
AR, AP, GL
Tax2 Line Tax Code Tax2 Line Tax Code Rate
TAX2_CODE TAX2_CODE_RATE
The Tax Code used on this transaction The tax rate setup for this tax code. This rate may not be the effective tax rate of the transaction line if limits or exceptions are applied The effective tax rate for this transaction line
AR, AP AR, AP
AR, AP
9 52
Attribute Name
Tax2 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Code Tax2 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Tax2 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Desc Tax2 Line Tax Code Register Type Code Tax2 Line Tax Code Register Type
Column Name
Description
Application
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
TAX2_CODE_TYPE
The internal lookup code of the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of tax and is based on the extensible lookup AR: TAX_TYPE. The displayed value for the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of Tax. The Printed Tax Name for this Tax Code. The Description for this Tax Code Recoverable Flag
AR, AP
AR, AP
Tax2 Line Tax Code Name Tax2 Line Tax Code Description Tax2 Line Recoverable Flag
TAX2_CODE_NAME TAX2_CODE_DESCRIPTION TAX2_RECOVERABLE_FLAG
AR, AP AR, AP AP
9 53
Attribute Name
Column Name
TAX3_CODE_ID
Description
The Internal ID of either the Input or Output Tax code used on this transaction Either I or O, used internally to identify the Tax Code Class as one of Input or Output This information is already available using Tax Line Tax Code Register Type
Application
AR, AP
AR, AP, GL
Tax3 Line Tax Class
AR, AP, GL
The Tax Code used on this transaction The tax rate setup for this tax code. This rate might not be the effective tax rate of the transaction line if limits or exceptions are applied. The effective tax rate for this transaction line
AR, AP AR, AP
AR, AP
Tax3 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Code Tax3 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Tax3 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Desc Tax3 Line Tax Code Register Type Code
The VAT Transaction Type internal lookup code for this Tax Code The VAT Transaction Type displayed value for this Tax Code The VAT Transaction Type description for this Tax Code The internal lookup code for the Tax Register for this Tax Register Line.
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
9 54
Attribute Name
Tax3 Line Tax Code Register Type
Column Name
Description
The displayed value for the Tax Register for this Tax Register Line. Can be one of: Interim Input Tax Register Input Tax Register Output Tax Register Nonrecoverable Input Tax Register Nonrecoverable Output Tax Register
Application
AR, AP
TAX3_CODE_TYPE
The internal lookup code of the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of tax and is based on the extensible lookup AR: TAX_TYPE. The displayed value for the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of Tax. The Printed Tax Name for this Tax Code. The Description for this Tax Code Recoverable Flag The Line number, within the Tax Reporting Ledger, for groups or multiple taxes on an invoice. This is available in Transaction Line level and Distribution Line level reporting; otherwise this column is null. The Internal ID of either the Input or Output Tax code used on this transaction
AR, AP
AR, AP
Tax3 Line Tax Code Name Tax3 Line Tax Code Description Tax3 Line Recoverable Flag Tax3 Line Number
AR, AP AR, AP AP AR
Tax4 Line Tax Code ID
TAX4_CODE_ID
AR, AP
9 55
Attribute Name
Tax4 Line Tax Class Code
Column Name
Description
Either I or O, used internally to identify the Tax Code Class as one of Input or Output This information is already available using Tax Line Tax Code Register Type
Application
AR, AP, GL
Tax4 Line Tax Class
AR, AP, GL
The Tax Code used on this transaction The tax rate setup for this tax code. This rate may not be the effective tax rate of the transaction line if limits or exceptions are applied. The effective tax rate for this transaction line
AR, AP AR, AP
AR, AP
Tax4 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Code Tax4 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Tax4 Line Tax Code VAT Trans Type Desc Tax4 Line Tax Code Register Type Code
The VAT Transaction Type internal lookup code for this Tax Code The VAT Transaction Type displayed value for this Tax Code The VAT Transaction Type description for this Tax Code The internal lookup code for the Tax Register for this Tax Register Line.
AR, AP
AR, AP
AR, AP
9 56
Attribute Name
Tax4 Line Tax Code Register Type
Column Name
Description
The displayed value for the Tax Register for this Tax Register Line. Can be one of: Interim Input Tax Register Input Tax Register Output Tax Register Nonrecoverable Input Tax Register Nonrecoverable Output Tax Register
Application
AR, AP
TAX4_CODE_TYPE
The internal lookup code of the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of tax and is based on the extensible lookup AR: TAX_TYPE. The displayed value for the Tax Type for this Tax Code. Used to provide summary totals by regimes of Tax. The Printed Tax Name of this Tax Code. The Description of this Tax Code Recoverable Flag The Line number, within the Tax Reporting Ledger, for groups or multiple taxes on an invoice. This is available in Transaction Line level and Distribution Line level reporting; otherwise, this column is null.
AR, AP
AR, AP
Tax4 Line Tax Code Name Tax4 Line Tax Code Description Tax4 Recoverable Flag Tax4 Line Number
AR, AP AR, AP AP AR
9 57
Total Amounts The total amount is the sum of the taxable and tax amounts. These columns are available at all summarization levels.
Attribute Name
Total Amount Entered Debit Total Amount Entered Credit Total Amount Entered Currency
Column Name
TOTAL_ENTERED_DR
Description
Total of TAX_ENTERED_DR and TAXABLE_ENTERED_DR Total of TAX_ENTERED_CR and TAXABLE_ENTERED_CR Total of TAX_ENTERED_AMOUNT and TAXABLE_ENTERED_ AMOUNT Total of TAX_ACCOUNTED_DR and TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ DR Total of TAX_ACCOUNTED_CR and TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ CR Total of TAX_ACCOUNTED_ AMOUNT and TAXABLE_ACCOUNTED_ AMOUNT
Application
AR, AP, GL
TOTAL_ENTERED_CR
AR, AP, GL
TOTAL_ENTERED_AMOUNT
AR, AP, GL
Total Amount Accounted Debit
TOTAL_ACCOUNTED_DR
AR, AP, GL
Total Amount Accounted Credit
TOTAL_ACCOUNTED_CR
AR, AP, GL
Total Amount Accounted
TOTAL_ACCOUNTED_ AMOUNT
AR, AP, GL
9 58
Payables Tax Line

These columns provide Payablesspecific attributes from the tax document line and are available only at the distribution line level.
Attribute Name
AP Tax Line Tax Recovery Rate AP Tax Line Merchant Document Number AP Tax Line Merchant Name
Column Name
AP_TAX_RECOVERY_RATE
Description
Records the tax recovery rate for the Taxable amount on this Tax Reporting Line The Merchant Document Number recorded on the Payables expense report The Merchant Name recorded on the Payables expense report The Merchant Reference recorded on the Payables expense report The Merchant Tax Registration Number recorded on the Payables expense report The Taxpayer ID recorded on the Payables expense report The first Country of Supply recorded on the Payables Taxable Distribution line. If this taxable amount records multiple values for Country of Supply only the first is shown
Application
AP
AP_TAXABLE_MERCHANT_ DOC_NO AP_TAXABLE_MERCHANT_ NAME
AP
AP
AP Tax Line Merchant Reference AP Tax Line Merchant Tax Registration Num AP Tax Line Merchant Taxpayer ID AP Tax Line Country of Supply
AP_TAXABLE_MERCHANT_ REFERENCE AP_TAXABLE_MERCHANT_ TAX_REG_NO AP_TAXABLE_MERCHANT_ TAXPAYER_ID AP_TAXABLE_COUNTRY_OF_S UPPLY
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP Tax Line Accounting Event ID AP Tax Line Offset Tax Code ID
AP_AE_ACCOUNTING_EVENT_ The Payables Accounting ID Event, used internally TAX_OFFSET_TAX_CODE_ID The Payables Offset Tax Code ID, used internally
AP
AP
9 59
Receivables Tax Line These columns provide Receivablesspecific attributes from the Tax Document Line and are available only at the transaction line and distribution levels.
Attribute Name
AR Tax Line Tax Exemption ID
Column Name
TAX_EXEMPTION_ID
Description
The Receivable Tax Exemption ID that was used in the calculation of the effective tax rate The Receivable Tax Exception ID that was used in the calculation of the effective tax rate The Receivable Tax Exemption Number that was used in the calculation of the effective tax rate The Receivable Tax Exemption Reason lookup code used internally in the calculation of the effective tax rate The displayed field for Tax Exemption Reason used in the calculation of the effective tax rate The sum of the Receivable Exempt amount of the invoice line(s) The sum of the Receivable Taxable + Exempt amounts for the invoice line(s) The Receivable Tax Exception Reason lookup code used internally in the calculation of the effective tax rate The displayed field for Tax Exception Reason
Application
AR
AR Tax Line Tax Exception ID
TAX_EXCEPTION_ID
AR
AR Tax Line Tax Exempt Number
TAX_EXEMPT_NUMBER
AR
AR Tax Line Tax Exempt Reason Code
TAX_EXEMPT_REASON_CODE
AR
AR Tax Line Tax Exempt Reason
TAX_EXEMPT_REASON_ MEANING
AR
AR Taxable Line Exempt Amount
TAXABLE_LINE_EXEMPT_ AMOUNT
AR
AR Taxable Line Total Amount
TAXABLE_LINE_TOTAL_ AMOUNT
AR
AR Tax Line Tax Exception Reason Code
TAX_EXCEPTION_REASON_ CODE
AR
AR Tax Line Tax Exception Reason
TAX_EXCEPTION_REASON_ MEANING
AR
9 60
Transaction Line User Descriptive Flexfield These columns provide the User Descriptive flexfield values for the transaction line. These columns are available at the transaction line and distribution line levels in Oracle Receivables. These columns are available only at the distribution line level in Oracle Payables.
Attribute Name
Tax Line User Desc Flex Category Tax Line User Desc Flex Attribute 115
Column Name
TAX_LINE_USER_CATEGORY
Description
Each of these values is included in the group by criteria when adding taxable/tax lines.
Application
AR, AP, GL
TAX_LINE_USER_ATTRIBUTE1 15
Accounting The accounting columns provide accounting details for either taxable or tax accounting entries and are available only at the transaction distribution level.
Attribute Name
Acct Event ID Acct Event Type Code
Column Name
AE_EVENT_ID AE_EVENT_TYPE_CODE
Description
The internal ID of the accounting event The accounting event type lookup code. Examples include Invoice creation, Invoice Adjustment, Payment Creation, and Payment Adjustment.
Application
AP AP
Acct Event Type
AE_EVENT_TYPE_ MEANING
The displayed accounting AP event type. Examples include Invoice creation, Invoice Adjustment, Payment Creation, and Payment Adjustment. The number of the accounting event within the document (for example, 1, 2.) AP
Acct Event Number
AE_EVENT_NUMBER
9 61
Attribute Name
Acct Event Status Code
Column Name
AE_EVENT_STATUS_ CODE
Description
The lookup code for the status of the accounting event. Examples include Error and Accounted. The Tax Extract will only collect Accounted Taxed Transactions.
Application
AP
Acct Event Status
AE_EVENT_STATUS_ MEANING
For example: Error, Accounted.
AP
Acct Event Source AE_SOURCE_TABLE Table
The table alias of the transaction table that is the source for this accounting event (for exmaple, CR for AR_CASH_RECEIPTS) The ID of the transaction table that is the source for this accounting event e.g. 100002 for the value of INVOICE_ID Internal ID The lookup code of the category of the accounting entry in the subledger The displayed Accounting Event of the Subledger Accounting Entry Indicates whether this is a cross currency accounting entry (there are accounting lines with different entered currencies) The accounting period for the accounting entry The accounting date for the accounting entry (this value defaults from accounting event) Indicates whether transfer to GL has occurred.
AP
Acct Event Source AE_SOURCE_ID ID
AP
Acct Event Header ID Acct Event Category Code Acct Event Category
AE_HEADER_ID AE_CATEGORY_CODE
AP AP
AE_CATEGORY_ MEANING
AP
Acct Cross Currency Flag
AH_CROSS_CURRENCY_ FLAG
AP
Acct Period Name Acct Date
AH_PERIOD_NAME AH_ACCOUNTING_DATE
AR, AP AR, AP
Acct GL Transfer Flag
AH_GL_TRANSFER_FLAG
AR, AP
9 62
Attribute Name
Acct GL Transfer Run ID
Column Name
AH_GL_TRANSFER_RUN_ ID
Description
This is a unique internal value assigned to a set of accounting entries that are transferred to general ledger in one transfer request. If the entry has not been transferred, this column has a value of 1. Accounting Entry Header Description
Application
AP
Acct Header Description
AH_HEADER_ DESCRIPTION
AP
Acct Line ID Acct Header ID Acct Line Number
AL_LINE_ID AL_HEADER_ID AL_LINE_NUMBER
Internal ID Internal ID of Accounting Entry Header Sequential number for accounting line within the accounting entry (for example: 1, 2, 3, 4) The internal lookup code for the line type of the accounting line (for example, Liability, Charge, IPV, Exchange Rate Variance Gain, Exchange Rate Variance Loss, Tax, Freight, Cash, or Discount). The displayed line type of the accounting line (for example: Liability, Charge, IPV, Exchange Rate Variance Gain, Exchange Rate Variance Loss, Tax, Freight, Cash, or Discount) Code Combination ID The Accounting Flexfield concatenated segments (for example, 0110010001000) The Accounting Flexfield concatenated segment descriptions
AP AP AP
Acct Line Type Code
AL_LINE_TYPE_CODE
AP
Acct Line Type
AL_LINE_TYPE_ MEANING
AP
Acct Line Code Combination ID Acct Line Account Flexfield
AL_ACCOUNT_CCID AL_ACCOUNT_ FLEXFIELD
Acct Line Account Description
AL_ACCOUNT_ DESCRIPTION
AR, AP, GL
9 63
Attribute Name
Acct Line Source Table
Column Name
AL_SOURCE_TABLE
Description
The alias of the source entity the accounting line is linked to (for example, CRH for AR_CASH_RECEIPT_) HISTORY The ID of the source entity (for example, Invoice ID , Invoice distribution ID.) Accounting Entry Line Description
Application
AR, AP
Acct Line Source ID Acct Line Description Acct Line Statistical Amount
AL_SOURCE_ID
AR, AP
AL_DESCRIPTION AL_STAT_AMOUNT
AR, AP
If statistical amounts are AR, AP enabled in your system, enter that amount in this column. This can be used for barrels of oil or any related numeric value. AP Source: ra_distributions.stat_amount GL Source: gl_lines.stat_amount AR Source: null
Acct Line Error Code Acct Line GL Transfer Code Acct Line Sub ledger Document Sequence ID
AL_ERROR_CODE
Holds the error that occurred AP for the accounting line while creating the accounting entry. Holds the error that occurred for the accounting line while transferring to GL The Internal ID of the Document Sequence Number, if applicable. The displayed Document Sequence Name, if applicable. The value of the Document Sequence Name Operating Unit of the originating organization for this accounting line. AP
AL_GL_TRANSFER_CODE
AL_SL_DOC_SEQUENCE_ ID
AP
Acct Line Sub AL_SL_DOC_SEQUENCE_ Ledger Document Sequence Name NAME Acct Line Sub AL_SL_DOC_SEQUENCE_ Ledger Document VALUE Sequence Value Acct line Organization ID AL_ORG_ID
AP
AP
AR, AP
9 64
Attribute Name
Acct Line Organization Code Acct Line Organization Name Acct Line Third Party ID Acct Line Third Party Sub ID
Column Name
AL_ORG_CODE
Description
Organization Short Name of the originating organization for this accounting line Organization Name of the originating organization for this accounting line Vendor ID or Customer ID. (only applicable to AP and AR) Vendor Site ID or Customer Site ID (only applicable to AP and AR)
Application
AR, AP
AL_ORG_NAME
AR, AP
AL_THIRD_PARTY_ID
AP
AL_THIRD_PARTY_SUB_ ID
AR, AP
Trans Control Account Balancing Segment
TRX_ARAP_BALANCING_ The Balancing Segment value AR, AP SEGMENT for each Transaction Class. This is the Liability account for AP Invoices, AP Prepayments and AP Credit Memos and the Receivable account for AR Invoices, credit/debit memos, discounts, and cash applications. For GL Manual journals this is the account of the opposite sign to the Tax entry. This might be implemented as the Company field of any tax audit report.
Trans Control Account Natural Account
TRX_ARAP_NATURAL_ ACCOUNT
The Natural Account Segment value for each Transaction Class. This is the Liability account for AP Invoices, AP Prepayments and AP Credit Memos and the Receivable account for AR Invoices, credit/debit memos, discounts, and cash applications. For GL Manual journals this is the account of the opposite sign to the Tax entry. This might be implemented as either the Receivable or Payable account of any tax audit report.
AR, AP
9 65
Attribute Name
Taxable Balancing Segment
Column Name
TRX_TAXABLE_ BALANCING_SEGMENT
Description
The comma separated balancing segments of the accounting flexfields that were posted as part of the Taxable accounting lines. The comma separated Natural account segment values of the accounting flexfields that were posted as part of the Taxable lines. The comma separated balancing segment values of the accounting flexfields that were posted as part of the Tax accounting lines. The comma separated Natural Account segment values of the accounting flexfields that were posted as part of the Tax accounting lines.
Application
AR, AP
Taxable Natural Account
TRX_TAXABLE_ NATURAL_ACCOUNT
AR, AP
Tax Line Balancing Segment
TRX_TAX_BALANCING_ SEGMENT
AR, AP
Tax Line Natural Account
TRX_TAX_NATURAL_ ACCOUNT
AR, AP
Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous columns are available at all summarization levels.

Attribute Name
Organization Name Functional Currency
Column Name
ORGANIZATION_NAME
Description
The name of the General Ledger set of books for this transaction. The functional currency code for this set of books.
Application
AR, AP, GL
FUNCTIONAL_CURRENCY_ CODE
AR, AP, GL
Reporting Set of Books Name
REPORTING_SOB_NAME
The name of the General Ledger set of books.
AR, AP, GL
9 66
See Also
Financial Tax Register: page 7 24 Tax Reporting Ledger: page 9 2 Global Descriptive Flexfields: page 9 68
9 67
Global Descriptive Flexfields

Oracle Applications store certain pieces of country or regionspecific information using Global Descriptive Flexfields (GDFs). This information is then extracted from the Global Flexfields into the Tax Reporting Ledger. This enables countries who have implemented tax information in GDFs to include this information in countryspecific formats. The naming convention for a table is done by concatenating each of the table name abbreviations with either _ATT115 or CATEGORY. For example: GDF_AP_REP_ENTITY_ATT1. The table below shows Global Descriptive Flexfield tables that are used in the Tax Reporting Ledger. For more information on Regional Global Descriptive Flexfields, see: Oracle Financials Regional Technical Reference Manual.
Table Name
AP_REPORTING_ENTITIES AR_SYSTEM_PARAMETERS HR_LOCATIONS HR_ORGANIZATION_UNITS AP_INVOICES AP_INVOICE_DISTRIBUTIONS AP_CHECKS PO_VENDORS_ALL (Shipping) PO_VENDOR_SITES_ALL (Shipping) RA_CUSTOMERS (Shipping) RA_ADDRESSES (Shipping) RA_CUSTOMERS (Shipping) RA_ADDRESSES (Shipping) AP_TAX_CODES_ALL AR_VAT_TAX RA_CUSTOMER_TRX RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES Table 9 54 (Page 1 of 2)
Abbreviation
GDF_AP_REP_ENTITIES GFF_AR_SYSTEM_PARAMS GDF_HR_LOCATIONS GDF_HR_ORG_UNITS GDF_AP_INVOICES GDF_AP_INV_DIST GDF_AP_CHECKS GDF_PO_VENDORS GDF_PO_VENDOR_SITES GDF_RA_CUSTOMERS_BILL GDF_RA_ADDRESSES_BILL GDF_RA_CUSTOMERS_SHIP GDF_RA_ADDRESSES_SHIP GDF_AP_TAX_CODES GDF_AR_TAX_CODES GDF_RA_CUST_TRX GDF_RA_CUST_TRX_LINES
9 68
Table Name
RA_CUST_TRX_TYPES AR_RECEIPT_CLASSES RA_BATCH_SOURCES Table 9 54 (Page 2 of 2)
Abbreviation
GDF_RA_CUST_TRX_TYPES GDF_AR_RECPT_CLASSES GDF_RA_BATCH_SOURCES
See Also
Financial Tax Register: page 7 24 Tax Reporting Ledger: page 9 2 Tax Reporting Ledger Column Descriptions: page 9 24
9 69
9 70
CHAPTER
10
Tax Calculation
his chapter describes how Oracle Receivables calculates either value added tax (VAT) or sales tax using the system and profile options that you define. It also explains how the system uses tax codes, tax groups, inclusive tax, tax exceptions, and tax exemptions.
Tax Calculation
10 1
Calculating Tax
Receivables gives you the flexibility to implement tax solutions for Value Added Tax (VAT) or Sales Tax systems. When calculating VAT, tax codes are assigned to customers, sites, and inventory items. These tax codes are then used to control which VAT rate is applied to each invoice. When calculating Sales Tax, the Customers shipto address and any predefined exceptions are used to control which Sales Tax rate to apply to the invoice. Both methods will take into account any customer and item exemptions you have defined. Following are some of the major features of the Receivables tax engine. Calculate Tax Based on Location Receivables can calculate tax based on different components of your customers shipping addresses for all addresses in your home country. To calculate sales tax, you choose a Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure that includes the components you want Receivables to use when calculating tax. For example, in the United States sales tax is usually calculated by adding the tax rates assigned to the shipping state, county, and city. Calculate Tax Based on Codes Receivables can also calculate tax based on tax rates you assign to user definable codes. These tax codes can then be assigned to specific items, customers, and customer sites. For example, in many parts of Europe, tax depends on the item and is called Value Added Tax (VAT). Tax codes can also be used in a locationbased tax system. Calculate Tax Based on Revenue Account You can set up your system to derive your tax code from the Account segment of your Revenue account. If you set up your system this way, Receivables will use this tax code as the default when you enter or import transactions. You can also set up your system to ensure that the default tax code is always derived from your Revenue account. Calculate Tax Externally Receivables can integrate external tax calculation programs using the Tax Vendor Extension. This lets you provide for complex tax calculation needs while retaining the full power of Receivables to create and store all other tax data.
10 2
Compound Tax Receivables lets you create compound tax charges during invoice entry and import if the Compound Taxes system option is set to Yes. You can assign precedence numbers to indicate which tax line you want Receivables to compound. Credit Tax When you credit a transaction that was previously taxed, Receivables will automatically credit the original taxed amount, so you do not need to consider any change in tax rates which may have occurred in the interim. Calculate Multiple Tax Rates Receivables lets you assign multiple tax rates and tax accounts to each invoice line. You might want to distribute your tax amounts to different accounts for reporting purposes. Create Tax Groups Define tax groups to apply multiple taxes to a transaction or line item. Within each tax group, you can include one or more tax codes that Receivables applies based on the transactions Ship To location. Create Tax Exemptions Tax exemptions let you fully or partially exempt specific customers or items from tax. You can use exemptions in either a VAT or location based tax system. You can define exemptions either at the customer or item level, or specify them at the regional levels. For example, you could create an exemption for a customer such that the customer is always exempt from tax or is exempt only in the state of California. Create Tax Exceptions Tax exceptions are special tax rates that are assigned to items being shipped to specific addresses. Tax exceptions are only used when you are calculating locationbased tax (that is, your Location Flexfield Structure is State.County.City). You can create an exception for specific items and shipping destinations.
Tax Calculation
10 3
Inclusive Tax Receivables lets you enter and display transaction lines either inclusive or exclusive of tax. Tax inclusive indicates that the line amount for an item includes the tax for this item. Tax exclusive indicates that tax is not included in the line amount for this item. You can define both tax inclusive and exclusive tax codes in the Tax Codes and Rates window.
See Also
Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 38 Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Implementing the Tax Vendor Extension: page 8 29 Tax Groups: page 6 20 Integrating Receivables Applications Tax Information Using Sales Tax Rate Interface: page 8 2 Tax Exemptions: page 6 16 Tax Rate Exceptions: page 6 26 Importing Tax Lines (Oracle Receivables User Guide) US Sales Tax Reconciliation: page 3 23 Tax Inclusive: page 10 26
10 4
Overview of Calculating Tax

The following flowcharts show the hierarchy Receivables uses to calculate tax. Use the flowchart titled Tax Method = Sales Tax if you are using a Sales or locationbased tax system. Use the flowchart titled Tax Method = Value Added Tax if you are using a VAT or tax codebased system. When using either the Sales Tax or Value Added Tax (VAT) method, Receivables uses the ShipTo address on your invoice to determine whether it has rates available for the components of the Sales Tax Location flexfield. If a ShipTo address does not exist for a transaction, Receivables derives tax from the BillTo information. For example, if a transaction has a ShipTo customer, but no ShipTo address, Receivables uses the BillTo information along with the appropriate hierarchy to determine the tax.
Attention: You will notice that there is a table associated with each tax hierarchy. They show which system options you can set to let you skip certain levels of the hierarchy when determining your tax. For more information, see: Setting Up Tax: An Overview: page 10 9.
System Options for Sales Tax

Tax Defaulting System Options Enforce Tax from Revenue Account Customer Site Customer Product Revenue Account System Options Tax Code Exception Rates System Options Use Customer Exemptions Use Item Exemptions Use Item Tax Rate Exceptions
Hierarchy
No 1 2 3 No No Null (display only) Value Yes Yes Yes
Tax Calculation
10 5
Figure 10 1 Calculating Tax Sales Tax Method
10 6
Figure 10 2 Calculating Tax VAT Method
Tax Calculation
10 7
System Options for VAT

Tax Defaulting System Options Enforce Tax from Revenue Account Customer Site Customer Product Revenue Account System Options Tax Code Exception Rates System Options Use Customer Exemptions Use Exemptions Use Item Tax Rate Exceptions
Hierarchy
No* 1 2 3 No* No* (Enter your standard rate of VAT) Value Yes Yes No
* Unless you implement Account Method VAT. See: Setup Steps for Value Added Tax: page 2 11.
See Also
Setting Up Tax: An Overview: page 10 9 Calculating Tax: page 10 16 Tax Reports: page 7 2 Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 38
10 8
Setting Up Tax: An Overview

This section discusses the options you can set up to determine how Receivables calculates tax. For a stepbystep guide to setting up Receivables for a VAT or Sales Tax system, see: Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6 and Implementing US Sales Tax: page 3 2. For information about setting up Receivables for a Canadian sales tax system, see: Implementing Canadian Sales Tax: page 4 2. Disabling Tax You can disable the calculation and accounting of tax within Receivables, Oracle Order Management, and Oracle Sales by setting the Tax Calculation flag for your transaction type to No. See: Transaction Types in the Oracle Receivables User Guide.
System Options
Tax Method Receivables calculates tax differently depending on the tax method you choose. You can choose either VAT or Sales Tax. To see how tax is calculated for each method, refer to the tax calculation flowcharts in Overview of Calculating Tax: page 10 5. System Level Tax Code If your tax method is VAT, you can enter a default tax code in the System Options window. Receivables will use this value, or the tax code defined at the item, customer, or customer site level, according to the tax hierarchy that you define. For more information, see: Tax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide and the tax flowcharts in Overview of Calculating Tax: page 10 5. Tax Location Flexfield Structure Receivables uses your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure to determine your sales tax rates and to validate your customer addresses. Receivables can calculate tax based on different components of your customers shipping addresses for all addresses in your home country. For example, in the United States sales tax is usually calculated by adding the tax rates assigned to the shipping state, county, and city. If your business is in the US, you would then choose a Location Flexfield Structure of State.County.City.
Tax Calculation
10 9
For more information, refer to the Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure and Address Validation vs. Sales Tax Calculation sections in Calculating Tax: page 10 16. Tax Defaults and Rules You can control how Receivables determines the default tax code or Tax Group for your transactions by specifying a defaulting hierarchy in the System Options window. In a VAT system, you would typically set up your system to derive the tax code first from the customer site, then the customer, the item, and finally the system options level, stopping when one is found. In a US Sales Tax system, you might choose to only derive tax codes from the customer and customer site levels for your export transactions. You can also set up Receivables to derive a tax code from the Account segment of your Revenue account and, depending upon your tax compliance requirements, optionally enforce this relationship when entering transactions. For more information, see: Tax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. Use Item Tax Rate Exceptions You can prevent Receivables from looking at exception rates by not checking this check box. Exception rates are only used when your Location Flexfield Structure is State.County.City and this box is checked. For more information, see: Item Exceptions: page 10 22 in the Calculating Tax essay. Use Customer and Product Exemptions You can prevent Receivables from looking at customer and product exemptions by not enabling these options. For more information, see: Item and Customer Exemptions: page 10 23 in the Calculating Tax essay. Suggestion: If you never use either customer tax codes, customer site tax codes, tax exceptions, or tax exemptions, we suggest you set the appropriate system options to No, as this may improve the performance of the Receivables tax engine. You can disable these options in the Tax tabbed region of the System Options window.
10 10
Tax Rounding You can specify how you want Receivables to calculate your tax amounts by entering Tax Rounding system options. You can choose to round tax calculations at the line or header level, specify a rounding rule, a minimum accountable unit, and the number of decimal places to display. You specify your tax rounding options in the Rounding Options region of the System Options window. Tax Accounting You can set up Receivables to calculate tax on adjustments, discounts, finance charges, and miscellaneous transactions. Receivables automatically accounts for the tax using the accounting information you define for your Receivables Activities and tax codes. For each activity, Receivables automatically creates entries in the revenue, expense, and nonrecoverable tax accounts that you specify and creates all associated payment schedules. You can also set up Receivables to use deferred tax, an accounting method in which the tax is deferred until payment for goods or services is received, rather than when the transaction is created. See: Tax Accounting: page 5 2.
Profile Options
Tax: Allow Ad Hoc Tax Changes Choose whether you can update rates and amounts assigned to tax codes in the Lines window of the Transaction workbench. This is only applicable to tax codes defined in the Tax Codes and Rates window (of type Sales or VAT) that have the Ad Hoc flag set to Yes. Ad hoc changes are not permitted for tax codes of type Location. Tax: Allow Manual Tax Lines Choose whether to prevent the entry of manual tax lines in the Transactions window. You might want to restrict this, for example, if you have an outside tax vendor installed and the vendor manages tax audits. Additionally, if this profile is set to No, Receivables does not let you delete systemgenerated tax lines. However, you can navigate to the Tax window to review systemgenerated lines.
Tax Calculation
10 11
Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions Choose whether to override the standard tax calculations during invoice entry and import. By setting this profile option to Yes, you can access the Tax Handling field in the Lines window and specify how you want to handle exemptions for each of your transaction lines. Enter Standard if you want Receivables to use whatever tax rates, exceptions, and exemptions assigned to that customer or site to calculate tax for this transaction line. Enter Exempt to force tax exemptions on your transaction lines. To force tax exemptions, the system option Use Customer Exemptions must be set to Yes. You can reference an exemption that has already been defined or create an Unapproved exemption. This option also lets you override standard tax when importing invoices via AutoInvoice. Enter Require in the Tax Handling field to require tax on your transaction lines. Tax: Allow Override of Tax Code Choose whether to prevent update of the tax code in the Lines window for automatically generated tax lines. If you override a systemderived tax code, Receivables uses the rate and amount assigned to the new tax code to determine the tax for the transaction. Tax: Calculate Tax on Credit Memos Choose whether to automatically calculate tax on credit memos imported using AutoInvoice. By default, Receivables uses the payment applications and the line, tax, and freight amounts to calculate tax. If this profile option is Yes, tax for each credit memo is calculated without taking into account the outstanding balances. This flexibility is required for installations that support partial payments and is useful for implementations that integrate third party tax ledgers using the Tax Vendor Extension. Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue If you are using Oracle Order Management, this profile option determines how Order Management imports freight amounts to Receivables when you run the Receivables Interface program. If this profile option is Yes, Oracle Order Management will create a transaction line for the freight amount identified in the Ship Confirm window. Set this profile option to Yes if you are integrating with Oracle Order Management and are required to tax freight amounts. If this profile
10 12
option is No, Receivables will create a line item on the invoice using the inventory item name. Tax: Inventory Item for Freight This profile option lets Oracle Order Management identify an inventory item on a transaction line that you import into Receivables via the Receivables Interface program. The inventory item that you identify when defining this profile option must be created with a user type of Freight. After you identify an inventory item for freight, you can use tax codes assigned to this inventory item or item exceptions to control the applicable tax rates and accounting for freight service. Use this profile option if you need to control the rate of tax applied to freight and you have set the profile option Tax: Invoice Freight as Revenue to Yes. Tax: Use Tax Vendor This profile option allows your system administrator to control which users can call an installed third party application for tax calculations. This is required in multiple organization installations in which one set of executables is shared across many different tax compliance requirements. The default value is Yes; this indicates that you can call a third party application to calculate tax. See: Implementing the Tax Vendor Extension: page 8 29. Tax Taxware: Service Indicator If the Taxware Sales/Use Tax System is your tax vendor, define this profile option to define your service indicator. Taxware uses the service indicator to identify the taxability in jurisdictions where the taxability differs according to the service indicator. Choose Service, Rental, or Nonservice. Tax Taxware: Tax Selection Parameter If the Taxware Sales/Use Tax System is your tax vendor, define this profile option to control whether jurisdictionlevel jurisdiction codes should be used when calculating taxes. Accept the default value, Tax Only, to calculate tax based on the shipto address. Choose Jurisdiction and Tax to calculate tax based on the shipto, shipfrom, point of order acceptance, and point of order origin information.
Tax Calculation
10 13
Tax Taxware: Tax Type If the Taxware Sales/Use Tax System is your tax vendor, define this profile option to identify the default tax type for transactions that are passed to Taxware from Receivables. Taxware uses the tax type to determine how to calculate tax in jurisdictions in which tax calculations are different depending on the tax type. Choose Sales, Service, or Use. Tax Taxware: Use Nexpro This profile option determines whether you use Nexpro, a function of the Taxware Sales/Use Tax System. Accept the default value of Yes if Taxware is your tax vendor; otherwise, set this profile option to No. Tax: Use PL/SQL Vendor This profile option determines the tax vendor to use in a multiple organization environment when multiple tax vendors are installed. Choose either Taxware or Vertex. Tax Vertex: Use Secondary Taxes If Vertex Quantum is your tax vendor, this profile option indicates whether secondary taxes should be returned to Oracle Receivables. If you do not use Vertex Quantum, Receivables ignores this profile option.
Transaction Types
The value of the Tax Calculation option for your transaction type determines whether Receivables will automatically calculate tax on your transactions. If this option is set to No, Receivables does not calculate tax on this transaction. However, you can still enter tax manually if the profile option Tax: Allow Manual Tax Lines is set to Yes. This option also determines whether tax is required on an invoice. If the Tax Calculation option for your transaction type is set to Yes, you cannot complete an invoice if each of your invoice lines does not have a tax line. If Receivables cannot automatically generate a tax line (because it cannot find an appropriate rate, for example), then you can manually enter one as long as your profile option AR: Allow Manual Tax Lines is set to Yes. The following table describes how the Tax Calculation option works with your tax profile options to determine the appropriate taxing requirements for your transactions.
10 14
Tax Calculation Field NO Tax will not be calculated automatically. Tax is not required. YES Tax will be calculated automatically. Tax is required.
Manual Tax Entry Enter manual tax lines if Tax: Allow Manual Tax Lines = Yes. Update tax rates and amounts if the tax code allows ad hoc changes and Tax: Allow Ad Hoc Tax Changes = Yes. Enter additional, manual tax lines if Tax: Allow Manual Tax Lines = Yes. Update tax rates and amounts if the tax code allows ad hoc changes and Tax: Allow Ad Hoc Tax Changes = Yes. Update tax codes if Tax: Allow Override of Tax Codes = Yes.
Tax Calculation by Receivables If Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions = Yes, require tax by choosing Required in the Tax field of the Transaction window, or importing the line as Required via AutoInvoice If Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions = Yes, force an exemption by choosing Exempt in the Tax field of the Transaction window, or importing the line as Exempt via AutoInvoice.
See Also
Setting Up Tax: page 10 9 Tax System Options (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Calculating Tax: page 10 16 Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 38 Overview of Receivables User Profile Options (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Transaction Types (Oracle Receivables User Guide)
Tax Calculation
10 15
Calculating Tax
The following section discusses Receivables features that are related to tax processing. Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure Receivables uses your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure to determine your sales tax rates and to validate your customer addresses. Use the list of values to select a Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure in the Location Flexfield Structure field of the System Options window. The following Sales Tax Location Flexfield structures have been predefined. These structures are named according to the location segments they contain: State.County.City . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended for US Sales Tax This structure provides the most accurate US Sales Tax calculation. No Validation Country . . . . . Recommended for VAT The country field of an address is always required and defaulted from either the home country defined in the system options window or the Default Country profile option. This structure is most useful for VAT systems, where locations do not need to be validated for the purposes of calculating tax. State.City This structure can be used for US Sales Tax calculation, but may result in inaccurate taxes, as County tax rates would need to be rolled into either State or City rates. City This structure can be used if you wish to validate just the City component of an address. Province This structure can be used if you wish to validate just the Province component of an address. Province.City This structure can be used in Canadian implementations for tax calculation and in some European countries for address validation. Each segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure is dependent upon its immediate parent, except for the most senior
10 16
segment. For example, if you are using the seeded structure State.County.City, State is the most senior segment, it is the parent of County, and County is the parent of City. You can use any of the structures listed above or create your own structure to implement sales tax. However, we recommend the State.County.City structure because it is specifically designed for a US sales tax system. Caution: If you select State.City or any structure other than State.County.City as your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, be aware that this could result in inaccurate calculation of tax rates. Sales tax calculation in the US is based on the customer address with State, County, and City being the minimum requirement. You can also define your own structure using any combination of state, county, city, province, postal code, and address. Refer to the Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure section of the Calculating Tax Essay. See: Calculating Tax: page 10 2.
Attention: You cannot update your location flexfield structure once you have entered customer addresses or transactions. Note: It is a recommended accounting practice to ensure that the sales tax liability owed to each state is uniquely identifiable within the General Ledger. To setup a different tax account for each state you will need to assign the tax account qualifier to the state segment, which is the default for both the State.County.City and State.City structures.
Locations If you want to calculate sales tax, you must define locations and the associated tax rates for each segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. For example, if one of the segments of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure is based on county, you must define all of your valid counties and assign tax rates to each one. If you only want to validate your customer addresses, you must define locations for each segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure but you need not assign rates to these locations. Receivables uses these locations to validate your customer addresses. You can either use the Tax Locations and Rates window to enter this information manually or the Sales Tax Rate Interface program to load your locations and associated tax rates from an external source. See: Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7.
Tax Calculation
10 17
Authorities Authorities are unique combinations of locations and are used to expedite the calculation of sales tax. For example, if your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure is composed of state, county and city and you enter a customer address where state is California, county is San Mateo and city is Redwood City, Receivables creates the following authority: CaliforniaSan MateoRedwood City. You can enter Authorities manually, through the Tax Authority window, as long as the locations for these authorities exist. However, the more common way of creating authorities is when you enter a customers address. When you enter a customers address, Receivables first checks to see if an authority already exists for this address. If an authority exists, Receivables uses the tax rates associated with each location to create a sales tax rate for the authority. If the authority exists but there are no tax rates associated with each location, the total tax rate for the authority cannot be calculated. If you try to use this authority (for example, to enter an invoice), Receivables displays a message that tax rates cannot be found for your customers address. If an authority does not exist, Receivables checks to see if locations exist for this address. If locations exist, Receivables creates the authority. If tax rates exist for each location, Receivables also creates the authority sales tax rate. If the locations do not exist, Receivables checks your Address Validation system option to see if it should either create the locations or display an error. Receivables only creates authorities that exist within your home country. For example, if you set up your sales tax system to handle business in the United States and then you enter addresses in a foreign country, Receivables does not create locations, authorities, or sales tax records for these foreign locations. See: Tax Authorities: page 6 14. Sales Tax Rates Receivables calculates sales tax rates for each authority by summing all of the tax rates associated with each location included in the authority. For example, if your authority is CaliforniaSan MateoRedwood City and California is 6%, San Mateo is 1%, and Redwood City is 1/2%, the sales tax rate for this authority is 7 1/2%. You can review these rates in the Review Sales Tax Rates window. See: Reviewing Sales Tax Rates: page 6 12.
10 18
If you enter tax rates in the Tax Locations and Rates window for locations that already exist and are used by authorities, Receivables creates new sales tax records for this authority. The number of sales tax records that are created depends on the unique intersection of the date and postal code ranges that you assign to each location in your authority. The following example demonstrates the method that Receivables uses to create sales tax records for your customer addresses. In this example, CA is the state of California, San Mateo is a county within California, and Foster City and Belmont are cities within San Mateo county. You have the following locations and rate assignments defined in Receivables:
Segment Value CA CA CA San Mateo San Mateo Foster City Belmont
From Zip 96199 85364 90000 00000 00000 94063 94065
To Zip 961999999 899999999 949999999 999999999 999999999 940659999 940699999
Start Date 15JUL90 15JUL90 15JUL90 07JUL88 01JAN91 01JAN91 01JAN90
End Date 31DEC90 31JAN91 31JAN91 31JAN91
Tax Rate 6.25% 6.25% 6.25% 0% 2% 1% 0%
When you enter and save these locations and their rate assignments, Receivables generates the following sales tax rate records:
Authority CA.San Mateo. Foster City From Zip 94063 To Zip 940659999 Start Date 01Jan91 End Date 31Jan91 Tax Rate 6.25+2+1
Tax Calculation
10 19
Authority CA.San Mateo. Belmont CA.San Mateo. Belmont
From Zip 94065
To Zip 940699999
Start Date 15Jul90
End Date 31DEC90
Tax Rate 6.25+0+0
94065
940699999
01Jan91
31Jan91
6.25+2+0
Note: If any one of the segments does not have a tax rate assigned to it, then no sales tax rate will be available for the tax authority. For example, if the County: San Mateo does not have a rate assigned to it, then the tax authority: CASAN MATEOFOSTER CITY will not have a tax rate assigned to it. Sales Tax Rate Overrides You can use the override rates feature to reduce the total tax liability for a given tax authority on a city by city basis. When entering your City rate assignments in the Tax Locations and Rates window, the Override Sales Tax Rates Flexfield will pop and allow you to enter full and partial Override rates for the segments above the City segment. If you are using a State.County.City.Zip structure, when you are assigning city rates to any State.County combination you can override either or both of the State and County rates for that City. However, you cannot override the Zip rate as this is below the City segment in your structure.
Attention: If you wish to use the override feature you must include City in your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure.
Address Validation Versus Sales Tax Calculation Receivables cannot determine sales tax for customer addresses that are missing values for taxing locations. For example, if you use State.County.City as your sales tax structure, you must have these values for each customer address in your home country to ensure that location based taxation will function properly. This is why every component of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure is mandatory during entry of addresses in your home Country, no matter what your Address Validation system option is set to, or what Tax Method you are
10 20
using. The Address Validation system option only refers to the validation of the values that are entered. If you are implementing a VAT system and do not wish to calculate tax nor validate addresses, you can choose the No Validation Country Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure which requires that only the country is entered. In this case, Receivables derives the default country from the Default Country system option. You may also implement Flexible Address Formats for country specific validation of customer address information. Refer to the Flexible Address Formats essay for more details. Tax Codes Use tax codes to provide the initial tax rates, calculation, and accounting for your transactions. Receivables requires that you assign a tax code to each tax line. You can define tax rates that are associated with specific tax codes. These tax codes can then be assigned to items, customers, or customer sites. Tax codes have a type of VAT or Sales and are generally used when calculating Value Added Tax or for setting up specific tax codes for Sales Tax. You must define a tax code of type Location if your Tax Method is Sales Tax. You can only have one tax code of type Location defined for any given date range. If your Tax Method is VAT, use the Tax Rounding tabbed region in the System Options window to define how Receivables calculates your VAT amounts. You can choose to round VAT calculations at the line or header level, specify a rounding method, and the number of decimal places to display. Receivables calculates VAT once per VAT rate, per document. If your Tax Method is VAT, you can also specify a default tax code (or tax group) in the Tax tabbed region of the System Options window. Receivables uses this value, or the tax code defined at the item, customer, or customer site level, according to the tax hierarchy that you define. See: Tax System Options in the Oracle Receivables User Guide. When using either a VAT or Sales Tax based system, you may want to calculate tax on transactions in your home country, but not on all international transactions. AutoInvoice and Invoice Entry will give an error during validation if tax cannot be calculated and your transaction type requires tax.
Tax Calculation
10 21
You can avoid getting these errors if you do not require tax on the transaction types for international transactions. Alternatively, you can assign a zero rated tax code to all international sites for which you do not wish to calculate tax. The tax code allows a tax line to be created for the transaction with a zero tax amount, and therefore enables the transaction to pass validation. At the same time, transactions for sites in your home country, or for foreign sites which have a nonzero rated tax code, will have the correct amount of tax calculated. Tax Codes with Location Based Tax During invoice entry and import, Receivables will automatically calculate tax from either tax codes or locations. If you wish to have tax calculated from both tax codes and locations, you should set your Tax Method to Sales Tax. If you wish to use both tax calculation methods for the same customers, you can let Receivables calculate your Sales Tax automatically, then manually enter or import tax codes on your invoice lines to calculate additional taxes. Alternatively, you can assign specific tax codes to customers for whom you wish to calculate tax based on tax codes only. Receivables uses the tax code hierarchy that you defined in the System Options window to see if any tax codes are assigned to your customers, customer sites, inventory items, or at the system options level. If tax codes exist, Receivables will use these to derive the tax rates; if not, it will derive the tax from the address. This algorithm is best described in the Tax Hierarchy diagrams earlier in this essay. See: Overview of Calculating Tax: page 10 5.
Attention: To implement VAT you must assign tax codes to your inventory items. To implement sales tax you should not assign tax codes to your inventory items, as this will override the calculation of locationbased tax on the transaction. For this reason we advise that you do not implement VAT and Sales Tax in one installation of Receivables.
Item Exceptions Receivables lets you associate a specific tax rate with an item being shipped to a specific address. Item exceptions are only used when calculating tax based on location and will override all other tax rates associated with that location. To use item tax rate exceptions your Location Flexfield Strructure must be State.County.City.
10 22
Using the location flexfield in the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window, you can define item exceptions for any component of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield. For example, you can define an exception for a particular item when shipped anywhere in California, or only in the city of San Francisco. Additionally, you can specify which rates you wish to override for that item using the rate flexfield in this window. See: Tax Rate Exceptions: page 6 26. Item and Customer Exemptions Receivables lets you fully or partially exempt a particular item or customer from a specific tax code and/or taxing location. For example, you might have customers that are exempt from paying tax, such as the US Government. You can define exemptions in the Tax Exemptions window, either at the customer or item level. Additionally, exemptions can be restricted at regional levels. Thus you could create an exemption for a billto customer, such that they are always exempt from tax or exempt only when shipping to the state of California. When you enter or import an invoice, Receivables checks to see if any exemptions exist for the customer or item. If it finds such exemptions with a status of Primary, Receivables will automatically use the tax exemption. Receivables does not use any exemptions with a status Manual or Unapproved unless you explicitly enter the exemption. Receivables searches for tax exemptions using the billto customer, transaction date and tax code on a transaction. To determine the level at which the exemption is defined, Receivables will search in the following order and stop as soon as one is found: Specific shipto location Each tax authority location, starting with the lowest level. Billto customer with no specific location. For example, when searching for exemptions for a transaction that has ABC Inc. as the billto customer and ABC Co. as the shipto; Receivables will search as follows: It will use Customer ABC Inc. along with the transaction date and tax code as a basis for the search. When determining the location at which the exemption has been created, Receivables will first search for exemptions defined for the shipto site, ABC Co.; if no exemptions are found, it will search at each level of the Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure
Tax Calculation
10 23
starting with the lowest level, for example, city, county, and lastly state; if no exemptions are found, Receivables will search for exemptions for the billto customer only with no specific location. See: Tax Exemptions: page 6 16. Note: If you choose to Require tax at invoice entry or import, this will override any predefined exemptions.

Attention: If you know that an exemption is due to expire, we recommend that you simply add an end date rather than changing the status. If you change the exemption status to Expired, then wish to view historical orders later, the exemption will not show because the status is no longer current. Attention: The tax engine ignores any customer or item exemptions assigned to ad hoc tax codes. An exemption is also no longer valid if, after defining the exemption, you change the tax code from nonad hoc to ad hoc.
If your profile and system options permit, you can force exemptions at the time of invoice entry or import. This can be done by either picking an existing exemption or creating an exemption with a status of Unapproved. You can use the Tax Exemptions window to update the status to Primary if you want Receivables to continue to use this exemption automatically when calculating tax. You can set it to Manual if you want to be able to control when this exemption will be used. You can reject an exemption created during invoice entry or import, by setting its status to Rejected. Also, you can discontinue exemptions that were previously approved by either adding an end date or changing the status to Expired. Once an exemption has a status of Rejected or Expired, the status can no longer be updated. Suggestion: Add an end date to discontinue an exemption, rather than setting the status to Expired. This provides a better audit trail of the validity dates for the exemption. Use the table below to identify how exemption statuses can be updated: Current Status Unapproved Manual Primary
Possible New Statuses Primary, Manual, Rejected, Expired Primary, Expired Manual, Expired
10 24
Current Status Expired Rejected

Possible New Statuses No Change Allowed No Change Allowed
Suggestion: If you want to control who can create unapproved exemptions, you can set the profile option Tax: Allow Override of Customer Exemptions for the appropriate users. TaxOnly Invoices You might create a taxonly invoice, for example, to collect tax payable subsequent to an audit. You can create taxonly invoices for both VAT and Sales Tax systems. To create the taxonly invoice, enter an invoice with a line amount equal to zero. Then, navigate to the tax window for this line and enter your tax line using an ad hoc tax code. The ad hoc tax code will enable you to change the amount of tax calculated from zero to the amount you require. You can also change the tax accounts for this tax line as required. You can only create taxonly invoices manually in the Transactions window if both the Tax: Allow Ad Hoc Changes and Tax: Allow Manual Lines profile options are set to Yes. Tax Groups Use tax groups to apply multiple taxes to transactions or invoice line items. A tax group is a group of tax codes in which each code represents a specific tax rate and general ledger account for posting. By assigning a tax group, you can apply more than one tax rate based on the transactions ship to location. See: Tax Groups: page 6 20.
See Also
Setting Up Tax: page 10 9 Tax Reports: page 7 2
Tax Calculation
10 25
Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Tax Locations and Rates: page 6 7 Tax Exemptions: page 6 16 Importing Tax Lines (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 34 Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 38
Tax Inclusive
Receivables lets you enter and display transaction lines either inclusive or exclusive of tax. Tax inclusive indicates that the line amount for an item includes the tax for this item. Tax exclusive indicates that tax is not included in the line amount for this item. When you enter a transaction line, Receivables uses the tax code default hierarchy in the System Options window to determine the appropriate tax code. If the customer, customer site, item, or standard line is assigned to a tax inclusive tax code or tax group, Receivables automatically includes the tax for this line in the line amount. In the Receivables Lines window, the Amount Includes Tax poplist indicates whether the line amount includes tax. The Amount Includes Tax poplist indicates whether a tax code is inclusive or exclusive. If it is a tax group, the poplist displays Tax Code and you cannot change it. You can define inclusive and exclusive tax codes in the Tax Codes and Rates window. You can define inclusive and exclusive tax groups in the Tax Groups window. Receivables windows that can display tax inclusive line amounts include: Credit Transactions Transaction Lines Tax Transaction Overview
10 26
Calculating Inclusive Tax

Receivables uses the following formula to calculate the taxable amount for inclusive tax codes:
Amount (1 + Tax Rate)
=
Taxable Amount
For example: Invoice 101 = $100 Tax Rate = 10%

100 (1 + 0.1) 90.91
=
Taxable Amount
Taxable Amount
Since the taxable amount for Invoice 101 is $90.91, the inclusive tax amount is $9.91 (90.91 x .1).
See Also
Tax Codes and Rates: page 6 2 Tax Groups: page 6 20 Entering Transactions (Oracle Receivables User Guide) Accounting for Inclusive and Exclusive Taxes: page 10 28
Tax Calculation
10 27
Accounting for Inclusive and Exclusive Taxes

When you create a transaction line that does not include tax (tax exclusive), Receivables creates an entry in your Revenue account that is equal to the line amount. However, when you create a transaction line that includes tax, the revenue amount does not equal the line amount (this is because the line amount includes the tax for this line). Therefore, when creating accounting entries for tax inclusive lines, AutoAccounting deducts the tax amount from each line and creates a separate entry for each line and tax amount. For example, the following invoice has both inclusive and exclusive taxes:
Line Number and Tax Code Line 1 Tax 1.1 @ 10% Inclusive Tax 1.2 @ 20% Exclusive Tax 1.3 @ 5% Exclusive Line 2 Tax 2.1 @ 3% Inclusive Line 3 Tax 3.1 @ 5% Exclusive Invoice Total: Amount 110.00 10.00 20.00 5.00 206.00 6.00 300.00 15.00 656.00
Table 10 5 (Page 1 of 1) Accounting for Tax Inclusive/

Exclusive Amounts
AutoAccounting will create the following accounting entries for this invoice: Account Receivables Revenue for line 1 Tax 1.1 Tax 1.2 Tax 1.3 DR 656.00 100.00 10.00 20.00 5.00 CR
10 28
Revenue for line 2 Tax 2.1 Revenue for line 3 Tax 3.1
200.00 6.00 300.00 15.00
As shown in this example, AutoAccounting automatically subtracts the tax amount from each tax inclusive line, then creates separate accounting entries for each invoice line and its corresponding tax amount.
See Also
Implementing Value Added Tax: page 2 6 Implementing Canadian Sales Tax: page 4 2
Compounding Tax Codes in a Tax Group

You can compound tax (calculate tax on tax) by creating a tax group and specifying a precedence number for each tax code in the group. When you assign a tax group to a transaction, the tax engine selects each tax code in the group according to the precedence number specified. You can also set up multiple independent branches of compounded tax lines within a group to perform complex tax calculations according to your business needs.
Example 1
The tax group shown in Figure 10 3 contains two independent tax compounding branches and two tax codes within each branch. You create an invoice for $100.00 and assign it to this tax group. Note: The numbered circles represent the precedence numbers assigned to each tax code in the tax group.
Tax Calculation
10 29
Figure 10 3 Compounding Tax in a Tax Group
The tax engine uses the tax code assigned to precedence number 1 to calculate tax of $10.00 (10% x 100.00). Then, based on the new taxable amount of $110.00, the tax engine uses the tax code assigned to precedence number 1.1 to calculate tax of 1.10 (1% x 110.00). Therefore, the total tax for lines 1 and 1.1 is $11.10. The tax engine then applies the tax codes assigned to precedence numbers 2 and 2.1 to the original taxable amount in the same manner. The total tax for lines 2 and 2.1 is $22.40. Finally, it adds the total tax for the two branches to the original invoice amount for a total invoice amount of $133.50.
Example 2
The Tax Group in this example contains multiple exclusive tax codes with duplicate precedence numbers. As in the previous example, the numbered circles represent the precedence numbers assigned to each tax code.
10 30
Figure 10 4 Duplicate Precedence Numbers in a Tax Group
Calculating Tax on Prior Tax in a Tax Group

You can calculate tax on a prior tax amount within a tax group by defining a tax code and specifying a Taxable Basis of Prior Tax. Use this option to calculate tax on the tax amount that immediately precedes a tax code, rather than the transaction amount and other tax lines in the group. For example, you have an invoice for $100,000.00 assigned to the tax group shown in Figure 10 5. This tax group contains three tax codes. Each tax code is assigned a precedence number and the Taxable Basis for the second tax code in the group is Prior Tax.
Tax Calculation
10 31
Figure 10 5 Taxable Basis of Prior Tax in a Tax Group
Note: The numbered circles represent the precedence numbers assigned to each tax code in the tax group. The tax engine uses the first tax code in the group to calculate tax of $30,000.00 (30% x $100,000.00). It then uses only the tax amount from the first line to calculate tax for the second tax line, because the Taxable Basis is set to Prior Tax. As a result, tax for the second line is $3,000.00 (10% x $30,000.00). The third tax code in the group has no Taxable Basis, so the tax engine calculates tax based on the original invoice amount, plus the tax from the previous two tax lines. Therefore, tax for the third tax code in the group is $13,300.00 (10% x ($100,000.00 + $30,000.00 + $3,000.00)). Finally, Receivables adds the total tax for all three lines to the original invoice amount for a total of $146,300.00.
See Also
Tax Groups: page 6 20
10 32
Controlling Tax from your Revenue Account

If you use the Account Method for VAT compliance, you can set up Receivables to use the tax code assigned to the Natural Account segment of your Revenue account when you manually enter transactions or import them using AutoInvoice. You can assign a tax code to your Revenue Account in the Oracle General Ledger Tax Options window. If you set up your system this way, the tax code assigned to your Revenue account will be the default whenever you enter or import invoices, debit memos, or onaccount credit memos into Receivables. You can also ensure that the tax code for your transaction lines match the tax code assigned to your Revenue account when you enter transactions. If you set the Receivables system option Enforce Tax Code from Revenue Account to Yes, the Transactions Workbench will not let you complete a transaction unless the tax code for each line is the same as the tax code assigned to your Revenue account. This ensures that the VAT amounts in your tax returns reconcile to the tax liability accounts and that the taxable amounts in your tax returns reconcile to the Profit and Loss accounts. Suggestion: If you enforce validation on tax codes from the revenue account, you should not derive tax codes from customers, customer sites, or inventory items. The table below summarizes how your setup affects tax code validation at the invoice line level.
Setting of GL account option Allow Tax Code Override No Yes No Yes
Setting of system option Enforce Tax From Revenue Account Yes Yes No No
Will Receivables enforce the tax code from the Revenue account? Yes (you cannot enter a new tax code) No (you can override the default tax code) No (you cannot override the default tax code) No (you can override the default tax code)
Tax Calculation
10 33
See Also
Setup Steps for Value Added Tax: page 2 11
Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure

Receivables provides the following predefined Sales Tax Location Flexfield structures.
Struct. Structure Id Name 1 No Validation Country State.City Enabled Segment Country Enabled Qualifiers COUNTRY, TAX_ACCOUNT STATE, TAX_ ACCOUNT, EXEMPT_LEVEL CITY
Value Sets AR_LOC_COUNTRY
State
AR_LOC_STATE
City
AR_LOC_CITY_GIVEN_ STATE AR_LOC_PROVINCE
Province.City
Province
PROVINCE, TAX_ACCOUNT, EXEMPT_LEVEL CITY
City
AR_LOC_CITY_GIVEN_ PROVINCE AR_LOC_CITY_NO_ PARENT AR_LOC_PROVINCE_NO_ PARENT AR_LOC_STATE
City
City
CITY, TAX_ACCOUNT PROVINCE, TAX_ACCOUNT STATE, TAX_ACCOUNT, EXEMPT_LEVEL COUNTY CITY
Province
Province
101
State.County .City
State
County City Table 10 7 (Table 1 of 1)
AR_LOC_COUNTY AR_LOC_CITY
You can choose to create a customized Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure to either change the segments at which your Tax Account and
10 34
Exempt Level qualifiers are enabled or to use different address segments. In either case, you cannot simply modify an existing structure. You must define a new Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure and corresponding descriptive flexfield contexts. This prevents your customized structure from being overwritten during an upgrade. Caution: When defining a new Sales Tax Location Flexfield, be sure that the line number for the segments matches the column number that a particular segment uses. For example, the column LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_1 must be line number 1, LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_2 must be line number 2, and so on. If the line number and column number do not match, you will receive errors when compiling the new structure.
Attention: You cannot update your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure after you have entered transactions or customer addresses.
The table below provides general information about the Sales Tax Location Flexfield. Sales Tax Location Flexfield
Owner Flexfield Code Table Name Number of Columns Width of Columns Dynamic Inserts Possible Unique ID Column Structure Column Table 10 8 (Page 1 of 1) Oracle Receivables RLOC AR_LOCATION_COMBINATIONS 10 22 Yes LOCATION_ID LOCATION_STRUCTURE_ID
See Also
Setting Up Tax: page 10 9 Calculating Tax: page 10 16 Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 38
Tax Calculation
10 35
Change Assignments for Tax Account and Exempt Level Qualifiers

Modify Your Tax Account Qualifier You can control the level of detail for your Sales Tax Liability accounts. Typically, a distinct liability account is created for each state. You can however, create distinct accounts for each city or county. Receivables assigns the Account Qualifier at the State segment of the recommended Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure State.County.City. You can assign the Tax Account qualifier to any segment of your flexfield structure in the Key Flexfields window, but you can assign it to only one segment. Then, when you define tax accounts in the Tax Locations and Rates window, you will be able to assign them to components of this segment. Therefore, if you assign the tax account qualifier to the State segment, you can define tax accounts at the State level only. Note: The tax account defined for your Location Tax Code will be the default tax account in the Tax Locations and Rates window. Refer to the chart in Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 34 to see the default levels at which Receivables enables the Tax Account qualifier in the seeded tax structures. This is a mandatory qualifier, so you must assign it to one, and only one, segment of your flexfield structure. Modify Your Exempt Level Qualifier Receivables will create unapproved customer certificates at the billto customer site and the shipto state. This is the normal behavior if the Exempt Level Qualifier has been assigned to the State segment of the Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. Using the Exempt Level Qualifier you can control the level of detail at which the unapproved certificate will be automatically created during invoice entry and import. Refer to the chart in Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 34 to see the levels at which Receivables defaults the Exempt Level qualifier in the seeded tax structures. This is an optional qualifier. If no Exempt Level qualifier is enabled, automatic exemptions will be created at the customer level. Calculate Tax Externally Receivables can integrate tax calculation programs which are external to the product using the Tax Vendor Extension. This lets you provide for
10 36
complex tax calculation needs while retaining the full power of Receivables to create and store all other tax data. Import Sales Tax Locations and Rates You can use the Sales Tax Rate Interface program to load locations and sales tax rate records into Receivables. These will be used for both address validation and the calculation of sales tax. If you subscribe to a tax service, you can use this program to load the locations and rates that the tax service supplies. Create Tax Exemptions Tax exemptions let you fully or partially exempt specific customers or items from tax. You can use exemptions in either a VAT or locationbased tax environment. You can define exemptions either at the customer or item level or specify them at the regional levels. For example, you could create a customer exemption such that the customer is always exempt from tax, or is exempt only in the state of California. Create Tax Exceptions Tax exceptions are special tax rates that are assigned to items being shipped to specific addresses. Tax exceptions are only used when you are calculating locationbased tax. To use item tax rate exceptions your Location Flexfield Strructure must be State.County.City. Reconcile US Sales Tax Receivables provides the US Sales Tax Report to assist you in preparing Sales Tax Returns and in reconciling these returns to your General Ledger. The report lists the gross, taxable, exempt and tax amounts for a given period, broken down by state, county and city, to let you identify and review your sales tax liability to the various tax authorities around the US.
See Also
Calculating Tax: page 10 16
Tax Calculation
10 37
Defining a Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure

Define Value Sets You can use existing value sets if the value sets for your new structure have the same parent as an existing value set. For example, if your new structure is County.City, you can use the seeded AR_LOC_CITY value set for your City segment, as this has County as its parent. However, you must create a new value set for the county segment, as the seeded County value set has a parent and your new value set does not. Use the Define Value Set window to define new value sets. Query one of the default value sets provided by Receivables and copy all of the values except for the Name, Description and WHERE/ORDER BY values. Enter a name and description that reflects the kind of value set you are defining. For example, if you are defining a value set for the parent County segment, you might call it AR_LOC_COUNTY_NO_PARENT. If you are defining a value set for the parent segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, you must enter the following SQL clause in the WHERE/ORDER BY field:
where AR_LOCATION_VALUES.location_segment_qualifier|| = <segment_name>
If you are defining the value set for the segments other than the parent segment, you must enter the following SQL clause in the WHERE/ORDER BY field:
where AR_LOCATION_VALUES.location_segment_qualifier|| = <segment_name> AND AR_LOCATION_VALUES.parent_segment_id = nvl(:$PARENT_VALUE_SET$, AR_LOCATION_VALUES.parent_segment_id)
Define a New Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure After you define your value sets, you need to define your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure in the Key Flexfield Segments window. Query Sales Tax Location Flexfield in the Flexfield Title field; Receivables will return all the seeded Sales Tax Location Flexfield structures in the Structures region. To enter your new Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, choose New Record from the Edit menu. Be sure to use a unique name for your new structure.
10 38
When you define each segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, make sure you define them in the order of their dependencies. For example, if you are defining a new two segment structure using county and city, and county is your parent segment, define county as your first segment and city as your second segment. When you assign columns to each segment, make sure you assign them in ascending order, starting with LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_1. In the example above you would assign LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_1 to your first segment (County) and LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_2 (City) to your second segment. Use this window to also assign your new value sets and flexfield qualifiers to each segment. You should only enable one Location qualifier for each segment. In the example above you would enable the County qualifier for the County segment and the City qualifier for the City segment. You must also enable your Tax Account and Exempt Level qualifiers as described above, then freeze your new structure. Define Your Descriptive Flexfield Contexts After defining your new Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, you must define contexts for the following descriptive flexfields in the Descriptive Flexfield Segments window. Sales Tax Rate Assignment Flexfield: This flexfield displays in the Tax field of the Review Sales Tax Rates window. Item Exception Rate Assignment Flexfield: This flexfield displays in the Tax Rate Description field of the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window. Item Exception Rate Location Flexfield: This flexfield displays in the Location Description field of the Item Tax Rate Exceptions window. Exempt Regions Flexfield: This flexfield displays in the Location field of the Tax Exemptions window. Override Sales Tax Rates Flexfield: This field appears in the Rates region of the Tax Locations and Rates window. Query each flexfield by entering the flexfield name in the Title field of the Descriptive Flexfield zone and Receivables in the Application field. Receivables displays the seeded context values (one for each seeded Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure) in the Context Field Values region. Select New Record from the Edit menu to create a row where you can enter your new context field value. The value that you enter in
Tax Calculation
10 39
the Name field must be set to the ID of your new Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. Use the following SQL script to determine the ID:
$ sqlplus <AOL username>/<AOL password>
SQL> select id_flex_structure_name, id_flex_num from fnd_id_flex_structures where id_flex_code = RLOC;
After entering the Flexfield structure ID in the Name field and a description in the Description field, enter the segments and associated value sets for this Descriptive Flexfield. Define the same number of segments for each of the descriptive flexfields as you defined for your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. The only exception to this rule is the Override Sales Tax Rates flexfield. As the override only applies to segments above the City segment, this structure should only include the segments that you defined above the City segment for which you want to allow overrides. For example, if your Sales Tax Location Flexfield has County.City as the structure, the Override Sales Tax Rates Flexfield should have just one segment relating to County for its structure.
Attention: If you wish to use the override feature, you must include City in your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure.
Hence, using our County.City example, you would create your new descriptive flexfields as follows: Sales Tax Rate Assignment Flexfield
Column: LOCATION1_RATE Value Set: AR_SALES_TAX_RATES Column: LOCATION2_RATE Value Set: AR_SALES_TAX_RATES
Item Exception Rate Assignment Flexfield

Column: LOCATION1_RATE Value Set: AR_SALES_TAX_RATES Column: LOCATION2_RATE Value Set: AR_SALES_TAX_RATES
Item Exception Rate Location Flexfield

Column: LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_1 Value Set: AR_LOC_COUNTY_NO_PARENT Column: LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_2
10 40
Value Set: AR_LOC_CITY
Exempt Regions Flexfield

Column: LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_1 Value Set: AR_LOC_COUNTY_NO_PARENT Column: LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_2 Value Set: AR_LOC_CITY
Override Sales Tax Rates Flexfield

Column: OVERRIDE_RATE1 Value Set: AR_SALES_TAX_RATES
Note: AR_LOC_COUNTY_NO_PARENT has been used in this example, as this is the name given to the new value set in our previous example. Be sure to freeze all five descriptive flexfield definitions when they are complete. Specify Your Location Flexfield Structure System Option After defining your new Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, value sets, and your descriptive flexfield contexts, you must choose your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure in the Location Flexfield Structure field of the System Options window. Upon saving this change, Receivables submits three concurrent programs. These concurrent programs create PL*SQL packages to interface between the tax windows and tax tables. Use the View Requests window to verify that these three concurrent requests have completed without error. The following is an example of the comments that should be displayed at the end of the log files:
No errors APP43157 Expansion completed without any errors
Concurrent process completed successfully
Attention: You cannot update your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure once you have entered customer addresses or transactions.
If Your Concurrent Programs Fail If your concurrent programs fail, check the following:
Tax Calculation
10 41
The segments in your Sales Tax Location Flexfield and the Descriptive Flexfields are enabled. Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield and the five Descriptive Flexfields are frozen. The flexfield qualifier enabled for each location is correct. For example, if the segment is County, the County flexfield qualifier must be enabled. The Tax Account qualifier is assigned to one, and only one, segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. The Exempt Level qualifier is assigned to one, and only one, segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. The column that you assign to the first Sales Tax Location Flexfield segment is LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_1 and the second segment is assigned to LOCATION_ID_SEGMENT_2 and so on. The SQL clause for the WHERE/ORDER BY field is correct for each value set. The SQL clause for the value set assigned to your parent segment is different from the SQL clause assigned to the value set for your nonparent segments. The parent segment is the first segment of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. The Descriptive Flexfield context field value names are set to the ID of your Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure, the Descriptive Flexfield segments refer to the correct value set and the structure of the Descriptive Flexfields correctly maps to the Sales Tax Location Flexfield structure. Your system has free disk space.
See Also
Setting Up Tax: page 10 9 Calculating Tax: page 10 16 Customizing Your Sales Tax Location Flexfield Structure: page 10 34
10 42
Glossary
accounting rule start date The date Oracle Receivables uses for the first accounting entry it creates when you use an accounting rule to recognize revenue. accounting rules Rules that AutoInvoice uses to specify revenue recognition schedules for your transactions. You can define an accounting rule where revenue is recognized over a fixed or variable period of time. For example, you can define a fixed duration accounting rule with monthly revenue recognition for a period of 12 months. acquisition tax VAT on the acquisition of goods from a VAT Registered supplier in another EU member state will be zerorated. The receiver must account for VAT as both Input and Output amounts at the VAT rate applicable for the same goods in the country that they are received, giving a net VAT liability of zero. Oracle Implements Acquisition tax with Oracle Payables using Offset Taxes. accrual accounting An accounting method you use to recognize revenue when you create invoices. adjustment A Receivables feature that allows you to increase or decrease the amount due of your invoice, debit memo, chargeback, deposit, or guarantee. Oracle Receivables lets you create manual or automatic adjustments. applied Payment in which you record the entire amount as settlement for one or more debit items. AutoAccounting A feature that lets you determine how the Accounting Flexfields for your revenue, receivable, freight, tax, unbilled receivable and unearned revenue account types are created. AutoInvoice A program that imports invoices, credit memos, and on account credits from other systems to Receivables.
Glossary 1
balancing segment An Accounting Flexfield segment that you define so that General Ledger automatically balances all journal entries for each value of this segment. For example, if your company segment is a balancing segment, General Ledger ensures that, within every journal entry, the total debits to company 01 equal the total credits to company 01. beginning balance The beginning balance is the balance of the transaction item as of the beginning GL Date that you specified. This amount should be the same as the Outstanding Balance amount of the Aging 7 Buckets Report where the As Of Date is the same as the beginning GL Date. bill in advance An invoicing rule that enables you to record the receivable at the beginning of the revenue recognition schedule for invoices that span more than one accounting period. See also invoicing rules, bill in arrears. bill in arrears An invoicing rule that records the receivable at the end of the revenue recognition schedule for invoices that span more than one accounting period. See also invoicing rules, bill in advance. Bill of Exchange An agreement made with your customer in which they promise to pay a specified amount on a specific date (called the maturity date) for goods or services. This process involves the transfer of funds from your customers bank account to your bank account. Bill To Address The address of the customer who is to receive the invoice. Equivalent to Invoice To Address in Oracle Order Management.
business group The highest level of organization and the largest grouping of employees across which a company can report. A business group can correspond to an entire company, or to a specific division within the company. business group The highest level of organization and the largest grouping of employees across which a company can report. A business group can correspond to an entire company, or to a specific division within the company. business purpose The business reason you have for communicating with a customers address. For example, you would assign the business purpose of ShipTo to an address if you ship products to that address. If you also send invoices to that address, you could also assign the business purpose Bill To. cash basis An accounting method that lets you recognize revenue at the time payment is received for an invoice. chargebacks A new debit item that you assign to your customer when closing an existing, outstanding debit item. columns Oracle database tables consist of columns. Each column contains one type of information. The format to indicate tables and columns is: (TABLE_NAME.COLUMN_NAME).
Glossary 2
complete invoice An invoice whose status is Complete. In order for an invoice to have a status of Complete, the invoice total must be greater than or equal to zero, have at least one invoice line, revenue records must exist for each line, revenue records for each line must add up to the line amount, and a tax and sales credit record must exist for each line. contact A representative who is responsible for communication between you and a specific part of your customers company. For example, your customer may have a shipping contact person who handles all questions regarding orders shipped to that address. Oracle Receivables lets you enter contacts for your customers, addresses, and business purposes. Consumers Use Tax Any company receiving goods within a state must either pay sales tax on receipt or selfaccrue a Use tax, normally to the same value. The selfaccrual scheme ensures that the state receives income independent of the vendors registration. control file A file used by SQL*Loader to map the data in your bank file to tables and columns in the Oracle database. You must create one control file for each different bank file you receive, unless some or all of your banks use the exact same format. conversion A process that converts foreign currency transactions to your functional currency. corporate exchange rate An exchange rate you can optionally use to perform foreign currency conversion. The corporate exchange rate is usually a standard market rate determined by senior financial management for use throughout the organization. You define this rate in Oracle General Ledger.
credit items Any item you can apply to an open debit item to reduce the balance due for a customer. Oracle Receivables includes credit memos, on account credits, and unapplied and on account cash as credit items. Credit items remain open until you apply the full amount to debit items. credit memo A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice. You can create credit memos in the Receivables Credit Transactions window or with AutoInvoice. credit memo reasons Standard explanations as to why you credit your customers. (Receivables QuickCode) customer address A location where your customer can be reached. A customer can have many addresses. You can also associate business purposes with addresses. customer business purpose See business purpose. customer site A site where a customer is located. A customer can have more than one site. Site names can more easily identify a customer address, facilitating invoice and order entry. debit items Any item that increases your customers balance. Oracle Receivables includes invoices, debit memos, and chargebacks as debit items. Debit items remain open until the balance due is zero. deferral France, Italy and Russia allow the liability on Output VAT to be deferred until payment has been collected on certain transactions. This is referred to as Cash accounting for VAT and, if allowed, may be used in an accrual system.
Glossary 3
debit memo reversal A reversal of a payment that generates a new debit memo, instead of reopening old invoices and debit memos. debit memos Debits that you assign to your customer for additional charges that you want to collect. For example, you may want to charge your customers for unearned discounts taken, additional freight charges, taxes, and finance charges. deposit A type of commitment whereby a customer agrees to deposit or prepay a sum of money for the future purchase of goods and services. descriptive flexfielddescriptive flexfield A field that your organization can extend to capture extra information that is otherwise not tracked by Oracle Applications. A Descriptive Flexfield appears on your window as a single character, unnamed field. Your organization can customize this field to capture additional information that is necessary and unique to your business. direct debit An agreement made with your customer to allow the transfer of funds from their bank account to your bank account. The transfer of funds occurs when the bank receives a document or tape containing the invoices to be paid. discount The amount or percentage that you allow a customer to decrease the balance due for a debit item. In Receivables, you use Payment Terms to define customer discounts and can choose whether to allow earned and unearned discounts. document rounding VAT amounts are typically calculated once per tax code within an invoice. Receivables controls tax codes at the document line, but allows VAT amounts to be rounded at the document header or line.
domestic transaction Transactions between registered traders in the same EU (European Union) country. Domestic transactions have VAT charged on goods and services with different countries applying different VAT rates to specific goods and services. due to An asset account you use to record the noncurrent portion of a longterm loan from one fund to another fund within the same reporting entity. dynamic insertion An Oracle Applications feature that lets you automatically create new key flexfield combinations when you enter transactions or customers. If you do not use dynamic insertion, you can only create new key flexfield combinations using the various flexfield setup forms. earned discounts Discounts your customers are allowed to take if they remit payment for their invoices on or before the discount date. The discount date is determined by the payment terms assigned to an invoice. Oracle Receivables takes into account any discount grace days you assign to this customers credit profile. For example, if the discount due date is the 15th of each month, but discount grace days is 5, your customer must pay on or before the 20th to receive the earned discount. Discounts are determined by the terms you assign to an invoice during invoice entry. See also unearned discounts. ending balance The ending balance represents the balance of the transaction as of the ending GL Date that you have specified. This column should be the same as the Outstanding Balance of the Aging 7 Buckets Report for this item.
Glossary 4
EU (European Union) The European Union is a single European market where customs and tariff barriers between member states have been removed. exchange rate A rate that represents the amount in one currency that you can exchange for another at a particular point in time. You can enter and maintain daily exchange rates for Oracle Receivables to use to perform foreign currency conversion. Oracle Receivables multiplies the exchange rate by the foreign currency to calculate the functional currency. exchange rate type A specification of the source of an exchange rate. For example, a user exchange rate or a corporate exchange rate. See also corporate exchange rate, spot exchange rate. export transactions Transactions between a Canadian trader and a vendor or customer located outside Canada. Customers and sites outside Canada may be tax exempt and should have a zero tax code assigned to all invoices. factoring The process by which you sell your accounts receivable to a financial institution (such as a bank) in return for cash. Financial institutions usually charge a fee for factoring. finance charges Additional charges that you assign to customers for past due items. You specify whether you want to charge your customers finance charges in their customer profiles. Finance charges can be included on your customers statements and dunning letters.
FOB (Free On Board) The point or location where the ownership title of goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer. This indicates that delivery of a shipment will be made on board or into a carrier by the shipper without charge, and is usually followed by a shipping point or destination (e.g. FOB Our warehouse in New York). (Receivables QuickCode) freight carrier A commercial company used to send product shipments to your customers. functional currency The principal currency you use to record transactions and maintain accounting data within Oracle Receivables. The functional currency is usually the currency in which you perform most of your business transactions. You specify the functional currency for each set of books in the Set of Books window. The principal currency you use to record transactions and maintain accounting data within Receivables. The functional currency is usually the currency in which you perform most of your business transactions. You specify the functional currency for each set of books in the Set of Books window. general ledger date The date used to determine the correct accounting period for your transactions. The Oracle Receivables posting program uses this date when posting transactions to your general ledger. GL Date range An accounting cycle that is defined by a beginning and ending GL Date.
Glossary 5
Goods and Services Tax Goods and Services Tax (GST) is tax levied on many consumer products and professional services. Some goods and services are exempt from GST (for example, health and educational services). Depending on whether a purchase is considered commercial or not determines if the recovery of the tax can be made through a rebate, an Input Tax Credit (ITC), or both. Currently, the GST rate is seven percent. Harmonized Sales Tax Effective April 1, 1997, the provinces of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick and Newfoundland combined their Provincial Sales Tax (PST) with the federal sales tax to form a harmonized, value added tax called Harmonized Sales Tax (HST). The HST operates as a single rate of 15%, of which seven percent represent the federal component and eight percent the provincial component. Most tax registrants will operate on a taxexcluded basis. However, the government has reserved the right to legislate tax included if more than 51% of the population agree to adopt this blended tax rate. import program A program that imports your bank file from an external system into Oracle Receivables. Oracle Receivables is set up to work with SQL*Loader as the import program. Two sample SQL*Loader control files are included with Oracle Receivables to assist you in writing your own custom control file. imported invoice An invoice that is imported into Oracle Receivables using the AutoInvoice program.
incomplete invoice An invoice whose status has not been changed to Complete or that has failed validation. input tax credit Businesses registered for Goods and Services Tax (GST) purposes are required to collect GST for goods and services that are subject to GST. They can then claim Input Tax Credits (ITC) for the GST that they paid to produce the goods and services which are subject to GST. The net amount (collectible GST, less ITC) is remitted to the federal government. input VAT The tax charge on the receipt of taxable goods and services (e.g. tax on supplier invoices or expense items). Input VAT should be reported wherever you account for expenditures. Input VAT is usually deductible. installment One of many successive payments of a debt. You specify a payment schedule when you define your payment terms. intraEU, taxed transactions Transactions between nonregistered traders in different EU (European Union) countries. VAT must be charged to customers within the EU if you do not know their VAT registration number. The destination country and inventory item controls which VAT rate to use. intraEU, zerorated transactions Transactions between registered traders in different EU (European Union) countries. An IntraEU transaction is zero rated if and only if you know the customers VAT registration number; otherwise, VAT must be charged on the invoice.
Glossary 6
invoice A document that you create in Oracle Receivables that lists amounts owed for the purchases of goods or services. This document also lists any tax, freight charges, and payment terms. invoice batch A group of invoices you enter together to ensure accurate invoice entry. Invoices within the same batch share the same batch source and batch name. Receivables displays any differences between the control and actual counts and amounts. An invoice batch can contain invoices in different currencies. invoice date The date an invoice was created. This is also the date that Oracle Receivables prints on each invoice. Oracle Receivables also use this date to determine the payment due date based on the payment terms you specify on the invoice. Oracle Receivables ensures that your invoice date always matches your general ledger date. invoice number A number or combination of numbers and characters that uniquely identifies an invoice within your system. Usually generated automatically by your receivables system to avoid assigning duplicate numbers. invoicing rules Rules that Receivables uses to determine when you will bill your customer and the accounting period in which the receivable amount is recorded. You can bill In Advance or In Arrears. See also bill in advance, bill in arrears. Item Flexfield See System Items Flexfield.
Item Validation Organization The organization that contains your master list of items. You define this organization by setting the OE: Item Validation Organization profile option. See also organization. Japanese Consumption Tax The Value Added Tax (VAT) paid on any expense (Input VAT) is usually recoverable against the VAT Charged on revenue (Output VAT). This ensures that VAT is not inflationary within a supply chain. Journal Import A General Ledger program that creates journal entries from transaction data stored in the General Ledger GL_INTERFACE table. Journal entries are created and stored in GL_JE_BATCHES, GL_JE_HEADERS, and GL_JE_LINES. jurisdiction code An abbreviated address that is specific to a Tax Supplier and more accurate than a simple five digit zip code. key flexfield An Oracle Applications feature you use to build custom fields used for entering and displaying information relating to your business. Oracle Receivables uses the following key flexfields: Accounting Flexfield Sales Tax Location Flexfield System Items Flexfield Territory Flexfield
Glossary 7
maturity date A date that determines when funds for an automatic receipt can be transferred from your customers bank account to your bank account. See also Bill of Exchange. miscellaneous receipts A feature that lets you record payments that you do not apply to debit items, such as refunds and interest income. model invoice An invoice used as a template that you copy to create new invoices. Natural Account The segment of your accounting flexfield that you assign the qualifier Natural Account. This segment indicates whether the Accounting Flexfield is an Asset, Liability, Equity, Revenue, or Expense account. In Receivables, the Natural Account typically identifies the Revenue account. nexus Refers to the minimum contact necessary to allow a taxing jurisdiction the authority to impose a registration, tax filing, and/or tax collection responsibility. Within a jurisdiction, nexus standards may vary from one type of tax to another. For example, the nexus standards for sales and use tax may be different from those for income tax.The type of activity required to create nexus is defined by state or local statute, case law, and the due process and Commerce Clause of the US Constitution. Whether a business has established nexus in a taxing jurisdiction requires an assessment of all facts and circumstances of its activity within that jurisdiction. You should seek the advice of a qualified tax professional to determine if your business has established nexus (a registration and filing requirement) before you implement sales tax.
nondeductible input VAT The VAT amount paid on expense items that may not be reclaimed against Output VAT. Usually, all items purchased for a business are deductible. Certain high value purchases, (for example, luxury cars for an executives spouse) may be considered nondeductible. For small companies, service or items of value to both the owner and business may be partially nondeductible. on account Payments where you intentionally apply all or part of the payment amount to a customer without reference to a debit item. On account examples include prepayments and deposits. order date The date upon which an order for goods or services is entered. organization A business unit such as a company, division, or department. Organization can refer to a complete company, or to divisions within a company. Typically, you define an organization or a similar term as part of your account when you implement Oracle Financials. See also business group. other receipts See miscellaneous receipts. output VAT The tax charge on the supply of taxable goods and services (e.g. tax on customer invoices or revenue items). Output VAT should be reported wherever you account for sales. payment Any form of remittance, including checks, cash, money orders, credit cards, and Electronic Funds Transfer.
Glossary 8
payment schedules The due date and discount date for payment of an invoice. For example, the payment term 2% 10, Net 30 lets a customer take a two percent discount if payment is received within 10 days with the full invoice amount due within 30 days of the invoice date. See also scheduled payment, payment terms. payment terms The due date and discount date for payment of a transaction. For example, the payment term 2% 10, Net 30 lets a customer take a two percent discount if payment is received within 10 days; after 10 days, the entire balance is due within 30 days of the invoice date with no applicable discount. See also discount, scheduled payment. primary salesperson The salesperson that receives 100% of the sales credits when you first enter an invoice or commitment. Provincial Sales Tax Provincial Sales Tax (PST) is levied by each Canadian province except Alberta, the Territories, and the participating provinces where the PST rate is now blended with the federal tax rate. Unlike GST, there is no recoverable input tax credit for provincial sales tax paid (except for Quebec where PST is recoverable as input tax credit, similar to GST). Each province has its own legislation that determines its own PST Rate and decides which goods and services are exempt from PST. The appropriate Provincial Sales Tax is based upon the destination of the goods or services, not their origin. QuickCodes Codes that you define for the activities and terminology you use in your business.
reasons Standard definitions that you can customize to clarify your adjustment entries, debit memos, customer responses, invoices, credit memos, payment reversals and on account credits. Use reasons to improve the quality of your reporting. Recargo de Equivalencia An additional tax levied in Spain on specific types of businesses. The rate of tax is related to the primary rate of VAT for the item sold. receivable activities Predefined Receivables activities used to define the general ledger accounts with which you associate your receivables activities. receivables activity name A name that you use to refer to a receivables activity. You use your receivables activities during the setup process to create accounting distributions for cash and miscellaneous receipt payments, receivables adjustments, discounts, receivables accounts, and finance charges. reconciliation An analysis that explains the difference between two balances. If you are using Cash Management to reconcile receipts, payments are reconciled when they are matched to a bank statement line. rollforward The process of taking the beginning balance of a period and then accounting for the transactions within that period by attempting to equate the beginning balance with the ending balance for the period.
Glossary 9
sales tax structure The collection of taxing bodies that you will use to determine your tax authority. State.County.City is an example of a Sales Tax Structure. Oracle Receivables adds together the tax rates for all of these components to determine a customers total tax liability for salesperson A person who is responsible for the sale of products or services. Salespeople are associated with orders, returns, invoices, commitments, and customers. You can also assign sales credits to your salespeople. scheduled payment A schedule used to determine the amount and date of payment due. You use payment terms to determine your scheduled payment as well as any discounts offered. See also payment terms. senior tax authority The first tax location in your sales tax structure. This segment does not have a parent location. For example, in the sales tax structure State.County.City, State is the senior tax authority. set of books A financial reporting entity that uses a particular chart of accounts, functional currency and accounting calendar. You must define at least one set of books for each business location. ship date The date upon which a shippable item is shipped. Ship To Address The address of the customer who is to receive products or services listed on the invoice or order. ship via See freight carrier. site use See business purpose.
situs The situs of taxation describes which authority levies the tax. Usually this is the ShipTo state, county, and city. However, some caution should be exercised as the shipto situs may not be controlling for local tax purposes (local taxes are commonly determined based on the shipfrom, not shipto, location). Any tax collected for a given authority must be reported back to that same authority. split amount A dollar amount that determines the number of invoices over and under this amount, as well as the total amounts remaining. For example, your company generates invoices that are either $300 or $500. You choose $400 as your split amount so that you can review how much of your open receivables are comprised of your $300 business and how much corresponds to your $500 business. split payment terms A feature used to automatically schedule multiple payments for an invoice. You can split payments using either a flat amount or a percentage of the total amount due. spot exchange rate A daily exchange rate you use to perform foreign currency conversions. The spot exchange rate is usually a quoted market rate that applies to the immediate delivery of one currency for another.
Glossary 10
System Items Flexfield A flexfield that allows you to define the structure of your item identifier according to your business requirements. You can choose the number and order of segments (such as product and product line), the length of each segment, and other characteristics. You can define up to twenty segments for your item. Also known as Item Flexfield. tax authority A governmental entity that collects taxes on goods and services purchased by a customer from a supplier. In some countries, there are many authorities (e.g. state, local and federal governments in the US), while in others there may be only one. Each authority may charge a different tax rate. Within Oracle Receivables, tax authority consists of all components of your tax structure. For example: California.San Mateo.Redwood Shores for State.County.City. Oracle Receivables adds together the tax rates for all of these locations to determine a customers total tax liability for an . tax codes Codes to which you assign sales tax or valueadded tax rates. Oracle Receivables lets you choose state codes as the tax code when you define sales tax rates for the United States. (Receivables QuickCode)
tax engine A collection of programs, user defined system parameters, and hierarchical flows used by Receivables to calculate tax. tax exempt A customer, business purpose, or item to which tax charges do not apply. tax location A specific tax location within your tax authority. For example Redwood Shores is a tax location in the Tax Authority California.San Mateo.Redwood Shores. transaction type An invoice control feature that lets you specify default values for invoice printing, posting to the general ledger, and updating open receivable balances. unapplied payment The status of a payment for which you can identify the customer, but you have not applied or placed on account all or part of the payment. For example, you receive a check for $1200.00 and you apply it to an open debit item for $1000.00. The remaining $200.00 is unapplied until you either apply the payment to a debit item or place the amount On Account.
Glossary 11
unearned discounts Discounts your customers are allowed to take if they pay for their invoices after the discount date. (The discount date is determined by the payment terms.) You can specify at the system level whether you want to allow customers to take unearned discounts. See also payment terms. US Sales and Use tax Sales and use tax are a matter of State and Local law, rules, regulations, and court cases. As such, the rules are not uniform. So, what may be exempt in State A may be taxable in State B. However, in general, sales tax is levied on the end consumer with businesses serving as the collection agent for the taxing authority. Various exemptions are available, including, but not limited to: resales, manufacturing, research and development, nonprofit or exempt organizations, and governmental organizations. The availability and type of exemption allowed varies by state. Many taxes may apply to a single transaction, including state, County, City, Transit, and Muni tax. Filing requirements vary by state and local jurisdiction. Also, the reporting of Sales and Use tax may be either on a accrual or cash basis. Filing period (e.g. annual, semiannual, quarterly, etc.) and method of accounting are generally determined by taxing jurisdiction rules and regulations.
VAT classification Each country classifies VAT into a small number of rates. Following are the five basic classes of VAT: Standard: Most transactions are classified at a Standard rate. In Europe, the Standard rate of VAT varies between 1225%. Reduced: A lower rate of tax for specific goods or services. For example, within the EU, the reduced rate is applied to consumption of domestic fuel and power. Luxury: A higher than standard rate of tax, normally applied to a very limited set of goods or services. Zero: Zerorated, gross sales are reported separately from exempt rated transactions. Exempt: Exempt from VAT. Gross sales are reported separately from zerorated transactions. VAT regime A set of VAT rules and rates applicable to a well defined set or type of transactions. In Europe, the most common VAT regimes are Domestic, Import, and InterEC. However, many countries have additional regimes for special geographical regions or types of businesses.
Glossary 12
Index
A
accounting accounting for inclusive and exclusive tax, 10 - 28 accounting for VAT, tax accounting, 5 - 2 Application Rule Sets, 5 - 28 controlling tax from the revenue account, 10 33 deferred tax accounting examples, 5 - 5 tax account qualifier, 10 - 36 tax accounting, 6 - 10 tax accounting for adjustments and finance charges, 5 - 22 tax accounting for discounts, 5 - 13 tax accounting for miscellaneous transactions, 5 - 18 ad hoc defining ad hoc tax codes, 6 - 2 tax profile option, 10 - 11 addresses, defining tax rates, 6 - 7 adjustments calculating tax on adjustments, 5 - 23 setting up tax accounting for adjustments, 5 27 tax accounting for, 5 - 22 authorities defining tax authorities, 6 - 14 tax authorities, 10 - 18
C
calculating inclusive tax, 10 - 27 overview of calculating tax, 10 - 5 tax on adjustments, 5 - 23 tax on discounts, 5 - 14 Canada Canadian tax reporting, 4 - 30 domestic transactions, 4 - 6 export transactions, 4 - 7 GST and HST tax recovery, 4 - 4 implementing Canadian sales tax, 4 - 2 overview of Canadian sales tax, 1 - 2 public service bodies, 4 - 7 setup checklist for Canadian sales tax, 4 - 8 Tax Groups, 4 - 15 verify sales tax setup, 4 - 28 compounding compounding tax, 10 - 3 compounding tax codes in a tax group, 10 29 credits calculating tax on credit memos, 10 - 12 crediting tax, 10 - 3 customers customer tax exemptions, 10 - 23 tax exempt customer report, 7 - 10
Index 1
D
deferred tax accounting, 5 - 5 accounting examples, 5 - 5 setting up, 5 - 12 discounts calculating tax on discounts, 5 - 14 setting up tax on discounts, 5 - 17 tax accounting for discounts, 5 - 13
freight inventory item for freight, 10 - 13 invoice freight as revenue, 10 - 12
G
Global Descriptive Flexfields, Tax Reporting Ledger, 9 - 68 Goods and Services Tax (GST), overview, 4 - 3 grouping, defining tax groups, 6 - 20
E
exceptions defining tax rate exceptions, 6 - 26 item exceptions, 10 - 22 tax exceptions listing, 7 - 11 VAT exception report, 2 - 34 exemptions allow override profile option, 10 - 12 defining tax exemptions, 6 - 16 item and customer exemptions, 10 - 23 tax exempt customer report, 7 - 10 tax exempt product report, 7 - 11 tax exemptions, 6 - 16 extension, implementing the tax vendor extension, 8 - 29 extract, overview of the tax extract, 9 - 2
H
Harmonized Sales Tax (HST), overview, 4 - 3
I
importing sales tax rates, 8 - 7 truncated city names, 8 - 8 inclusive tax accounting for inclusive and exclusive tax, 10 - 28 calculating inclusive tax, 10 - 27 overview, 10 - 26 interfaces action codes of the sales tax rate interface, 8 - 22 preparing to load sales tax rates, 8 - 5 running the sales tax rate interface, 8 - 13 sales tax rate interface, 8 - 2, 8 - 4 tax interface report, 8 - 16 tax rate date adjustments, 8 - 19 truncated city names, 8 - 8 using sales tax rate, 8 - 11 invoices open invoices report, 7 - 8 tax-only invoices, 10 - 25 items defining in Oracle Inventory, xii item exceptions, 10 - 22
F
finance charges setting up tax accounting for finance charges, 5 - 27 tax accounting for, 5 - 22 flexfields customizing your sales tax location flexfield structure, 10 - 34 defining a sales tax location flexfield, 10 - 38 Global Descriptive Flexfields, 9 - 68
Index 2
item exemptions, 10 - 23
O
open interfaces sales tax rate interface, 8 - 2 tax vendor extension, 8 - 29
L
ledger. See Tax Reporting Ledger listings sales tax listing, 7 - 9 tax code listing, 7 - 4 tax exceptions, 7 - 11 tax exempt customer, 7 - 10 tax exempt product listing, 7 - 11 tax group listing, 7 - 6 locations customizing your sales tax location flexfield, 10 - 34 defining a sales tax location flexfield, 10 - 38 tax codes with location based tax, 10 - 22
P
products, tax exempt product listing, 7 - 11 profile options allow ad hoc tax changes, 10 - 11 allow manual tax lines, 10 - 11 allow override of customer exemptions, 10 12 allow override of tax code, 10 - 12 calculate tax on credit memos, 10 - 12 inventory item for freight, 10 - 13 invoice freight as revenue, 10 - 12 tax profile options, 10 - 11 taxware service indicator, 10 - 13 taxware tax selection parameter, 10 - 13 taxware tax type, 10 - 14 taxware use nexpro, 10 - 14 use PL/SQL vendor, 10 - 14 use tax vendor, 10 - 13 vertex use secondary taxes, 10 - 14 Provincial Sales Tax (PST) overview, 4 - 5 tax statuses, 4 - 6
M
miscellaneous setting up tax accounting for miscellaneous transactions, 5 - 21 tax accounting for miscellaneous transactions, 5 - 18 multiple organizations, multiple organization reporting using the tax reporting ledger, 9 16
Q
qualifiers exempt level qualifier, 10 - 36 tax account qualifier, 10 - 36
N
natural account controlling tax from your revenue account, 10 - 33 definition, 2 - 8 deriving a tax code from the natural (revenue) account, 2 - 11
R
rates action codes of the sales tax rate interface, 8 - 22 defining tax rate exceptions, 6 - 26
Index 3
loading sales tax rates into the sales tax rate interface, 8 - 5 running the sales tax rate interface, 8 - 13 sales tax rate interface, 8 - 11 sales tax rate overrides, 10 - 20 sales tax rate validation, 8 - 9 tax codes and rates, 6 - 2 Receivables overview of tax setup, 10 - 9 sales tax rate interface, 8 - 2 reconciling Canadian tax reporting, 4 - 30 overview of tax reconciliation, 3 - 25 sales tax, 3 - 23, 10 - 37 sales tax returns, 3 - 27 tax reconciliation report, 7 - 12 registers financial tax register, 7 - 24 tax register report, 7 - 20 tax register types, 9 - 5 reports Canadian tax reporting, 4 - 30 country specific VAT reporting, 2 - 2 cross product reporting, 9 - 18 financial tax register, 7 - 24 matrix reporting with the tax reporting ledger, 9 - 20 overview of tax reports, 7 - 2 sales tax listing, 7 - 9 tax code listing, 7 - 4 tax exceptions listing, 7 - 11 tax exempt customer report, 7 - 10 tax exempt product report, 7 - 11 tax group listing, 7 - 6 tax interface report, 8 - 16 tax received report, 7 - 7 tax reconciliation report, 7 - 12 tax register report, 7 - 20 tax reporting ledger, 9 - 2 tax-only: open invoices report, 7 - 8 termination of the tax interface report, 8 - 18 US sales tax listing, 3 - 33 US sales tax reporting, 3 - 23
using the tax reporting ledger to create multi-org reports, 9 - 16 value added tax reports, 2 - 32 VAT exception report, 2 - 34
S
sales tax customizing your sales tax location flexfield, 10 - 34 defining a sales tax location flexfield structure, 10 - 38 implementing US sales tax, 3 - 2 loading sales tax rates into the sales tax rate interface, 8 - 5 location flexfield structure, 10 - 16 overview, 1 - 2 reconciling sales tax, 3 - 23, 10 - 37 reconciling sales tax returns, 3 - 27 running the sales tax rate interface program, 8 - 13 sales tax listing, 7 - 9 table and column descriptions, 8 - 26 tables used by the sales tax rate interface, 8 25 tax interface date adjustments, 8 - 19 tax rate interface overview, 8 - 2 tax rate interface validation, 8 - 9 transferring data from a feeder system, 8 - 7 updating the AR_TAX_INTERFACE table, 8 - 25 US sales tax report, 3 - 33 US sales tax reporting, 3 - 23 US sales tax setup checklist, 3 - 6 verifying tax setup, 3 - 21 setting up Canadian sales tax, 4 - 9 deferred tax accounting, 5 - 12 implementing Canadian sales tax, 4 - 2 implementing US sales tax, 3 - 2 overview of setting up tax, 10 - 9 sales tax location flexfield, 10 - 38 tax accounting for adjustments and finance charges, 5 - 27 tax accounting for miscellaneous transactions, 5 - 21
Index 4
tax authorities, 6 - 14 tax codes and rates, 6 - 2 tax exemptions, 6 - 16 tax groups, 6 - 20 tax locations and rates, 6 - 7 tax rate exceptions, 6 - 26 US sales tax, 3 - 6 value added tax (VAT), 2 - 6 VAT setup checklist, 2 - 10 VAT setup steps, 2 - 11 verify US sales tax setup, 3 - 21 verifying Canadian sales tax setup, 4 - 28 verifying VAT setup, 2 - 29
tax groups compounding tax codes in a Tax Group, 10 29 defining, 6 - 20 tax group listing report, 7 - 6 Tax Reporting Ledger, 9 - 2 accounting columns, 9 - 61 banking columns, 9 - 37 billing columns, 9 - 32 column descriptions, 9 - 24 extract columns, 9 - 25 financial tax register, 7 - 24 Global Descriptive Flexfields, 9 - 68 legal entity columns, 9 - 27 matrix reporting, 9 - 20 miscellaneous columns, 9 - 66 multiple organization reporting, 9 - 16 Oracle Payables tax line columns, 9 - 59 Oracle Receivables tax line columns, 9 - 60 receivables transaction columns, 9 - 37 register types, 9 - 5 reporting context columns, 9 - 26 reporting entity columns, 9 - 26 shipping columns, 9 - 34 tax amounts columns, 9 - 44 tax line columns, 9 - 48 taxable amounts columns, 9 - 38 taxable line fields columns, 9 - 43 total amounts columns, 9 - 58 transaction header columns, 9 - 29 transaction line user descriptive flexfield columns, 9 - 61 tax vendor, implementing the tax vendor extension, 8 - 29 transactions, how transaction types affect tax, 10 - 14
T
tables AR_TAX_INTERFACE, 8 - 25 sales tax rate interface table and column descriptions, 8 - 26 tax accounting deferred tax, 5 - 5 for discounts, 5 - 13 for finance charges and adjustments, 5 - 22 for miscellaneous transactions, 5 - 18 Oracle Receivables Application Rule Sets, 5 28 overview, 5 - 2 setting up tax accounting for tax codes and rates, 6 - 10 setting up tax on adjustments and finance charges, 5 - 27 setting up tax on discounts, 5 - 17 setting up tax on miscellanous transactions, 5 - 21 tax codes allow override profile option, 10 - 12 compounding tax codes in a tax group, 10 29 system-level default tax code, 10 - 9 tax code listing, 7 - 4
U
U.S., reconciling U.S. sales tax, 10 - 37 units of measure, defining in Oracle Inventory, xii
Index 5
V
VAT accounting for VAT, tax accounting, 5 - 2 controlling tax from your revenue account, 10 - 33 country specific reporting, 2 - 2 overview, 1 - 1 setting up value added tax, 2 - 6
setup checklist, 2 - 10 setup steps, 2 - 11 tax exception report, 2 - 34 tax reports, 2 - 32 transaction type, 6 - 5 vendor implementing the tax vendor extension, 8 29 use tax vendor profile option, 10 - 13
Index 6
Readers Comment Form

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual A8082801 Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this publication. Your input is an important part of the information we use for revision.
Did you find any errors? Is the information clearly presented? Do you need more information? If so, where? Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples? What features did you like most about this manual? What did you like least about it?
If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, please indicate the topic, chapter, and page number below:
Please send your comments to: Oracle Applications Documentation Manager Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood Shores, CA 94065 USA Phone: (650) 5067000 Fax: (650) 5067200 Or, send electronic mail to [email protected]. If you would like a reply, please give your name, address, and telephone number below:
Thank you for helping us improve our documentation.

Ar Tax

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ar Tax

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ar Tax

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oracler Receivables Tax Manual

US Sales Tax Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 33

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Tax Register Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 20 Financial Tax Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 24

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Audience for This Manual

How To Use This Manual

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Finding Out Whats New

Other Information Sources

Related User Guides

User Guides Related to All Products

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

User Guides Related to This Product

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Installation and System Administration Guides

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Training and Support

Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle Applications Data

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Value Added Tax

Value Added Tax

Country Specific Tax Reporting

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Value Added Tax

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Value Added Tax

Implementing Value Added Tax

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Value Added Tax

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Value Added Tax

Setup Checklist for Value Added Tax

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Setup Steps for Value Added Tax

Value Added Tax

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Home Country Does Business with

UKSTD UKZERO UKRED

IntraEUZero IntraEU Taxed

Export Transactions United Kingdom United Kingdom

Export Positive Cash Negative Cash

Value Added Tax

IntraEU, Zero Rated IntraEU, Taxed (see note) External Domestic

IntraEUZero IntraEUTaxed Export null

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Positive Cash Negative Cash

Value Added Tax

United Kingdom Italy

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

United Kingdom Germany

Value Added Tax

Oracle Receivables Tax Manual

Distance Sales Transactions

Standard Rated Product Reduced Rated Product Documentation ZeroRated Product

UKSTD UKRED UKZER UKZERO

null Yes Yes Yes *Yes

Yes Posted Show Summary and All Detail GL Date